Patent Publication Number: US-2023161131-A1

Title: Optical member driving mechanism

Description:
CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS 
     This application is a Continuation of pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/728,994, filed Dec. 27, 2019 and entitled “OPTICAL MEMBER DRIVING MECHANISM”, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/785,593, filed on Dec. 27, 2018, Provisional Application No. 62/799,886, filed on Feb. 1, 2019, Provisional Application No. 62/814,543, filed on Mar. 6, 2019, Provisional Application No. 62/836,405, filed on Apr. 19, 2019, Provisional Application No. 62/879,190, filed on Jul. 26, 2019, Provisional Application No. 887,905, filed on Aug. 16, 2019, Provisional Application No. 62/890,731, filed on Aug. 23, 2019, Provisional Application No. 62/894,295, filed on Aug. 30, 2019, Provisional Application No. 62/896,943, filed on Sep. 6, 2019 and claims priority of European Patent Application No. 19218896.9, filed Dec. 20, 2019, the entirety of which are incorporated by reference herein. 
    
    
     BACKGROUND 
     Technical Field 
     The disclosure relates to an optical member driving mechanism, and in particular to an optical member driving mechanism including a light-shielding structure and/or a light-shielding member. 
     Description of the Related Art 
     With the development of technology, many electronic devices (such as smartphones and digital cameras) nowadays perform the functions of a camera or video recorder. The use of such electronic devices has become increasingly widespread, and these electronic devices have been designed for convenience and miniaturization to provide users with more choices. 
     Electronic devices with a camera or video function usually have a lens driving module disposed therein to drive a lens to move along an optical axis. Therefore, an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function is achieved. Light may pass through the lens and form an image on a photosensitive member. 
     However, during the formation of an optical image, external noise usually enters the photosensitive member due to reflection. As a result, the image quality is usually not good enough to meet the requirement of the image quality for users. Therefore, how to solve the aforementioned problem has become an important topic. 
     BRIEF SUMMARY 
     The present disclosure provides an optical member driving mechanism. The optical member driving mechanism includes a movable portion and a fixed portion. The movable portion includes a holder for holding an optical member with an optical axis. The movable portion is movable relative to the fixed portion. The fixed portion has a housing and a base. The housing is disposed on the base, and includes a top surface and a side surface. The top surface extends in a direction that is parallel to the optical axis. The side surface extends from an edge of the top surface in a direction that is not parallel to the optical axis. The side surface has a rectangular opening. 
     In an embodiment, the base further includes a barrier that protrudes towards the top surface. When viewed in a direction that is parallel to the optical axis, the barrier and the lengthwise side of the opening at least partially overlap, and a gap is formed between the barrier and the widthwise side of the opening. In an embodiment, the barrier has a jagged structure that is disposed to face the top surface. 
     In an embodiment, the jagged structure has a plurality of peaks, and when viewed in a direction that is perpendicular to the optical axis, the peaks are exposed from the opening. In an embodiment, when viewed in a direction that is parallel to the optical axis, the peaks overlap with the opening. 
     In an embodiment, a groove is formed between the barrier and the housing, and the groove is disposed to face the top surface. The optical member driving mechanism further includes a light-shielding member that is disposed in the groove, wherein the shortest distance between the light-shielding member and the top surface is shorter than the shortest distance between the barrier and the top surface. 
     In an embodiment, the barrier further has an upper surface and a cutting surface that intersects with the upper surface, and a fillet between the upper surface and the cutting surface is not greater than 0.05 mm. In an embodiment, the barrier has a rough surface disposed to face the top surface. In an embodiment, the base has a rough surface disposed to face the top surface. 
     In an embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism further includes a light-shielding member that is disposed out of the housing, wherein when viewed in a direction that is parallel to the optical axis, the light-shielding member overlaps with the lengthwise side of the opening. 
     In an embodiment, the movable portion further includes a light-shielding sheet disposed between the carrier and the top surface. The light-shielding sheet extends towards the side surface in a direction that is substantially parallel to the optical axis, and when viewed in a direction that is perpendicular to the optical axis, the light-shielding sheet is located on the lengthwise side of the opening. 
     In an embodiment, the carrier has a protruding portion that extends towards the side surface in a direction that is substantially parallel to the optical axis, and when viewed in a direction that is perpendicular to the optical axis, the protruding portion is located on the lengthwise side of the opening. 
     In an embodiment, the fixed portion further includes a frame that is disposed between the carrier and the housing, wherein the frame has a light-shielding structure protruding towards the base. In an embodiment, when viewed in a direction that is parallel to the optical axis, the light-shielding structure at least partially overlaps with the lengthwise side of the opening, and a gap is formed between the light-shielding structure and a widthwise side of the opening. 
     In an embodiment, the light-shielding structure has a jagged structure disposed to face the base. In an embodiment, a groove is formed between the light-shielding structure and the housing, and the groove is disposed to face the top surface. In an embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism further includes a light-shielding member that is disposed in the groove, wherein the shortest distance between the light-shielding member and the base is shorter than the shortest distance between the barrier and the base. 
     In an embodiment, the light-shielding structure further has a lower surface and a cutting surface that intersects with the lower surface, and a fillet between the lower surface and the cutting surface is not greater than 0.05 mm. In an embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism further includes an electromagnetic driving assembly for driving the movable portion to move relative to the fixed portion, wherein the electromagnetic driving assembly comprises a magnetic member and a coil. Either the magnetic member or the coil is disposed on the movable portion, and the other of the magnetic member or the coil is disposed on the fixed portion. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       The disclosure can be more fully understood by reading the subsequent detailed description and examples with references made to the accompanying drawings, wherein: 
         FIG.  1    is a perspective view of an optical element driving mechanism and an optical element in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  2    is an exploded view of the optical element driving mechanism in  FIG.  1   . 
         FIG.  3    is a perspective view of the optical element driving mechanism with some elements omitted. 
         FIG.  4    is a side view of the optical element driving mechanism with some elements omitted. 
         FIG.  5    is a schematic view of a magnetic-permeable element, a first driving assembly, and a second driving assembly. 
         FIG.  6    and  FIG.  7    are schematic views of a first magnetic element. 
         FIG.  8    is a perspective view of a holder illustrated from a different perspective than  FIG.  1   . 
         FIG.  9    is a configuration of the first driving assembly and the second driving assembly in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  10    is a top view of the first driving assembly and the second driving assembly in  FIG.  9   . 
         FIG.  11    is a perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  12    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  11   . 
         FIG.  13    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line A-A shown in  FIG.  11   . 
         FIG.  14    is a perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  11    when viewed in another direction. 
         FIG.  15    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  16    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  15    when viewed in another direction. 
         FIG.  17    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  18    is a top view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  19    is a side view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  18   . 
         FIG.  20    is a perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  21    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  20   . 
         FIG.  22    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  3 -B- 3 -B shown in  FIG.  20   . 
         FIG.  23    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  20   . 
         FIG.  24    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  25    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  26    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  27    is a cross-sectional view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  28    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  29    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  30    is a schematic view of an electronic device equipped with an optical system in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  31    is a cross-sectional view illustrated along line  4 -A- 4 -A in  FIG.  30   . 
         FIG.  32    is a perspective view of a periscope optical module in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  33    is a side view of the periscope optical module in  FIG.  32   . 
         FIG.  34    is a top view of the periscope optical module in  FIG.  32   . 
         FIG.  35    is a schematic view of a first optical element in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  36    is a perspective view of the periscope optical module with a first driving assembly. 
         FIG.  37    to  FIG.  42    are different configurations of the first driving assembly in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  43    is a schematic view of a liquid lens driving assembly. 
         FIG.  44    is a schematic view of a second driving assembly and a third driving assembly. 
         FIG.  45    and  FIG.  46    are schematic views of an optical system in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  47    is a schematic diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  48    is a partial cross-sectional view of the electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  49    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  50    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism in another view according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  51    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  52    is a schematic diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention, wherein the housing is omitted; 
         FIG.  53    is a schematic diagram of a movable portion according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  54    is a top view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention, wherein the housing is omitted; 
         FIG.  55    is a bottom view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  56    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  57    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism in another view according to another embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  58    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  59    is a top view of the optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention, wherein the housing is omitted; 
         FIG.  60    is a schematic diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention, wherein the housing is omitted; and 
         FIG.  61    is a bottom view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention. 
         FIG.  62    is a schematic diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  63    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  64    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  65    is a schematic diagram of a movable portion according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  66    is a schematic diagram of the movable portion in another view according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  67    is a cross-sectional view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  68    is another cross-sectional view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  69    is a bottom view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention, wherein the base is omitted; and 
         FIG.  70    is a bottom view of the optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention, wherein the base is omitted. 
         FIG.  71    is a schematic diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  72    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  73    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  74    is a schematic diagram of a movable portion according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  75    is a schematic diagram of the movable portion in another view according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  76    is a cross-sectional view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  77    is another cross-sectional view of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention, wherein a housing is omitted; 
         FIG.  78    is a schematic diagram of a circuit board according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  79    is a schematic diagram of the optical member driving mechanism in another view according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  80    is a schematic diagram of a first electromagnetic driving member according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  81    is a schematic diagram of another first electromagnetic driving member according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  82    is a bottom view of the optical member driving mechanism to an embodiment of the invention, wherein a base is omitted; and 
         FIG.  83    is another exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention. 
         FIG.  84    is a schematic diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  85    is a partial cross-sectional view of the electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  86    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  87    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  88    is a schematic diagram of a frame according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  89    is a schematic diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention, wherein a case is omitted; 
         FIG.  90    is a schematic diagram of a first movable portion according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  91    is a cross-sectional view along the line  8 -A- 8 -A in  FIG.  89   ; 
         FIG.  92    is a schematic diagram of a second movable portion according to an embodiment of the invention; and 
         FIG.  93    is a cross-sectional view along the line  8 -B- 8 -B in  FIG.  92   . 
         FIG.  94    is a schematic diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  95    is a partial cross-sectional view of the electronic device according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  96    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  97    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  98    is a cross-sectional view along the line  9 -A- 9 -A in  FIG.  96   ; 
         FIG.  99    is a schematic diagram of a base according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  100    is a schematic diagram of a first movable portion according to an embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  101    is a cross-sectional view along the line  9 -B- 9 -B in  FIG.  96   ; 
         FIG.  102    is a schematic diagram of an optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  103    is a exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention; 
         FIG.  104    is a cross-sectional view of the optical member driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the invention; and 
         FIG.  105    is a schematic diagram of a second guiding member accommodated in a depression according to another embodiment of the invention. 
         FIG.  106    is a perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  107    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  106   . 
         FIG.  108    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  10 -C- 10 -C′ shown in  FIG.  106   . 
         FIG.  109    is a perspective view illustrating a carrier and an elastic member in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  110    is a perspective view illustrating a frame and a base in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  111    is an enlarged partial perspective view illustrating the carrier and the base in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  112    is a perspective view illustrating the carrier in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  113    shows a schematic view of an electrical device with an optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  114    shows a schematic view of the optical element driving mechanism and a prism module according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  115    shows a perspective view of the optical element driving mechanism and an optical element according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, wherein an outer frame of the optical element driving mechanism is shown as a dashed line. 
         FIG.  116    shows an exploded view of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  117    shows a schematic view of a base, a circuit board, a driving magnetic element and a circuit assembly of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  118    shows a schematic view of a driving coil and a connecting circuit of the circuit assembly of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  119 A  shows a schematic view of the base, the circuit assembly and the circuit board of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  119 B  shows a bottom view of a circuit and the circuit board of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  119 C  shows a side view of the circuit assembly and the circuit board of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  120 A  shows a partial schematic view of the base, the circuit assembly, the circuit board and an adhesive element of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, wherein the base and the circuit board are shown as a dashed line. 
         FIG.  120 B  shows a partial enlarged view of the base, the circuit assembly and the adhesive element of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, wherein the base is shown as a dashed line. 
         FIG.  121    shows a schematic view of the base, the circuit board and the adhesive element of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  122    shows a schematic view of the base and the circuit assembly of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  123    shows a schematic view of a first segment and a second segment of the circuit assembly and the connecting circuit of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  124    is a perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  125    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  124   . 
         FIG.  126    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  12 -B shown in  FIG.  124   . 
         FIG.  127    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  124   . 
         FIG.  128    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  129    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  130    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  131    is a schematic view illustrating a matrix structure in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  132    is a perspective view illustrating the matrix structure in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  133    shows a schematic view of an electrical device with an optical system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  134    shows a perspective view of the optical system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  135    shows an exploded view of the optical system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  136    shows a perspective view of a fixed part outer frame, a circuit assembly, and two metal circuit assemblies of the optical system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, wherein a fixed part outer frame surface of the fixed part outer frame is shown as a dashed line. 
         FIG.  137    shows a schematic view of the fixed part outer frame and the circuit assembly of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  138    shows a schematic view of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  139    shows a schematic view of the fixed part outer frame and the circuit assembly of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  140    shows a schematic view of the fixed part outer frame and the metal circuit assemblies of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  141    shows a perspective view of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  142    shows a top view of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  143    shows a cross-sectional view of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure along a line  13 -A- 13 -A in  FIG.  142     
         FIG.  144    shows a perspective view of the optical system according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  145    is a perspective view illustrating an optical system in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  146    is a cross-sectional view illustrating the optical system shown in  FIG.  145   . 
         FIG.  147    is a cross-sectional view illustrating the optical system in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  148    is a perspective view illustrating an optical system in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  149    is a cross-sectional view illustrating the optical system shown in  FIG.  148   . 
         FIG.  150    is a perspective view illustrating a second optical member and a fifth optical member in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  151    is a perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  152    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  151   . 
         FIG.  153    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  16 -B shown in  FIG.  151   . 
         FIGS.  154 - 156    are schematic views illustrating an optical system in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIGS.  157 - 159    are schematic views illustrating the optical system in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIGS.  160 - 162    are schematic views illustrating the optical system in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  163    is a perspective view of a light flux adjustment module in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  164    is an exploded view of a light flux adjustment module in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  165    is a cross-sectional view of a light flux adjustment module in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  166    is an enlarged view of the portion  17 -C in  FIG.  165   . 
         FIG.  167    is a schematic view of a case. 
         FIG.  168    is a schematic view of a middle plate. 
         FIG.  169    is a schematic view of a connecting element. 
         FIG.  170    is a schematic view of a first blade. 
         FIG.  171    is a schematic view of a second blade. 
         FIGS.  172  to  174    are schematic views of the light flux adjustment module when viewed in different directions. 
         FIGS.  175  to  177    are schematic views of the light flux adjustment module when viewed in different directions. 
         FIGS.  178  to  180    are schematic views of the light flux adjustment module when viewed in different directions, after the connecting element is further driven. 
         FIG.  181    is an exploded view of an optical element driving mechanism in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  182    is a schematic view of the optical element driving mechanism after an outer case is omitted. 
         FIG.  183    is a side view of some elements of the optical element driving mechanism. 
         FIG.  184    is a schematic view of the optical element driving mechanism. 
         FIG.  185    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  186    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  187    is a schematic view of an optical system in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  188    is a schematic view of an optical system in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  189    shows a front view of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  190    is an exploded diagram of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  191    is a partial exploded diagram of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  192    is a cross-sectional view of the optical element driving mechanism along line  18 -A- 18 -A′ in  FIG.  191    according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  193    is a cross-sectional view of the optical element driving mechanism along line B-B′ in  FIG.  191    according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  194    is a perspective cross-sectional diagram of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  195    is a bottom view of a part of the structure of the optical element driving mechanism according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  196    is a top view of a part of the structure of the optical element driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  197    is a partial structural diagram of the optical element driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  198    is a top view of the optical element driving mechanism in  FIG.  197    according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  199    is a cross-sectional view of the optical element driving mechanism according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  200    is a perspective view of an optical element driving mechanism and an optical element in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  201    is an exploded view of the optical element driving mechanism in  FIG.  200   . 
         FIG.  202    is a schematic view of the optical element driving mechanism. 
         FIG.  203    is a perspective view of a holder. 
         FIG.  204    is a top view of a circuit assembly. 
         FIG.  205    is a top view of a bottom. 
         FIG.  206    is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the optical element driving mechanism. 
         FIG.  207    is a perspective view of a portion of the bottom. 
         FIG.  208    is a perspective view of a portion of a second elastic element, the circuit assembly and the bottom. 
         FIG.  209    is a schematic view of a portion of the optical element driving mechanism. 
         FIG.  210    and  FIG.  211    are perspective views of a portion of the optical element driving mechanism. 
         FIG.  212    is a schematic view of an outside-connection circuit member and an electronic element. 
         FIG.  213    is a bottom view of the optical element driving mechanism. 
         FIG.  214    is a perspective view of a portion of the holder. 
         FIG.  215    is a perspective view of a portion of the holder and the second elastic element. 
         FIG.  216    is perspective view of an optical element driving mechanism in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  217    is a bottom view of an optical element driving mechanism in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  218    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  219    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. 
         FIG.  220    is a schematic sectional view of the optical module, the adjustment assembly, and the image sensor module of the camera module optical system according to an embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG.  221    is a perspective bottom view of the optical module in  FIG.  220   . 
         FIGS.  222  and  223    are schematic diagrams showing that the optical element in the optical module of the optical system in  FIG.  220    are relatively inclined with respect to the image sensor module, and undergo adjustment process. 
         FIG.  224    is a schematic diagram of the camera module optical system according to another embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG.  225    is schematic diagram of the adjustment column and several different opponent members. 
         FIG.  226    is a schematic diagram showing a plurality of adjusting columns having different shapes. 
         FIG.  227    is a schematic diagram showing a plurality of adjusting columns having different shapes. 
         FIG.  228    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  229    is an exploded view of the optical element driving mechanism in  FIG.  228   . 
         FIG.  230    is a front view of the optical element driving mechanism in  FIG.  228   . 
         FIG.  231    is a schematic view of the movable portion and the connecting element. 
         FIG.  232    is a schematic view of the base and the connecting element. 
         FIGS.  233  and  234    are schematic views of the optical element driving mechanism viewed from different directions when the optical element driving mechanism is operating, in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIGS.  235  and  236    are schematic views of the optical element driving mechanism viewed from different directions when the optical element driving mechanism is operating, in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  237    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  238    is a cross-sectional view of an optical element driving mechanism in some embodiments of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  239    is a perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  240    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism shown in  FIG.  239   . 
         FIG.  241    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  22 -B shown in  FIG.  239   . 
         FIG.  242    is a perspective view illustrating a base and a guiding assembly in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  243    is a perspective view illustrating the base and a circuit component in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  244    is a perspective view illustrating a movable portion in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  245    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  246    is a top view illustrating the base in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  247    is a bottom view illustrating the base in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. 
         FIG.  248    is a schematic diagram showing a driving mechanism for an optical element according to an embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG.  249    is an exploded view diagram showing the driving mechanism for an optical element in  FIG.  248   . 
         FIG.  250    is a front view diagram of the driving mechanism in  FIG.  248   . 
         FIG.  251    is a schematic diagram of the movable portion and the elastic assembly. 
         FIGS.  252  and  253    are schematic diagrams of the movable portion and the optical element driven by the driving assembly. 
         FIG.  254    is a schematic sectional view of the optical module, the adjustment assembly, and the image sensor module of the method for adjusting the optical system according to an embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG.  255    is a perspective bottom view of the optical module in  FIG.  254   . 
         FIGS.  256  to  259    are schematic diagrams showing the optical system in  FIG.  254    being assembled and adjusted. 
         FIG.  260    is a flowchart illustrating a method for adjusting an optical system according to an embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIGS.  261  to  262    are schematic diagrams of an optical system according to another embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG.  263    is a schematic diagram of an optical system according to another embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIGS.  264  to  266    are schematic diagrams showing an optical system being assembled and adjusted according to another embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG.  267    is a flowchart illustrating a method for adjusting an optical system according to an embodiment of the present invention. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION 
     The optical member driving mechanisms of some embodiments of the present disclosure are described in the following description. However, it should be appreciated that the following detailed description of some embodiments of the disclosure provides various concepts of the present disclosure which may be performed in specific backgrounds that can vary widely. The specific embodiments disclosed are provided merely to clearly describe the usage of the present disclosure by some specific methods without limiting the scope of the present disclosure. 
     In addition, relative terms such as “lower” or “bottom,” “upper” or “top” may be used in the following embodiments in order to describe the relationship between one element and another element in the figures. It should be appreciated that if the device shown in the figures is flipped upside-down, the element located on the “lower” side may become the element located on the “upper” side. 
     It should be understood that although the terms “first,” “second,” “third,” etc. may be used herein to describe various elements, materials and/or portions, these elements, materials and/or portions are not limited by the above terms. These terms merely serve to distinguish different elements, materials and/or portions. Therefore, a first element, material and/or portion may be referred to as a second element, material and/or portion without departing from the teaching of some embodiments in the present disclosure. 
     Unless defined otherwise, all terms (including technical and scientific terms) used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs. It should be appreciated that, in each case, the term, which is defined in a commonly used dictionary, should be interpreted as having a meaning that conforms to the relative skills of the present disclosure and the background or the context of the present disclosure, and should not be interpreted in an idealized or overly formal manner unless so defined in the present disclosure. In addition, the terms “substantially,” “approximately” or “about” may also be recited in the present disclosure, and these terms are intended to encompass situations or ranges that is substantially or exactly the same as the description herein. It should be noted that unless defined specifically, even if the above terms are not recited in the description, it should be read as the same meaning as those approximate terms are recited. 
     First Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  1    is a perspective view of an optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  and an optical element  1 - 802  in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. The optical element  1 - 802  has an optical axis  1 -O. The optical axis  1 -O is an imaginary axis passing through the center of the optical element  1 - 802 . The optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  is a telephoto lens. Specifically, the telephoto lens means a reflecting element (not shown) is used to change the direction of a light  1 -L. When the light  1 -L outside the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  enters the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  from a first direction (Y-axis), the light  1 -L is not parallel to the optical axis  1 -O and the light  1 -L may be substantially perpendicular to the optical axis  1 -O as shown in  FIG.  1   . The reflecting element (not shown) may change the direction of the light  1 -L so that the light  1 -L is substantially parallel to the optical axis  1 -O. After the light  1 -L passes through the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801 , an image may be imaged on a light-detection element (not shown) (e.g. a charge-coupled detector, CCD). 
     The optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  may drive the optical element  1 - 802  to move such as moving, rotating, and the like. The optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  may drive the optical element  1 - 802  to move along a direction that is parallel to the optical axis  1 -O to achieve auto focus (AF) to focus on the scene. Additionally, the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  may also drive the optical element  1 - 802  to move along a direction that is not parallel to the optical axis  1 -O to achieve optical image stabilization (OIS) to compensate the deviation of the imaged image caused by shake or being impacted and solve the problem of blurry images or video. The quality of the image may be enhanced by AF and OIS. 
       FIG.  2    is an exploded view of the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  in  FIG.  1   . The optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  includes a fixed part  1 - 811 , a movable part  1 - 812 , a first driving assembly  1 - 880 , and a second driving assembly  1 - 890 . The movable part  1 - 812  moves relative to the fixed part  1 - 811  and holds the optical element  1 - 802 . The fixed part  1 - 811  includes a case  1 - 820 , a frame  1 - 830 , and a bottom  1 - 920 . The movable part  1 - 812  includes four first elastic elements  1 - 840 , four second elastic elements  1 - 850 , a holder  1 - 860 , two magnetic-permeable elements  1 - 870 , a circuit assembly  1 - 900 , and two sensing elements  1 - 910 . The elements may be added or omitted. 
     The case  1 - 820  and the frame  1 - 830  are located above the bottom  1 - 920 . The case  1 - 820  are connected to the bottom  1 - 920  and the space formed therein may accommodate the frame  1 - 830 , the movable part  1 - 812 , the first driving assembly  1 - 880 , and the second driving assembly  1 - 890 , and the like. 
     The case  1 - 820  is made of magnetic-permeable material and thus may have good magnetic retentivity, concentrate the lines of magnetic field, and the like. Magnetic materials are materials that may be magnetized when a magnetic field is applied, such as ferromagnetic material, steel (e.g. steel plate cold common, SPCC), iron/Ferrum (Fe), Nickel (Ni), Cobalt (Co), an alloy thereof. Preferably, the case  1 - 820  is made of material with high magnetic permeability. 
     The frame  1 - 830  may be made of non-conductive material or magnetic-permeable material such as plastic or metal alloy. When the frame  1 - 830  is made of magnetic-permeable material, the frame  1 - 830  may also have good magnetic retentivity, concentrate the lines of magnetic field, and have higher structural strength compared with non-conductive material. 
     The case  1 - 820  includes a sidewall  1 - 821  perpendicular to the optical axis  1 -O and another sidewall  1 - 822  opposite to the sidewall  1 - 821 . An opening  1 - 823  and an opening  1 - 824  are formed on the sidewall  1 - 821  and the sidewall  1 - 822 , respectively. The positions of the opening  1 - 823  and the opening  1 - 824  correspond to the optical element  1 - 802 . The optical element  1 - 802  is disposed between the sidewall  1 - 821  and the sidewall  1 - 822 . After the light  1 -L passes through the reflecting element (not shown), the light  1 -L enters the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  via the opening  1 - 823  and leaves the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  via the opening  1 - 824 . 
     The first elastic elements  1 - 840  are located over the holder  1 - 860 . The first elastic elements  1 - 840  include elastic material and may be made of metal. The four second elastic elements  1 - 850  are elongated. The four second elastic elements  1 - 850  connect the four elastic elements  1 - 840  of the movable part  1 - 812  and the bottom  1 - 920  of the fixed part  1 - 811 , respectively. Generally, a current may be supplied to the second elastic elements  1 - 850  to make the first driving assembly  1 - 880  or the second driving assembly  1 - 890  generates an electromagnetic force. However, the circumstances that no current is supplied to the second elastic elements  1 - 850  of this disclosure are acceptable. The second elastic elements  1 - 850  may mainly function as support. 
     The holder  1 - 860  is disposed between the frame  1 - 830  and the bottom  1 - 920 . The holder  1 - 860  has a through hole  1 - 861  for holding the optical element  1 - 802 . In some embodiments, a screw and its corresponding threaded structure may be configured between the through hole  1 - 861  and the optical element  1 - 802 , so that the optical element  1 - 802  may be affixed in the through hole  1 - 861 . The holder  1 - 860  is spaced apart from the case  1 - 820  and the bottom  1 - 920  of the fixed part  1 - 811 , i.e. the holder  1 - 860  does not directly contact the case  1 - 820  and the bottom  1 - 920 . 
     The magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  is made of magnetic-permeable material. Preferably, the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  is made of material with high magnetic permeability. The functionality of the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  will be described with regard to  FIG.  5   . 
     The first driving assembly  1 - 880  includes four first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and four first coils  1 - 882  corresponding to the first magnetic elements  1 - 881 . Two of the first coils  1 - 881  and the other two first coils  1 - 882  are disposed on the opposite sides of the holder  1 - 860 . When viewed along the first direction (Y-axis), two of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and the other two first magnetic elements  1 - 881  are disposed on different sides of the optical axis  1 -O, and two of the first coils  1 - 882  and the other two first coils  1 - 882  are disposed on different sides of the optical axis  1 -O. The first magnetic element  1 - 881  and the first coil  1 - 882  are arranged along the first direction (Y-axis). The first driving assembly  1 - 880  may drive the holder  1 - 860  of the movable part  1 - 812  to move along a second direction (Z-axis) relative to the bottom  1 - 920  of the fixed part  1 - 811  to achieve AF. 
     The second driving assembly  1 - 890  includes two second magnetic elements  1 - 891  and two second coils  1 - 892  corresponding to the second magnetic elements  1 - 891 . One of the second coils  1 - 892  and the other one of the second coils  1 - 892  are disposed on the opposite sides of the holder  1 - 860 . When viewed along the first direction (Y-axis), one of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  and the other one of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  are disposed on different sides of the optical axis  1 -O, and one of the second coils  1 - 892  and the other one of the second coils  1 - 892  are disposed on different sides of the optical axis  1 -O. Therefore, when viewed along the first direction (Y-axis), the first driving assembly  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  are disposed on different sides of the optical axis  1 -O. The second magnetic elements  1 - 891  and the second coils  1 - 892  are arranged along the first direction (Y-axis) as well. The second driving assembly  1 - 890  drives the holder  1 - 860  of the movable part  1 - 812  to move along a third direction (X-axis) relative to the bottom  1 - 920  of the fixed part  1 - 811  to achieve OIS. The first direction (Y-axis), the second direction (Z-axis), and the third direction (X-axis) are different. In this embodiment, the first direction (Y-axis), the second direction (Z-axis), and the third direction (X-axis) are substantially perpendicular to each other. 
     The lower surface of each of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  faces the first coils  1 - 882  and the lower surface of each of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  faces the second coils  1 - 892 . The lower surface of each of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  is parallel to the lower surface of each of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891 . 
     Each of the first coils  1 - 882  includes a perforation  1 - 883  and a winding axis  1 - 884 . The winding axis  1 - 884  is an imaginary axis passing through the center of the perforation  1 - 883 . Each of the second coils  1 - 892  includes a perforation  1 - 893  and a winding axis  1 - 894 . The winding axis  1 - 894  is an imaginary axis passing through the center of the perforation  1 - 893 . The winding axis  1 - 884  of the first coil  1 - 882  is parallel to the winding axis  1 - 894  of the second coil  1 - 892 . When viewed along the second direction (Z-axis), the first coil  1 - 882  partially overlaps the second coil  1 - 892 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  2   , each of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  is disposed between two first magnetic elements  1 - 881 , and each of the second coils  1 - 892  is disposed between two first coils  1 - 882 . If one of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and one of the first coils  1 - 882  corresponding to each other are referred to as one first driving assembly  1 - 880 , then there is more than one first driving assembly  1 - 880 , and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  is disposed between the first driving assemblies  1 - 880 . The first driving assemblies  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  are arranged along the second direction (Z-axis). The second direction (Z-axis) is substantially parallel to the optical axis  1 -O, so the optical axis  1 -O is also substantially parallel to the arrangement direction of the first driving assemblies  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890 . 
     When viewed along a direction that is parallel to the optical axis  1 -O, the first driving assembly  1 - 880  at least partially overlaps the second driving assembly  1 - 890 . Compared to the configuration that the first driving assembly  1 - 880  does not overlap the second driving assembly  1 - 890 , such a configuration may reduce the size of the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  in the first direction (Y-axis). For example, if the size of the first driving assembly  1 - 880  in the first direction (Y-axis) is a and the size of the second driving assembly  1 - 890  in the first direction (Y-axis) is b, the sum of the size of the first driving assembly  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  is at least a+b when the first driving assembly  1 - 880  does not overlap the second driving assembly  1 - 890 . To the contrary, if the first driving assembly  1 - 880  does overlap the second driving assembly  1 - 890  when viewed along a direction that is parallel to the optical axis  1 -O as in this disclosure, then the sum of the size of the first driving assembly  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  is less than a+b. 
     The circuit assembly  1 - 900  is disposed on the bottom  1 - 920 . The circuit assembly  1 - 900  may be a circuit board such as a flexible printed circuit (FPC), flexible-hard composite board, and the like. The circuit assembly  1 - 900  may include an electronic element (not shown) such as a capacitance, a resistor, an inductance, and the like. The first coils  1 - 882  and the second coils  1 - 892  are disposed on the circuit assembly  1 - 900 . 
     The sensing element  1 - 910  may be a Hall sensor, a magnetoresistance effect (MR) sensor, a giant magnetoresistance effect (GMR) sensor, a tunneling magnetoresistance effect (TMR) sensor, and the like. The sensing element  1 - 910  may sense the movement condition of the holder  1 - 860  of the movable part  1 - 812  relative to the bottom  1 - 920  of the fixed part  1 - 811 . 
     The two sensing elements  1 - 910  are disposed in the perforation  1 - 883  of one of the first coils  1 - 882  and the perforation  1 - 893  of one of the second coils  1 - 892 , respectively. The sensing elements  1 - 910  are also disposed on the circuit assembly  1 - 900  because the first coils  1 - 882  and the second coils  1 - 892  are disposed on the circuit assembly  1 - 900 . In this embodiment, the two sensing elements  1 - 910  may sense the movement condition of the holder  1 - 860  relative to the bottom  1 - 920  in different directions. For example, the sensing element  1 - 910  disposed in the perforation  1 - 883  of the first coil  1 - 882  may sense the movement condition of the holder  1 - 860  in the second direction (Z-axis) while the sensing element  1 - 910  disposed in the perforation  1 - 893  of the second coil  1 - 892  may sense the movement condition of the holder  1 - 860  in the third direction (X-axis). 
     Since the positions of the first coil  1 - 882 , the second coil  1 - 892 , and the sensing element  1 - 910  is pretty close to each other, the first coil  1 - 882 , the second coil  1 - 892 , and the sensing element  1 - 900  may be electrically connected to the circuit assembly  1 - 900  at the same time, so that the circuit is put together and thus the circuit route is simplified. That is the reason why no current flows through the second elastic element  1 - 850  of this disclosure is acceptable as described above. 
     Next, please refer to  FIG.  3    and  FIG.  4    together.  FIG.  3    is a perspective view of the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  with some elements omitted.  FIG.  4    is a side view of the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  with some elements omitted. As shown in  FIG.  3    and  FIG.  4   , when viewed along the third direction (X-axis), the first driving assembly  1 - 880  at least partially overlaps the optical element  1 - 802 , and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  at least partially overlaps the optical element  1 - 802  as well. Compared with configurations in which the first driving assembly  1 - 880  or the second driving assembly  1 - 890  does not overlap the optical element  1 - 802 , such a configuration may reduce the size of the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  in the first direction (Y-axis) and achieve miniaturization of the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801 . 
       FIG.  5    is a schematic view of the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870 , the first driving assembly  1 - 880 , and the second driving assembly  1 - 890 . The first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  illustrated herein include multiple magnetic poles divided with dotted lines. The arrangement directions of the magnetic poles of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  may be misunderstood. One may have the misperception that the magnetic poles of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  are arranged in different, multiple directions. To avoid such misunderstandings, it should be noted that the word “the magnetic poles” used herein refer to a N-pole and S-pole pair that together generate closed lines of magnetic field. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  6    and  FIG.  7    to understand the arrangement directions of the magnetic poles of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881 .  FIG.  6    and  FIG.  7    are schematic views of any of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  when viewed from the third direction (X-axis). The N-poles and the S-poles illustrated in  FIG.  6    and  FIG.  7    are exchangeable. The first magnetic element  1 - 881  may be a single multi-poles magnet (as shown in  FIG.  6   ) or a magnet formed by gluing multiple magnets (as shown in  FIG.  7   ). These two kinds of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  have different advantages. A single multi-poles magnet as shown in  FIG.  6    is easy to be assembled, but a depletion region is formed in the middle of the multi-poles magnet during production. Magnetic force cannot be generated by the depletion region. If the first magnetic element  1 - 881  includes the depletion region, the weight of the optical element driving mechanism  1 - 801  may be increased. The magnet formed by gluing multiple magnets as shown in  FIG.  7    does not have a deletion region, but additional gluing is required. It is noted that any of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  may also be a single multi-poles magnet or a magnet formed by gluing multiple magnets. It means that when viewed from the second direction (Z-axis), the magnetic poles of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  may have similar configurations as  FIG.  6    or  FIG.  7   . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  5    again. The first coil  1 - 882  includes a first segment  1 - 886  and a second segment  1 - 887  parallel to the third direction (X-axis) and facing to each other. The second coil  1 - 892  includes a third segment  1 - 896  and a fourth segment  1 - 897  parallel to the second direction (Z-axis) and facing to each other. The first segment  1 - 886 , the second segment  1 - 887 , the third segment  1 - 896 , and the fourth segment  1 - 897  are “main current regions”. Main current regions are regions that the current passing through may generate electromagnetic driving force. Therefore, the electromagnetic driving force generated by the current passing through the first segment  1 - 886 , the second segment  1 - 887 , the third segment  1 - 896 , and the fourth segment  1 - 897  together with the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  may drive the holder  1 - 860  to move. The electromagnetic force generated by the regions that do not belong to “main current regions” (not labeled in inclined lines) is weaker, and thus it is more difficult for such electromagnetic force to drive the holder  1 - 860  to move. 
     The direction of the current flowing through the first segment  1 - 886  is opposite to that of the current flowing through the second segment  1 - 887 . To make the whole first coil  1 - 882  move toward the same direction, the direction of the magnetic field corresponding the first segment  1 - 886  and the direction of the magnetic field corresponding to the second segment  1 - 887  have to be opposite as well, which may be derived from the right-hand rule (the rule describing the relationship of the current, the magnetic field, and the electromagnetic force). Therefore, the pole of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  corresponding to the first segment  1 - 886  is different than the pole of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  corresponding to the second segment  1 - 887 . Similarly, the direction of the current flowing through the third segment  1 - 896  is opposite to the direction of the current flowing through the fourth segment  1 - 897 , so the pole of the second magnetic element  1 - 891  corresponding to the third segment  1 - 896  is different than the pole of the second magnetic element  1 - 891  corresponding to the fourth segment  1 - 897 . 
     The main current regions need to correspond to as much area of the poles as possible for generating as strong electromagnetic driving force as possible. Therefore, the arrangement direction of the magnetic poles of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  is the same as the arrangement direction of the first segment  1 - 886  and the second segment  1 - 887 . Additionally, the arrangement direction of the magnetic poles of the second magnetic element  1 - 891  is the same as the arrangement direction of the third segment  1 - 896  and the fourth segment  1 - 897 . Therefore, the magnetic poles of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  are arranged along the second direction (Z-axis), and the magnetic poles of the second magnetic element  1 - 891  are arranged along the third direction (X-axis). 
     In addition, for clarity of illustration, an arrow is used to indicate the direction of the electromagnetic driving force. The flow direction of the current may be clockwise or counterclockwise. When the current flows through the first coil  1 - 882 , the direction of the generated electromagnetic driving force between the main current regions (the first segment  1 - 886  and the second segment  1 - 887 ) and the first magnetic element  1 - 881  is in the second direction (including +Z-axis and −Z-axis, only +Z-axis is shown in  FIG.  5   ), so the holder  1 - 860  may be driven to move along the second direction (Z-axis). 
     When the current flows through the second coil  1 - 892 , the direction of the generated electromagnetic driving force between the main current regions (the third segment  1 - 896  and the fourth segment  1 - 897 ) and the second magnetic element  1 - 891  is in the third direction (including +X-axis and −X-axis, only +X-axis is shown in  FIG.  5   ), so the holder  1 - 860  may be driven to move along the third direction (X-axis). 
     The shape profile of the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  is designed to correspond to the shape profile of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  and the second magnetic element  1 - 891 . The magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  may be integrally formed to simplify the gluing process. One magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  is connected to two first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and one second magnetic element  1 - 891  at the same time. For example, for gluing one magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  that is integrally formed to two first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and one second magnetic element  1 - 891 , the gluing process only has to be done once. If the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  is not integrally formed, then the gluing process of connecting the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  to two first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and one second magnetic element  1 - 891  has to be done several times. Thus, the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  that is integrally formed may simply the production process. 
     Furthermore, the volume of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  and the second magnetic element  1 - 891  may be small. If two first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and one second magnetic element  1 - 891  that are small are glued to one magnetic-permeable  1 - 870 , then a group of elements with larger volume is formed, which is advantageous for the consequent assembling. 
     When viewed along the first direction (Y-axis), the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870 , the first driving assembly  1 - 880 , and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  partially overlap. Since the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  is placed close to the first magnetic element  1 - 881  and the second magnetic element  1 - 891 , the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  may attract and concentrate the lines of magnetic field of the first magnetic element  1 - 881  and the second magnetic element  1 - 891  to enhance the generated magnetic force. 
       FIG.  8    is a perspective view of the holder  1 - 860  illustrated from a different perspective than  FIG.  1   . The side of the holder  1 - 860  that is close to the bottom  1 - 920  includes a plurality of protrusions  1 - 862  and a plurality of recesses  1 - 863 . The holder  1 - 860  may be made of plastic, but plastic material deforms easily during the formation because of reasons such as thermal expansion and contraction. To avoid the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870  cannot be received in the holder  1 - 860  because of the deformation of the holder  1 - 860 , the protrusions  1 - 862  of the holder  1 - 860  may be engaged with the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870 . The protrusions  1 - 862  of the holder  1 - 860  are flakes. The recesses  1 - 863  of the holder  1 - 860  receive the magnetic-permeable element  1 - 870 . 
       FIG.  9    is a configuration of the first driving assembly  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure.  FIG.  10    is a top view of the first driving assembly  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890  in  FIG.  9   . In the following text, the same elements are denoted by the same symbols, similar elements are denoted by similar symbols, and the same contents are not repeated again. 
     In this embodiment, the positions of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  of the second driving assembly  1 - 890  are exchanged with the positions of the second coils  1 - 892  of the second driving assembly  1 - 890 , so that the second coils  1 - 892  are located over the second magnetic elements  1 - 891 . The bottom surface of each of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  faces the first coils  1 - 882 , and the top surface of each of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  faces the second coils  1 - 892 . Additionally, the bottom surface of each of the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and the top surface of each of the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  face different directions. 
     To avoid magnetic interference generated between the first magnetic elements  1 - 881  and the second coils  1 - 892  or between the second magnetic elements  1 - 891  and the first coils  1 - 882 , four additional magnetic-permeable elements  1 - 970  are provided. The four magnetic-permeable elements  1 - 970  are disposed between the first driving assembly  1 - 880  and the second driving assembly  1 - 890 . Therefore, when viewed along the second direction (Z-axis), the first driving assembly  1 - 880 , the second driving assembly  1 - 890 , and the magnetic-permeable elements  1 - 970  partially overlap. 
     As described above, an optical element driving mechanism is provided. Base on this disclosure, miniaturization of the optical element driving mechanism may be achieved by the arrangement and the configuration of the first driving assembly and the second driving assembly. Additionally, the displacement correction and the displacement compensation may be achieved by the first driving assembly and the second driving assembly. 
     Second Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  11    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  may be, for example, disposed in the electronic devices with camera function for driving an optical member  2 - 900 , and can perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     As shown in  FIG.  11   , the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  has a central axis C that is substantially parallel to the Z axis. The optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  has a first optical axis  2 -O 1  that is substantially parallel to the X axis. The optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  includes a housing  2 - 810  which has a top surface  2 - 811  and a first side surface  2 - 812 . The top surface  2 - 811  extends in a direction that is parallel to the first optical axis  2 -O 1  (i.e. the X-Y plane). The first side surface  2 - 812  extends from an edge of the top surface  2 - 811  along a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 . In some embodiments, the first side surface  2 - 812  extends from the edge of the top surface  2 - 811  along a direction that is not parallel to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 . In addition, the housing  2 - 810  has a first opening  2 - 815  that is located on the first side surface  2 - 812 , and the first optical axis  2 -O 1  may pass through the first opening  2 - 815 . 
     The optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  further includes a reflection member  2 - 890  that is disposed in the housing  2 - 810  of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 , and the reflection member  2 - 890  has a second optical axis  2 -O 2  that is substantially parallel to the Z axis. In the present embodiment, the first optical axis  2 -O 1  is substantially perpendicular to the second optical axis  2 -O 2 , but it is not limited thereto. In some embodiments, the first optical axis  2 -O 1  is not parallel to the second optical axis  2 -O 2 . As a result, light may enter the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  along the second optical axis  2 -O 2 , and the direction of the light may be changed by the reflection member  2 - 890 , such that the light may pass through the optical member  2 - 900  along the first optical axis  2 -O 1 . After the light passes through the optical member  2 - 900 , it may travel to an image sensor (not shown) that is disposed out of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 , and thereby an image may be generated on the electronic device. 
       FIG.  12    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  shown in  FIG.  11   . In the present embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  has a substantial rectangular structure. The optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  mainly includes a fixed portion  2 -F, a movable portion  2 -M, a plurality of first elastic members  2 - 860 , a plurality of second elastic members  2 - 861 , a first electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 840  and a second electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 845 . The fixed portion  2 -F includes a housing  2 - 810 , a base  2 - 820 , a frame  2 - 850 , and a circuit component  2 - 870 . 
     The housing  2 - 810  is disposed on the base  2 - 820 , and protect the elements disposed inside the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 . In some embodiments, the housing  2 - 810  is made of metal or another material with sufficient hardness to provide good protection. The frame  2 - 850  is disposed in and affixed to the housing  2 - 810 . The circuit component  2 - 870  is disposed on the base  2 - 820  for transmitting electric signals, performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. For example, the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  may control the position of the optical member  2 - 900  based on the aforementioned electric signals so as to form an image. 
     The movable portion  2 -M is movable relative to the fixed portion  2 -F. The movable portion  2 -M mainly includes a carrier  2 - 830  which carries the optical member  2 - 900 . As shown in  FIG.  12   , the carrier  2 - 830  is movably connected to the housing  2 - 810  and the base  2 - 820 . The first elastic members  2 - 860  are disposed on the carrier  2 - 830 . The second elastic members  2 - 861  extend in a vertical direction (the Z axis), and are connected to the first elastic members  2 - 860  and the base. As a result, the carrier  2 - 830  may be connected to the base  2 - 820  via the first elastic members  2 - 860  and the second elastic members  2 - 861 . For example, the first elastic members  2 - 860  and the second elastic members  2 - 861  are made of metal or another suitable elastic material. 
     The first electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 840  includes first magnetic members  2 - 841  and first driving coils  2 - 842 . The first magnetic members  2 - 841  may be disposed on the frame  2 - 850 , and the corresponding first driving coils  2 - 842  are disposed on the carrier  2 - 830 . When current is applied to the first driving coils  2 - 842 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the first driving coils  2 - 842  and the first magnetic members  2 - 841  (i.e. the first electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 840 ) to drive the carrier  2 - 830  and the optical member  2 - 900  carried therein to move along a horizontal direction (the X-Y plane) relative to the base  2 - 820 , performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     In addition, the second electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 845  includes second magnetic members  2 - 846  and second driving coils  2 - 847 . The second magnetic members  2 - 846  may be disposed on the carrier  2 - 830 , and the corresponding second driving coils  2 - 847  are disposed on the base  2 - 820 . For example, the second driving coils  2 - 847  may be flat-plate coils such that the difficulty and the required time for assembly may be reduced. When a current is applied to the second driving coils  2 - 847 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the second electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 845  to drive the carrier  2 - 830  and the optical member  2 - 900  carried therein to move along the first optical axis  2 -O 1  (the X axis) relative to the base  2 - 820 , performing the autofocus (AF) function. The carrier  2 - 830  may be movably suspended between the frame  2 - 850  and the base  2 - 820  by the electromagnetic driving force of the first electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 840 , the second electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 845  and the force exerted by the first elastic members  2 - 860 , the second elastic members  2 - 861 . Furthermore, a magnetic permeable plate  2 -P is disposed on the second magnetic members  2 - 846  for concentrating the magnetic field of the second magnetic members  2 - 846  so that the efficiency of the second electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 845  may be improved. In some embodiments, the magnetic permeable plate  2 -P may be made of metal or another material with sufficient magnetic permeability. 
     The sensing assembly  2 - 880  includes a sensor  2 - 881 , a reference member  2 - 882  and an integrated circuit (IC) component  2 - 883 . In the present embodiment, the sensor  2 - 881  and the integrated circuit component  2 - 883  are disposed on the base  2 - 820 , and the reference member  2 - 882  is disposed in the carrier  2 - 830 . A plurality of reference members  2 - 882  may be disposed. For example, the reference member  2 - 882  is a magnetic member, the sensor  2 - 881  may detect the change of the magnetic field of the reference member  2 - 882 , and the position of the carrier  2 - 830  (and the optical member  2 - 900 ) may be determined by the integrated circuit component  2 - 883 . In some embodiments, one of the sensor  2 - 881  and the reference member  2 - 882  is disposed on the fixed portion  2 -F, and the other of the sensor  2 - 881  and the reference member  2 - 882  is disposed on the movable portion  2 -M. 
       FIG.  13    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line A-A shown in  FIG.  11   . As shown in  FIG.  13   , the optical member  2 - 900  has an incident end  2 -I and an outlet end  2 -O. In the present embodiment, the light may enter the optical member  2 - 900  from the incident end  2 -I along the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , and exit the optical member  2 - 900  from the outlet end  2 -O. In the present embodiment, the first side surface  2 - 812  faces the outlet end  2 -O of the optical member  2 - 900 , and the second side surface  2 - 813  faces the incident end  2 -I of the optical member  2 - 900 . 
     Since the reflection member  2 - 890  is also disposed in the housing  2 - 810 , the optical member  2 - 900  is not located at the center of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 . In the present embodiment, the reflection member  2 - 890  is closer to the second side surface  2 - 813  than the optical member  2 - 900 , and the optical member  2 - 900  is closer to the first side surface  2 - 812  than the reflection member  2 - 890 . In other words, the shortest distance (a first distance  2 -W 1 ) between the reflection member  2 - 890  and the first side surface  2 - 812  is longer than the shortest distance (a second distance  2 -W 2 ) between the reflection member  2 - 890  and the second side surface  2 - 813 . The shortest distance (a third distance  2 -W 3 ) between the optical member  2 - 900  and the first side surface  2 - 812  is shorter than the shortest distance (a fourth distance  2 -W 4 ) between the optical member  2 - 900  and the second side surface  2 - 813 . In the present embodiment, the frame  2 - 850  is disposed between the carrier  2 - 830  and the housing  2 - 810 , and when viewed in a direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , the frame  2 - 850  and the carrier  2 - 830  at least partially overlap. 
       FIG.  14    is a perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  shown in  FIG.  11    when viewed in another direction. As shown in  FIG.  14   , the housing further has a second side surface  2 - 813  and a third side surface  2 - 814 . In the present embodiment, the second side surface  2 - 813  extends from an edge of the top surface  2 - 811  along a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 . In some embodiments, the second side surface  2 - 813  extends from the edge of the top surface  2 - 811  along a direction that is not parallel to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 . The housing  2 - 810  has a second opening  2 - 816  that is located on the second side surface  2 - 813 , and the first optical axis  2 -O 1  may pass through the second opening  2 - 816 . In other words, the first side surface  2 - 812  and the second side surface  2 - 813  are substantially parallel to each other. 
     The third side surface  2 - 814  extends from an edge of the top surface  2 - 811  along a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , and is located between the first side surface  2 - 812  and the second side surface  2 - 813 . In the present embodiment, the third side surface  2 - 814  is perpendicular to the first side surface  2 - 812  and the second side surface  2 - 813 . In some embodiments, the third side surface  2 - 814  is not parallel to the first side surface  2 - 812  or the second side surface  2 - 813 . A plurality of holes  2 - 818  may be disposed on the third side surface  2 - 814  and correspond to the reflection member  2 - 890 . For example, an adhesive (not shown) may be disposed in the holes  2 - 818 , such that the reflection member  2 - 890  may be affixed in the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 . 
     In addition, a third opening  2 - 817  may be formed on the top surface  2 - 811 , and correspond to the reflection member  2 - 890 , such that the light is able to enter the optical member  2 - 900  located inside the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 . Since the reflection member  2 - 890  is disposed near the first side surface  2 - 812 , the third opening  2 - 817  may be closer to the second opening  2 - 816  instead of the first opening  2 - 815 . In other words, the distance between the third opening  2 - 817  and the first opening  2 - 815  may be greater than the distance between the third opening  2 - 817  and the second opening  2 - 816 . 
     It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the light would not actually pass through the second opening  2 - 816 . However, during the assembly of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 , the optical member  2 - 900  may be disposed in the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  via the second opening  2 - 816  first, and then the reflection member  2 - 890  is disposed in the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 . An optical calibration process is performed to the optical member  2 - 900  and the reflection member  2 - 890 , and thereby the yield of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  may be increased. The above design may simplify the manufacturing process. 
       FIG.  15    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  when viewed in the outlet end  2 -O of the optical member  2 - 900 . It should be appreciated that in order to clearly show the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801 , the housing  2 - 810  and the reflection member  2 - 890  are not illustrated in the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG.  15   , the base  2 - 820  further includes a first barrier  2 - 821  and a second barrier  2 - 822 , wherein the first barrier  2 - 821  and the second barrier  2 - 822  protrude towards the top surface  2 - 811  of the housing  2 - 810 , and the shortest distance between the first barrier  2 - 821  and the first side surface  2 - 812  is shorter than the shortest distance between the second barrier  2 - 822  and the first side surface  2 - 812 . Thanks to the arrangement of the first barrier  2 - 821  and the second barrier  2 - 822 , light is prevented from entering the image sensor due to it being reflected by the housing  2 - 810  and the circuit component  2 - 870 . It should be noted that, although the first barrier  2 - 821  and the second barrier  2 - 822  are illustrated in the present embodiment, this merely serves as an example. Those skilled in the art may adjust the positions or number of barriers. In some embodiments, a jagged structure or any other suitable irregular structure may be on the base  2 - 820  (such as on the first barrier  2 - 821  and/or the second barrier  2 - 822 ) by a laser engraving process, and thereby the reflection inside the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  may be reduced. 
     In addition, in the present embodiment, when viewed in a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , the first magnetic members  2 - 841  are partially exposed from the frame  2 - 850 . In the present embodiment, the first magnetic members  2 - 841  are tripolar magnets such that the assembly process may be simplified, and the assembly precision and the push strength may be enhanced. However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. In some other embodiments, each of the first magnetic members  2 - 841  may also be a combination of three magnets. Furthermore, the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  further includes a first bonding material and a second bonding material (not shown), wherein the first bonding material is bonded between the housing  2 - 810  and the frame  2 - 850 , the second bonding material is bonded between the first magnetic members  2 - 841  and the frame  2 - 850 . Since in some embodiments, the housing  2 - 810  and the first magnetic members  2 - 841  are affixed to the frame  2 - 850  by different processes, the first bonding material is different from the second bonding material. For example, the first bonding material is a light-curing adhesive, and thereby after the housing  2 - 810  and the frame  2 - 850  are affixed, subsequent assembly process (such as the process of affixing the first magnetic members  2 - 841  and the frame  2 - 850 ) may be performed in a short time. 
       FIG.  16    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  when viewed in the incident end  2 -I of the optical member  2 - 900 . As shown in  FIG.  16   , the base further includes a stopping portion  2 - 823  that is disposed between the carrier  2 - 830  and the second side surface  2 - 813  (as shown in  FIG.  14   ). Thanks to the arrangement of the stopping portion  2 - 823 , the moving range of the carrier  2 - 830  may be limited. As a result, collisions between the carrier  2 - 830  the reflection member  2 - 890  may be avoided, and the reflection member  2 - 890  and/or the optical member  2 - 900  can remain undamaged. In addition, a metallic member  2 - 824  is embedded into the stopping portion  2 - 823 , enhancing the structural strength of the stopping portion  2 - 823 . Therefore, the stopping portion  2 - 823  is prevented from multiple collisions and remains undamaged. 
       FIG.  17    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that in order to clearly show the structure of the frame  2 - 850  and the carrier  2 - 830 , the frame  2 - 850 , the carrier  2 - 830  and the optical member  2 - 900  are illustrated upside-down. That is, the upper side of  FIG.  17    is towards the base  2 - 820 , and the lower side is towards the top surface  2 - 811  of the housing  2 - 810 . As shown in  FIG.  17   , the frame  2 - 850  has a first jagged surface  2 - 851  that is disposed to face the base  2 - 820 . In addition, the carrier  2 - 830  further includes a protruding portion  2 - 831  that protrudes from the optical member  2 - 900  and extends towards the base  2 - 820 . When viewed in a direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , the protruding portion  2 - 831  and the optical member  2 - 900  at least partially overlap. The protruding portion  2 - 831  further has a second jagged surface  2 - 832  that is disposed to face the base  2 - 820 . 
     Thanks to the arrangement of the protruding portion  2 - 831 , the possibility that the light directly illuminates the inner surface of the metallic housing  2 - 810  may be reduced, such that the light reflection may also be reduced. Furthermore, the first jagged surface  2 - 851  and the second jagged surface  2 - 832  are configured for weakening the intensity of light reflection after the light illuminates the above jagged surfaces. Since the possibility and/or intensity of the light reflected inside the optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  may be reduced, noise may be less likely to enter the image sensor due to reflection. Therefore, image quality may be unaffected. 
     For example, the jagged structure on the first jagged surface  2 - 851  and/or the second jagged surface  2 - 832  may be formed by a laser engraving process. In some embodiments, the size in the Z axis of the above jagged structures may be in a range from 0.1 mm to 0.4 mm, but it is not limited thereto. In addition, the jagged structures may be formed as regular structures or irregular structures as required. It should be noted that although the first jagged surface  2 - 851  and the second jagged surface  2 - 832  are both disposed in the present embodiment, it merely serves as an example. Those skilled in the art may determine whether the first jagged surface  2 - 851  and/or the second jagged surface  2 - 832  are disposed, or adjust the position of the first jagged surface  2 - 851  and/or the second jagged surface  2 - 832 . 
     The optical member driving mechanism  2 - 801  further includes an extinction sheet  2 -E that is disposed between the carrier  2 - 830  and the optical member  2 - 900 . More specifically, the extinction sheet  2 -E is disposed in a gap between the carrier  2 - 830  and the optical member  2 - 900 . In some embodiments, the extinction sheet  2 -E may also be disposed on the second jagged surface  2 - 832 , or disposed between the first barrier  2 - 821  and the second barrier  2 - 822 , but it is not limited thereto. Thanks to the arrangement of the extinction sheet  2 -E, the reflection of the noise may be effectively reduced, avoiding the noise entering the image sensor. For example, the extinction sheet  2 -E may be made of resin or any other suitable material, and has a porous structure. In some embodiments, the extinction sheet  2 -E may lower the reflectivity of the light with a wavelength between 250 nm and 2500 nm below 1.6%. In some embodiments, the thickness of the extinction sheet  2 -E may be in a range from 0.1 mm to 0.5 mm. 
     In addition, the optical member  2 - 900  further has a first section  2 - 901  and a second section  2 - 902  (as shown in  FIG.  18   ), wherein the first section  2 - 901  is closer to the incident end  2 -I of the optical member  2 - 900 . The first section  2 - 901  and the second section  2 - 902  are arranged along the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , wherein the first section  2 - 901  is closer to the second side surface  2 - 813  than the second section  2 - 902 . In other words, the shortest distance between the first section  2 - 901  and the second side surface  2 - 813  is shorter than the shortest distance between the second section  2 - 902  and the second side surface  2 - 813 . In a direction (the Y axis) that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , the largest size of the first section  2 - 901  is greater than the largest size of the second section  2 - 902 . That is, the width of the first section  2 - 901  is greater than the width of the second section  2 - 902  in the Y axis. Since the size of the first section  2 - 901  is larger, the carrier  2 - 830  may cover the second section  2 - 902 , and the first section  2 - 901  of the optical member  2 - 900  may be exposed. 
       FIG.  18    is a top view illustrating the base  2 - 820 , the circuit component  2 - 870 , the second electromagnetic driving assembly  2 - 845 , the sensing assembly  2 - 880  and the optical member  2 - 900 , and  FIG.  19    is a side view illustrating the structure shown in  FIG.  18    when viewed in the incident end  2 -I. As shown in  FIGS.  18  and  19   , when viewed in a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  2 -O 1 , the integrated circuit component  2 - 883  of the sensing assembly  2 - 880  and the optical member  2 - 900  may partially overlap. In the present embodiment, the second magnetic members  2 - 846  are tripolar magnets. In some other embodiments, each of the second magnetic members  2 - 846  may also be a combination of three magnets. 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical member driving mechanism including a reflection member that is disposed in the housing of the optical member driving mechanism. By means of arranging the reflection member in the housing, the reflection member may be effectively protected and remain undamaged. In addition, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide various structures configured to avoid refection, such as jagged surfaces, barriers, and/or extinction plates, etc. Therefore, the noise may be prevented from entering the image sensor due to reflection, preserving image quality. 
     Third Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  20    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  may be, for example, disposed in the electronic devices with camera function for driving an optical member (not shown), and can perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     As shown in  FIG.  20   , the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  has a central axis  3 -C that is substantially parallel to the Z axis. The optical member has an optical axis  3 -O that is substantially parallel to the X axis. In other words, in the present embodiment, the central axis  3 -C is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis  3 -O. The optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  includes a housing  3 - 1010  which has a top surface  3 - 1011 , a first side surface  3 - 1012  and a second side surface  3 - 1013  (as shown in  FIG.  22   ) that is opposite to the first side surface  3 - 1012 . The top surface  3 - 1011  extends in a direction that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O (i.e. the X-Y plane). The first side surface  3 - 1012  and the second side surface  3 - 1013  extend from edges of the top surface  3 - 1011  in a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the optical axis  3 -O. In other words, in the present embodiment, the first side surface  3 - 1012  and the second side surface  3 - 1013  are substantially parallel to each other. In some embodiments, the first side surface  3 - 1012  and the second side surface  3 - 1013  extend from the edges of the top surface  3 - 1011  in a direction that is not parallel to the optical axis  3 -O. In addition, the housing  3 - 1010  has a rectangular first opening  3 - 1015  that is located on the first side surface  3 - 1012 , and the optical axis  3 -O may pass through the first opening  3 - 1015 . The light may pass through the optical member which is disposed in the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001 . After the light passes through the optical member, it will travel to an image sensor (not shown) that is disposed out of the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001 , and thereby an image may be generated on the above electronic devices. 
       FIG.  21    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  shown in  FIG.  20   . In the present embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  has a substantial rectangular structure. The optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  mainly includes a fixed portion  3 -F, a movable portion  3 -M, a plurality of first elastic members  3 - 1060 , a plurality of second elastic members  3 - 1061 , a first electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1040  and a second electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1045 . The fixed portion  3 -F includes a housing  3 - 1010 , a base  3 - 1020 , a frame  3 - 1050 , and a circuit component  3 - 1070 . 
     The housing  3 - 1010  is disposed on the base  3 - 1020 , and protect the elements disposed inside the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001 . In some embodiments, the housing  3 - 1010  is made of metal or another material with sufficient hardness to provide good protection. The frame  3 - 1050  is disposed in and affixed to the housing  3 - 1010 . The circuit component  3 - 1070  is disposed on the base  3 - 1020  for transmitting electric signals, performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. For example, the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  may control the position of the optical member based on the aforementioned electric signals so as to form an image. In the present embodiment, a metallic member  3 - 1021  is disposed in the base by insert molding, and thereby the structural strength of the base  3 - 1020  may be enhanced. 
     The movable portion  3 -M is movable relative to the fixed portion  3 -F. The movable portion  3 -M mainly includes a carrier  3 - 1030  which carries the optical member. As shown in  FIG.  21   , the carrier  3 - 1030  is movably connected to the housing  3 - 1010  and the base  3 - 1020 . The first elastic members  3 - 1060  are disposed on the carrier  3 - 1030 . The second elastic members  3 - 1061  extend in a vertical direction (the Z axis), and are connected to the first elastic members  3 - 1060  and the base  3 - 1020 . As a result, the carrier  3 - 1030  may be connected to the base  3 - 1020  via the first elastic members  3 - 1060  and the second elastic members  3 - 1061 . For example, the first elastic members  3 - 1060  and the second elastic members  3 - 1061  are made of metal or another suitable elastic material. 
     The first electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1040  includes first magnetic members  3 - 1041  and first driving coils  3 - 1042 . The first magnetic members  3 - 1041  may be disposed on the frame  3 - 1050 , and the corresponding first driving coils  3 - 1042  are disposed on the carrier  3 - 1030 . When current is applied to the first driving coils  3 - 1042 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the first driving coils  3 - 1042  and the first magnetic members  3 - 1041  (i.e. the first electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1040 ) to drive the carrier  3 - 1030  and the optical member carried therein to move along a horizontal direction (the X-Y plane) relative to the base  3 - 1020 , performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     In addition, the second electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1045  includes second magnetic members  3 - 1046  and second driving coils  3 - 1047 . The second magnetic members  3 - 1046  may be disposed on the carrier  3 - 1030 , and the corresponding second driving coils  3 - 1047  are disposed on the base  3 - 1020 . For example, the second driving coils  3 - 1047  may be flat-plate coils such that the difficulty and the required time for assembly may be reduced. When a current is applied to the second driving coils  3 - 1047 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the second electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1045  to drive the carrier  3 - 1030  and the optical member carried therein to move along the optical axis  3 -O (the X axis) relative to the base  3 - 1020 , performing the autofocus (AF) function. The carrier  3 - 1030  may be movably suspended between the frame  3 - 1050  and the base  3 - 1020  by the electromagnetic driving force of the first electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1040 , the second electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1045  and the force exerted by the first elastic members  3 - 1060 , the second elastic members  3 - 1061 . Furthermore, a magnetic permeable plate  3 -P is disposed on the second magnetic members  3 - 1046  for concentrating the magnetic field of the second magnetic members  3 - 1046  so that the efficiency of the second electromagnetic driving assembly  3 - 1045  may be improved. In some embodiments, the magnetic permeable plate  3 -P may be made of metal or another material with sufficient magnetic permeability. 
     The sensing assembly  3 - 1080  includes a sensor  3 - 1081 , a reference member  3 - 1082  and an integrated circuit (IC) component  3 - 1083 . In the present embodiment, the sensor  3 - 1081  and the integrated circuit component  3 - 1083  are disposed on the circuit component  3 - 1070 , and the reference member  3 - 1082  is disposed in the carrier  3 - 1030 . A plurality of reference members  3 - 1082  may be disposed. For example, the reference member  3 - 1082  is a magnetic member, the sensor  3 - 1081  may detect the change of the magnetic field of the reference member  3 - 1082 , and the position of the carrier  3 - 1030  (and the optical member) may be determined by the integrated circuit component  3 - 1083 . In addition, the integrated circuit component  3 - 1083  may also detect the relative movement between the carrier  3 - 1030  and the fixed portion  3 -F. The integrated circuit component  3 - 1083  and the sensor  3 - 1081  are configured to detect different moving direction of the carrier  3 - 1030 . In some embodiments, the sensor  3 - 1081  or the reference member  3 - 1082  is disposed on the fixed portion  3 -F, and the other of the sensor  3 - 1081  or the reference member  3 - 1082  is disposed on the movable portion  3 -M. 
       FIG.  22    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  3 -B- 3 -B shown in  FIG.  20   . As shown in  FIG.  22   , the housing  3 - 1010  has a second opening  3 - 1016 , and the optical axis  3 -O may pass through the second opening  3 - 1016 . In the present embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  has an incident end and an outlet end, wherein the incident end corresponds to the second opening  3 - 1016 , and the outlet end corresponds to the first opening  3 - 1015 . In the present embodiment, the light may enter the optical member from the incident end (i.e. the second opening  3 - 1016 ) along the optical axis  3 -O, and exit the optical member from the outlet end (i.e. the first opening  3 - 1015 ). In the present embodiment, the frame  3 - 1050  is disposed between the carrier  3 - 1030  and the housing  3 - 1010 . When viewed in a direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the frame  3 - 1050  and the carrier  3 - 1030  at least partially overlap. 
     In the present embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  has a light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  that is disposed between the carrier  3 - 1030  and the top surface  3 - 1011 . The light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  extends towards the first side surface  3 - 1012  in a direction that is substantially parallel to the optical axis  3 -O. When viewed in a direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  is located on a lengthwise side  3 - 1017  (as shown in  FIG.  23   ) of the first opening  3 - 1015 . That is, the light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  may be located between the optical axis  3 -O and the top surface  3 - 1011 . In some embodiments, the carrier  3 - 1030  may have a protruding portion (not shown) that extends towards the first side surface  3 - 1012  in a direction that is substantially parallel to the optical axis  3 -O. Similarly, when viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the protruding portion is located on the lengthwise side  3 - 1017  of the first opening  3 - 1015  and between the optical axis  3 -O and the top surface  3 - 1011 . 
       FIG.  23    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  shown in  FIG.  20    when viewed in the outlet end. As shown in  FIG.  23   , the base  3 - 1020  further has a barrier  3 - 1022  that is disposed to protrude towards the top surface  3 - 1011 . When viewed in a direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the barrier  3 - 1022  and the lengthwise side  3 - 1017  of the first opening  3 - 1015  at least partially overlap, and a gap is formed between the barrier  3 - 1022  and a widthwise side  3 - 1018  of the first opening  3 - 1015 . In other words, when viewed in the same direction as above, the barrier  3 - 1022  and the widthwise side  3 - 1018  of the first opening  3 - 1015  do not overlap. In addition, the frame  3 - 1050  has a light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  that is disposed to protrude towards the base  3 - 1020 . When viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  and the lengthwise side  3 - 1017  of the first opening  3 - 1015  also at least partially overlap. Similarly, a gap is formed between the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  and the widthwise side  3 - 1018  of the first opening  3 - 1015 . In other words, when viewed in the same direction as above, the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  and the widthwise side  3 - 1018  of the first opening  3 - 1015  do not overlap. 
     In some embodiments, jagged structures  3 - 1023 ,  3 - 1052  may be formed on the barrier  3 - 1022  and/or the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  by a laser engraving process. In some other embodiments, any other regular or irregular structure may be formed on the barrier  3 - 1022  and/or the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  so as to reduce the possibility that the noise reflected in the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  enters the image sensor, enhancing the image quality. It should be noted that although the barrier  3 - 1022  and the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  are both disposed in the present embodiment, it merely serves as an example. Those skilled in the art may determine whether the barrier  3 - 1022  and/or the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  are disposed, or adjust the position of the barrier  3 - 1022  and/or the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  as required. 
       FIG.  24    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the jagged structure  3 - 1023  includes multiple tapered structure, wherein and has a plurality of peaks  3 - 1024 . The jagged structure  3 - 1052  also has a plurality of peaks  3 - 1053 . As shown in  FIG.  24   , When viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the peaks  3 - 1024 ,  3 - 1053  may be exposed from the first opening  3 - 1015 . In some embodiments, the distance between the lengthwise side  3 - 1017  of the first opening  3 - 1015  and the peaks  3 - 1024 ,  3 - 1053  is equal to or longer than 0.25 mm, and thereby the noise may be effectively blocked, preventing the noise from entering the image sensor. 
       FIG.  25    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  25   , when viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the peaks  3 - 1024 ,  3 - 1053  may not be exposed from the first opening  3 - 1015 . Namely, the peaks  3 - 1024 ,  3 - 1053  may overlap with the housing  3 - 1010 . In some embodiments, the distance between the lengthwise side  3 - 1017  of the first opening  3 - 1015  and the peaks  3 - 1024 ,  3 - 1053  is equal to or longer than 0.1 mm, and thereby the noise entering the image sensor may be effectively reduced. 
       FIG.  26    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the barrier  3 - 1022  has an upper surface  3 - 1025  and a cutting surface  3 - 1026  that intersects with the upper surface  3 - 1025 . A tapered structure is formed by the upper surface  3 - 1025  and the cutting surface  3 - 1026 . The upper surface  3 - 1025  is upwardly inclined, namely facing the carrier  3 - 1030  and the top surface  3 - 1011 . The cutting surface  3 - 1026  is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis  3 -O, facing the first side surface  3 - 1012 . In some embodiments, a fillet between the upper surface  3 - 1025  and the cutting surface  3 - 1026  is not greater than 0.05 mm. Similarly, the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  has a lower surface (not shown) and a cutting surface that intersects with the lower surface. In some embodiments, a fillet between the lower surface and the cutting surface is not greater than 0.05 mm. 
     In addition, a rough surface may be formed on the barrier  3 - 1022 . For example, if a surface roughness of one surface is greater than 16, the surface may be called as a rough surface. The upper surface  3 - 1025  may be disposed as a rough surface. In some embodiments, the surface, facing the top surface  3 - 1011 , of the base  3 - 1020  may be formed as a rough surface. Thanks to the arrangement of the rough surfaces, after the light illuminates to the rough surfaces, the intensity of the reflected light may be reduced. Since the possibility and/or the intensity of the light reflected inside the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  is reduced, the noise may be prevented from entering the image sensor due to reflection, therefore preserving image quality. 
       FIG.  27    is a cross-sectional view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1002  in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1002  in the present embodiment may include the same or similar portions as the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  shown in  FIGS.  20 - 23   . Those portions will be labeled as the same numerals, and for the sake of simplicity, the detailed description will not be repeated in the following paragraphs. The difference between the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1002  in the present embodiment and the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1001  shown in  FIGS.  20 - 23    is that in the optical member driving mechanism  3 - 1002 , a groove  3 - 1027  is formed between the barrier  3 - 1022  and the housing  3 - 1010 . The groove  3 - 1027  is disposed to face the top surface  3 - 1011 , and the light-shielding member  3 - 1091  is disposed in the groove  3 - 1027 . As shown in  FIG.  27   , the shortest distance between the light-shielding member  3 - 1091  and the top surface  3 - 1011  may be shorter than the shortest distance between the barrier  3 - 1022  and the top surface  3 - 1011 . 
       FIGS.  28  and  29    are enlarged perspective views illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with some other embodiments of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  28   , the light-shielding member  3 - 1092  is disposed in the housing  3 - 1010 , located between the housing  3 - 1010  and the barrier  3 - 1022 , and/or between the housing  3 - 1010  and the frame  3 - 1050 . For example, a groove that faces the base  3 - 1020  may be formed between the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  and the housing  3 - 1010 , and the light-shielding member  3 - 1092  is disposed in the above groove. Similarly, the shortest distance between the light-shielding member  3 - 1092  and the base  3 - 1020  may be shorter than the shortest distance between the light-shielding structure  3 - 1051  and the base  3 - 1020 . 
     In the present embodiment, when viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the light-shielding member  3 - 1092  and the lengthwise side  3 - 1017  of the first opening  3 - 1015  at least partially overlap. As shown in  FIG.  29   , the light-shielding member  3 - 1092  is disposed out of the housing  3 - 1010  and located around the first opening  3 - 1015 . Similarly, when viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  3 -O, the light-shielding member  3 - 1092  and the lengthwise side  3 - 1017  of the first opening  3 - 1015  at least partially overlap. 
     For example, the light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  and the light-shielding member  3 - 1091 ,  3 - 1092  may be formed by resin, fiber or any other suitable material (such as SOMA light-shielding material), and may have a porous structure. In some embodiments, the light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  and the light-shielding member  3 - 1091 ,  3 - 1092  may be glass that a surface treatment (such as blackening) is performed to. In some embodiments, the light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  and the light-shielding member  3 - 1091 ,  3 - 1092  may reduce the reflectivity of the light with a wavelength in a range from 250 nm to 2500 nm lower than 1.6%. In some embodiments, the thickness of the light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  and the light-shielding member  3 - 1091 ,  3 - 1092  may be in a range from about 0.1 mm to about 0.5 mm. Thanks to the arrangement of the light-shielding sheet  3 - 1090  and the light-shielding member  3 - 1091 ,  3 - 1092 , the noise reflection may be effectively reduced, preventing the noise from entering the image sensor. 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical member driving mechanism including a light-shielding structure and/or a light-shielding member. The embodiments of the present disclosure provide various structures configured to avoid refection, such as barriers, light-shielding sheet, etc. Therefore, the noise may be prevented from entering the image sensor due to reflection, preserving image quality. 
     Fourth Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  30    is a schematic view of an electronic device  4 - 1401  equipped with an optical system  4 - 1402  in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. In  FIG.  30   , the electronic device is a smart phone, but this disclosure is not limited thereto. The optical system  4 - 1402  includes an optical element driving module  4 - 1410  and a periscope optical module  4 - 1420 . 
       FIG.  31    is a cross-sectional view illustrated along line  4 -A- 4 -A in  FIG.  30   . In  FIG.  31   , the forward direction of a light  4 -L enters the electronic device  4 - 1401  is indicated by an arrow. After the light  4 -L passes through the optical element driving module  4 - 1410  and the periscope optical module  4 - 1420 , imaging may be accomplished on two light-detection elements  4 - 1430  (e.g. charge-coupled detector, CCD). Additionally, the image may be transferred to a processor (not shown) to be further processed. 
     The optical element driving module  4 - 1410  includes one or more optical element(s)  4 - 1411 . A driving mechanism is included in the optical element driving module  4 - 1410  for driving the optical element(s)  4 - 1411  to move. The arrangement direction of the optical element(s)  4 - 1411  is parallel to the thickness direction of the electronic device  4 - 1401 . If the number of the optical element(s)  4 - 1411  is increased, then the thickness of the electronic device  4 - 1401  is increased. 
     The periscope optical module  4 - 1420  includes one or more optical element(s)  4 - 1421  and a reflecting element  4 - 1422 . By placing the reflecting element  4 - 1422 , the direction of the light  4 -L may be changed so that the arrangement direction of the optical element(s)  4 - 1421  is substantially perpendicular to the thickness direction of the electronic device  4 - 1401 . 
     When a consumer is shopping for an electronic device, both the appearance and the image function are important factors. A user tends to choose an electronic device that is thin and performs well in capturing images. To enhance the shooting quality, the number of the optical element(s) may be increased. To achieve miniaturization and to place more optical elements, the periscope optical module begins to be developed prosperously. 
     As described above, the arrangement direction of the optical element(s)  4 - 1421  in the periscope optical module  4 - 1420  is different than the arrangement direction of the optical element(s)  4 - 1411  in the periscope optical module  4 - 1410 . In the periscope optical module  4 - 1420 , the electronic device  4 - 1401  may be provided with multiple optical elements  4 - 1421  without affecting the thickness of the electronic device  4 - 1401  because the arrangement direction of the optical elements  4 - 1421  is substantially perpendicular to the thickness direction of the electronic device  4 - 1401 . 
     To sum up, as shown in  FIG.  31   , when the optical elements  4 - 1411  of the optical element driving module  4 - 1410  have the same number and the same size as the optical elements  4 - 1421  of the periscope optical module  4 - 1420 , the thickness of the periscope optical module  4 - 1420  is smaller than the thickness of the optical element driving module  4 - 1410 . Thus, selecting the periscope optical module  4 - 1420  may avoid increasing the thickness of the electronic device  4 - 1401 . In other words, for two electronic devices having the same thickness but equipped with different optical modules, the one equipped with the periscope optical module  4 - 1420  may hold more optical elements than the one equipped with the optical element driving module  4 - 1410 . 
     However, for an optical element with a long focal length or a large size, even if it is placed in the periscope optical module  4 - 1420 , the thickness of the electronic device  4 - 1401  may still be increased. Thus, a periscope optical module for holding an optical element with a long focal length or a large size is provided in this disclosure. 
       FIG.  32    is a perspective view of a periscope optical module  4 - 1450  in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. The periscope optical module  4 - 1450  includes a case  4 - 1451 , a first optical element  4 - 1460 , a holder  4 - 1462 , a second optical element  4 - 1470 , and a third optical element  4 - 1480 . When the light  4 -L enters the periscope optical module  4 - 1450 , the light  4 -L passes through the first optical element  4 - 1460 , the second optical element  4 - 1470 , and the third optical element  4 - 1480  consecutively. 
     The first optical element  4 - 1460  may be an optical element that has longer focal length or bigger size than the third optical element  4 - 1480 , such as a long-focus lens. The first optical element  4 - 1460  is received in the holder  4 - 1462 . 
     The second optical element  4 - 1470  and the third optical element  4 - 1480  may be protected by the case  4 - 1451 . The shape and the size of the case  4 - 1451  may be changed arbitrarily. The second optical element  4 - 1470  has similar features to the reflecting element  4 - 1422  of  FIG.  31   . The second optical element  4 - 1470  may be a mirror, a refractive prism or a beam splitter, etc. To ensure that as much the light  4 -L passing through the first optical element  4 - 1460  as possible is received within the range of the second optical element  4 - 1470 , the second optical element  4 - 1470  is located under the first optical element  4 - 1460 . Additionally, the position of the second optical element  4 - 1470  corresponds to the position of the first optical element  4 - 1460 . After the light  4 -L passes through the first optical element  4 - 1460 , the forward direction of the light  4 -L may be adjusted by the rotation or the movement of the second optical element  4 - 1470 . 
     Similarly, to ensure that as much the light  4 -L as possible is received within the range of the third optical element  4 - 1480 , the third optical element  4 - 1480  is located on the side of the second optical element  4 - 1470 , and the position of the third optical element  4 - 1480  corresponds to the position of the second optical element  4 - 1470 . More than one the third optical element  4 - 1480  may be placed depends on requirements. The third optical element  4 - 1480  may also correspond to a light-detection element (not shown) located outside the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  so that the light  4 -L is imaged on the light-detection element. 
     The first optical element  4 - 1460  and the third optical element  4 - 1480  may be a lens or the like and may be made of glass, resin or the like. The optical elements made of glass may have better optical performance than the optical elements made of resin, but may be heavier. Since the space for placing the third optical element  4 - 1480  is more restricted than the space for placing the first optical element  4 - 1460 , the heavy third optical element  4 - 1480  is usually unwanted. Thus, the first optical element  4 - 1460  made of glass and the third optical element  4 - 1480  made of resin may be selected, but any suitable material may be selected according to actual requirements. 
     Furthermore, the first optical element  4 - 1460  may be a convex lens (such as a concavo-convex lens), so the focal length of the first optical element  4 - 1460  is positive, and the light  4 -L passing through the first optical element  4 - 1460  converges. Meanwhile, the third optical element  4 - 1480  may be a concave lens (such as a convexo-concave lens, a plano-concave lens, or a concavo-concave lens), so the focal length of the third optical element  4 - 1480  is negative, and the light  4 -L passing through the third optical element  4 - 1480  diverges. Alternatively, the focal length of the first optical element  4 - 1460  may be negative and the focal length of the third optical element  4 - 1480  may be positive. 
     In some embodiments, the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  further includes an aperture (not shown). The aperture provides an adjustable opening to control the amount of the light  4 -L so as to affect the depth of field (DOF) of the image. When the DOF decreased, only the objects near the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  are clear. The aperture may be disposed between the first optical element  4 - 1460  and the second optical element  4 - 1470 . Or, the aperture may be disposed between the second optical element  4 - 1470  and the third optical element  4 - 1480 . 
     The first optical element  4 - 1460  has a first optical axis  4 - 1461 , and the first optical axis  4 - 1461  is an imaginary axis passing through the center of the first optical element  4 - 1460 . The third optical element  4 - 1480  has a second optical axis  4 - 1481 , and the second optical axis  4 - 1481  is an imaginary axis passing through the center of the third optical element  4 - 1480 . The first optical axis  4 - 1461  is not parallel to the second optical axis  4 - 1481 . In this embodiment, the first optical axis  4 - 1461  is substantially perpendicular to the second optical axis  4 - 1481  due to the arrangement of the first optical element  4 - 1460  and the third optical element  4 - 1480 . It should be noted that the first optical axis  4 - 1461  may be not perpendicular to the second optical axis  4 - 1481  because of vibration or other reasons. 
     Since the holder  4 - 1462  is disposed on the second optical element  4 - 1470 , the holder  4 - 1462  overlaps the second optical element  4 - 1470  when viewed along the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . 
       FIG.  33    is a side view of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  in  FIG.  32   . As shown in  FIG.  33   , a minimum size  4 -S 1  of the first optical element  4 - 1460  in the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461  is larger than a maximum size  4 -S 3  of the third optical element  4 - 1480  in the direction of the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . 
     By such configuration, the thickness of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  is not affected by the minimum size  4 -S 1  of the first optical element  4 - 1460  in the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . Therefore, the first optical element  4 - 1460  with a long focal length may be placed under the circumstance that miniaturization of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  is also taken into consideration. Furthermore, the quality of the image may be enhanced because the first optical element  4 - 1460  and third optical element  4 - 1480  have different focal lengths and different sizes. 
     To illustrate clearly, “the size” of the optical element actually refers to “the effective optical area” of the optical element. When an image is formed, the size of the image is not proportional to the actual size of the optical element, but proportional to the effective optical area. “The effective optical area” of the optical element means the area that the light actual passes and may be imaged. 
     For example, the effective optical area may not equal to the actual size of the first optical element  4 - 1460  because the periphery of the first optical element  4 - 1460  may be shielded by the holder  4 - 1462  for receiving the first optical element  4 - 1460 . For such circumstance, the minimum size  4 -S 1  of the first optical element  4 - 1460  means the minimum size of the first optical element  4 - 1460  not shielded by the holder  4 - 1462  in the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461 , not the actual size of the first optical element  4 - 1460  in the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . 
     Therefore, the minimum size  4 -S 1  of the first optical element  4 - 1460  is larger than the maximum size  4 -S 3  of the third optical element  4 - 1480  means the effective optical area of the first optical element  4 - 1460  is larger than the effective optical area of the third optical element  4 - 1480 . 
       FIG.  34    is a top view of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  in  FIG.  32   . As shown in  FIG.  34   , the minimum size  4 -S 1  of the first optical element  4 - 1460  in the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461  is larger than a maximum size  4 -S 2  of the second optical element  4 - 1480  in the direction of the second optical axis  4 - 1481 . Yet, a reflecting surface  4 - 1475  of the second optical element  4 - 1470  is larger than or equal to the cross-sectional area of the light  4 -L after passing through the first optical element  4 - 1460  to avoid a portion of the light  4 -L is not reflected. 
     It should be noted that in some embodiments, the cross-sectional area of the light  4 -L shrinks when the light  4 -L passes through the first optical element  4 - 1460 , the second optical element  4 - 1470 , and the third optical element  4 - 1480  due to the intrinsic properties of the light  4 -L such as refraction or reflection. For example, when the light  4 -L passes through the first optical element  4 - 1460 , the second optical element  4 - 1470 , and the third optical element  4 - 1480 , the profile of the light  4 -L may be conical and the cross-sectional area of the light  4 -L shrinks. 
     Furthermore, the maximum size  4 -S 2  of the second optical element  4 - 1470  in the direction of the second optical axis  4 - 1481  may be designed to be larger than the maximum size  4 -S 3  of the third optical element  4 - 1480  in the direction of the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . By such design, the size of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  in the direction of the first optical axis  4 - 1461  may be reduced, i.e. the thickness of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  may be reduced. 
       FIG.  35    is a schematic view of the first optical element  4 - 1460  in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  35   , to reduce production cost, lower the weight of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  or reduce the thickness of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450 , the first optical element  4 - 1460  includes two cutting portions  4 - 1465  formed in the opposite sides of the first optical element  4 - 1460 . The cutting portions  4 - 1465  may be formed by cutting process or the like. It should be noted that the third optical element  4 - 1480  may also have similar shape. 
     It should be mentioned that a portion of the light  4 -L may exceed the light-detection element and thus may not be imaged because the shape of the light-detection element is different than the shape of the light  4 -L or other reasons. Therefore, the quality of the image is not affected just because the first optical element  4 - 1460  includes the cutting portions  4 - 1465 . 
       FIG.  36    is a perspective view of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  with a first driving assembly  4 - 1490 . The first optical element  4 - 1460  may be driven by the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  to move relative to the second optical element  4 - 1470 . Next, how the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  works is described in detail. However, the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may be omitted and the holder  4 - 1462  may be affixed by adhesion and the like. 
     The first driving assembly  4 - 1490  includes two driving members  4 - 1491  connecting to and support the holder  4 - 1462 . The movement of the driving members  4 - 1491  may also drive the holder  4 - 1462  so that the first optical element  4 - 1460  may move in different directions (such as X-axis, Y-axis, or Z-axis in the drawings) to achieve auto focus (AF) and optical image stabilization (OIS), respectively. For example, the two driving members  4 - 1491  may move the same distance toward the first optical axis  4 - 1461  so that the first optical element  4 - 1460  may also move toward the first optical axis  4 - 1461  to achieve AF. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize or balance the first optical element  4 - 1460  with larger effective optical area (and thus may be heavier), two driving members  4 - 1491  are used, but the number of the driving members  4 - 1491  may be changed. 
     The second optical element  4 - 1470  is located between the two driving members  4 - 1491  when viewed along the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . Additionally, the driving members  4 - 1491  of the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  partially overlaps the second optical element  4 - 1470  but not overlaps the first optical element  4 - 1460  when viewed along the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . 
     In addition to the methods for driving the first optical element  4 - 1460  by the driving members  4 - 1491 , the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may include electromagnetic elements, bias elements made of shape memory alloys (SMA), or smooth impact drive mechanisms (SIDM) or the like. 
     If the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  is electromagnetic type, then the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may include elements such as a coil, a magnetic element, etc. When a current is supplied to the coil, electromagnetic induction may occur between the coil and the magnetic element so as to generate electromagnetic force to drive the first optical element  4 - 1460  to move. 
     If the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  includes bias elements made of SMA, the bias elements may connect to the holder  4 - 1462 . SMA material deforms according to temperature change. Thus, a driving signal (such as current or voltage) may be supplied to the bias elements by a power supply to control the temperature of the bias elements to change the length of the bias elements so as to drive the first optical element  4 - 1460  to move. 
     If the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  is a SIDM, then the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may include piezoelectric assembly, moving object, etc. The volume change of the piezoelectric assembly and the inertia and the friction force of the moving object drive the first optical element  4 - 1460  to move. 
     Additionally, the configurations of the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  are not limited to the aforementioned embodiments.  FIG.  37    to  FIG.  42    are different configurations of the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. It should be noted that  FIG.  37    to  FIG.  42    are much simplified. The positions of the first optical element  4 - 1460 , the second optical element  4 - 1470 , and the third optical element  4 - 1480  are relatively the same, and the elements may have structures the same as or similar to the aforementioned embodiments. 
     As shown in  FIG.  37   , the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may be disposed above the third optical element  4 - 1480  so that the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  overlaps the third optical element  4 - 1480  when viewed along the direction of the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . Also, the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  does not overlap the third optical element  4 - 1480 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  38   , the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may be disposed adjacent to the second optical element  4 - 1470  so that the second optical element  4 - 1470  is located between the third optical element  4 - 1480  and the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  when viewed along the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . Also, the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  does not overlap the first optical element  4 - 1460  when viewed along the direction of the second optical axis  4 - 1481 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  39   , the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may be disposed below the second optical element  4 - 1470  so that the second optical element  4 - 1470  is located between the first optical element  4 - 1460  and the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  when viewed along the direction of the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . Also, the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  does not overlap the first optical element  4 - 1460  and the third optical element  4 - 1480  when viewed along the direction of the second optical axis  4 - 1481 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  40   , the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may be disposed adjacent to the third optical element  4 - 1480  so that the third optical element  4 - 1480  is located between the second optical element  4 - 1470  and the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  when viewed along the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461 . Also, the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  overlaps the third optical element  4 - 1480  when viewed along the direction of the second optical axis  4 - 1481 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  41   , the configuration of  FIG.  41    is similar to that of  FIG.  40   . The difference is that the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  spaced a distance apart from the third optical element  4 - 1480 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  42   , in this embodiment, an optical element driving module similar to the optical element driving module  4 - 1410  of  FIG.  31    is used for receiving the first optical element  4 - 1460 . The first driving assembly  4 - 1490  for driving the first optical element  4 - 1460  may be omitted because the optical element driving module  4 - 1410  includes a driving mechanism for driving the first optical element  4 - 1460  inside. 
       FIG.  43    is a schematic view of a liquid lens driving assembly  4 - 1500 . In  FIG.  43   , the first optical element  4 - 1460  is a liquid lens. Liquid lenses are lenses that the medium is liquid. The focal length of the first optical element  4 - 1460  may be changed by the liquid lens driving assembly  4 - 1500  via rotation or squeeze. Furthermore, the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  may be used for driving the liquid lens driving assembly  4 - 1500  so that the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  drives the first optical element  4 - 1460  (as a liquid lens in this embodiment) and the liquid lens driving assembly  4 - 1500  to move relative to the second optical element  4 - 1470  at the same time 
       FIG.  44    is a schematic view of a second driving assembly  4 - 1520  and a third driving assembly  4 - 1530 . To show clearly, some elements are omitted in  FIG.  44   . In addition to the first driving assembly  4 - 1490 , the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  may include the second driving assembly  4 - 1520  and/or the third driving assembly  4 - 1530 . The second driving assembly  4 - 1520  drives the second optical element  4 - 1470  to move or rotate. The third driving assembly  4 - 1530  drives the third optical element  4 - 1480  to move relative to the second optical element  4 - 1470 . 
     It should be noted that the term “the first” driving assembly  4 - 1490 , “the second” driving assembly  4 - 1520 , and “the third” driving assembly  4 - 1530  do not represent the order or the necessities of different driving assemblies. That is, it does not represent the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  has to include the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  to further include the second driving assembly  4 - 1520 . It does not represent the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  has to include the second driving assembly  4 - 1520  to further include the third driving assembly  4 - 1530 , either. The driving assemblies are arranged or used depends on the requirements. In some embodiments, the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  only includes one or two of the first driving assembly  4 - 1490 , the second driving assembly  4 - 1520 , and the third driving assembly  4 - 1530 . For example, the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  may merely include the third driving assembly  4 - 1530  for driving the third optical element  4 - 1480  to move relative to the second optical element  4 - 1470  while the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  and the second driving assembly  4 - 1520  are omitted. 
     As shown in  FIG.  44   , the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  includes a bottom  4 - 1472 , a circuit board  4 - 1473 , and a holding piece  4 - 1474 . The bottom  4 - 1472  corresponds to the second optical element  4 - 1470 . The circuit board  4 - 1473  is disposed on the bottom  4 - 1472 . The holding piece  4 - 1474  may hold the second optical element  4 - 1470 . In this embodiment, the second driving assembly  4 - 1520  is electromagnetic type, including a coil  4 - 1521  and a magnetic element  4 - 1522 . The coil  4 - 1521  is disposed on the circuit board  4 - 1473  and the magnetic element  4 - 1522  is disposed on the holding piece  4 - 1474 . Alternatively, the position of the coil  4 - 1521  and the position of the magnetic element  4 - 1522  may be exchanged. The generated electromagnetic force between the coil  4 - 1521  and the magnetic element  4 - 1522  may drive the second optical element  4 - 1470  to move or rotate so as to change the forward direction of the light  4 -L. For example, the second optical element  4 - 1470  may rotate around a direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461  and the second optical axis  4 - 1481 . 
     It should be noted that the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  include multiple types with regard to the discussion about  FIG.  37    to  FIG.  42   . When the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  and the second driving assembly  4 - 1520  are both electromagnetic type, the second driving assembly  4 - 1520  is not disposed on the side of the bottom  4 - 1472  adjacent to the first driving assembly  4 - 1490  to avoid magnetic interference. 
     The third driving assembly  4 - 1530  may include configurations the same as or similar to the first driving assembly  4 - 1490 . As described above, for driving the third optical element  4 - 1480 , the third driving assembly  4 - 1530  may include electromagnetic type, bias elements made of SMA, SIDM, etc. 
     In this embodiment the third driving assembly  4 - 1530  includes two coils  4 - 1531 , two magnetic elements  4 - 1532 , two coils  4 - 1533 , and two magnetic elements  4 - 1534 . The generated electromagnetic force between the coils  4 - 1531  and the magnetic elements  4 - 1532  may drive the third optical element  4 - 1480  to move along the direction of the second optical axis  4 - 1481  to achieve AF. The generated electromagnetic force between the coils  4 - 1533  and the magnetic elements  4 - 1534  may drive the third optical element  4 - 1480  to move along the direction that is not parallel to the second optical axis  4 - 1481  to achieve OIS. 
       FIG.  45    and  FIG.  46    are schematic views of an optical system  4 - 1580  in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. The optical system  4 - 1580  may be disposed in an electronic device as the electronic device  4 - 1401  shown in  FIG.  30    while the optical system  4 - 1402  is replaced with the optical system  4 - 1580 . The optical system  4 - 1580  includes the periscope optical module  4 - 1450  and an optical element driving module  4 - 1550 . The optical element driving module  4 - 1550  may be similar to the optical element driving module  4 - 1410  as shown in  FIG.  30   . The optical element driving module  4 - 1550  may be disposed in different positions. 
     As shown in  FIG.  45   , the optical element driving module  4 - 1550  is disposed adjacent to the second optical element  4 - 1470  of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450 . As shown in  FIG.  46   , the optical element driving module  4 - 1550  is disposed adjacent to the third optical element  4 - 1480  of the periscope optical module  4 - 1450 . In  FIG.  45    and  FIG.  46   , the optical element driving module  4 - 1550  and the second optical element  4 - 1470  are arranged along the direction that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  4 - 1461  and parallel to the second optical axis  4 - 1481 . The periscope optical module  4 - 1450  and the optical element driving module  4 - 1550  may include a plurality of optical elements so that when the smart phone  4 - 1580  is used for shooting, targets such as light-detection, wide-angle, and long-focus may be achieved to enhance the quality of the image. 
     An improved periscope optical module is provided. Based on the present disclosure, an optical element with larger effective optical area may be disposed in an electronic device without increasing the thickness of the electronic device. Additionally, different assemblies may be used for drive the optical element to achieve displacement compensation and increase correction efficiency. Additional optical element driving module may also be used together with the periscope optical module of this disclosure to enhance the quality of image being photographed by the electronic device. 
     Fifth Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIGS.  47  and  48   , in an embodiment of the invention, an optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  can be disposed in an electronic device  5 - 20 . The optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  is configured to hold an optical member  5 - 30  and drive the optical member  5 - 30  to move relative to an image sensor module  5 -S in the electronic device  5 - 20 , so as to achieve the purpose of focus adjustment. For example, the electronic device  5 - 20  can be a digital camera or a smart phone having the function of capturing photographs or making video recordings, and the optical member  5 - 30  can be a prism or a mirror. When capturing photographs or making video recordings, light  5 -L enters the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  along an incident direction  5 -D 1 , and moves along an outgoing direction  5 -D 2  to reach the image sensor module  5 -S after reflected by the optical member  5 - 30 . 
     In this embodiment, after reflected by the optical member  5 - 30 , the light  5 -L reaches the image sensor module  5 -S through an optical system  5 - 40 . The optical system  5 - 40  can be adjusted or omitted as required, and is not limited to the structure shown in figures. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the light  5 -L enters the optical member  5 - 30  from a first surface  5 - 31  of the optical member  5 - 30 , and leaves the optical member  5 - 30  from a second surface  5 - 32 . In some embodiments, the disposing orientation of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  can be adjusted, the light  5 -L can enter the optical member  5 - 30  from the second surface  5 - 32  of the optical member  5 - 30  and leave the optical member  5 - 30  from the first surface  5 - 31 . In other words, in some embodiments, the incident direction  5 -D 1  and the outgoing direction  5 -D 2  can be exchanged. 
       FIGS.  59  and  60    are schematic diagrams of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  in different views, and  FIG.  51    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 . As shown in  FIGS.  59 - 61   , the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  primarily includes a fixed portion  5 - 100 , a movable portion  5 - 200 , an elastic member  5 - 300 , a driving assembly  5 - 400 , at least one magnetic permeability member  5 - 500 , and a plurality of damping members  5 - 600 . 
     The fixed portion  5 - 100  includes a base  5 - 110  and a housing  5 - 120 . The base  5 - 110  and the housing  5 - 120  can be assembled using snap-fit joints or adhesive member. In detail, as shown in  FIGS.  50  and  52   , the housing  5 - 120  has a hole  5 - 121 , and the base  5 - 110  has a bottom  5 - 111  and a lateral wall  5 - 112 . The lateral wall  5 - 112  is connected to the bottom  5 - 111  and extends along the Z-axis. A protrusion  5 - 113  and at least one glue recess  5 - 114  are formed on the lateral wall  5 - 112 , and at least one overflow groove  5 - 115  communicated with the glue recess is formed on the bottom  5 - 111 , wherein the glue recess  5 - 114  has an inclined surface. In other words, the portion of the glue recess  5 - 114  away from the bottom  5 - 111  is closer to the movable portion  5 - 200 . 
     When the user desires to join the base  5 - 110  to the housing  5 - 120 , a glue can be applied in the glue recess  5 - 114 , and then the housing  5 - 120  can approach the bottom  5 - 111  of the base  5 - 111  along −Z-axis. Finally, the protrusion  5 - 113  can pass through the hole  5 - 121  (as shown in  FIG.  50   ). Owing to adhesion of the glue and the snap-fit joints between the protrusion  5 - 113  and the hole  5 - 121 , the base  5 - 110  and the housing  5 - 120  can be tightly joined together. 
     If the glue is redundant, the glue slides along the inclined surface of the glue recess  5 - 114  to the overflow groove  5 - 115  during joining. As shown in  FIG.  50   , when the base  5 - 110  and the housing  5 - 120  are joined, the glue recess  5 - 114  is disposed between the base  5 - 110  and the housing  5 - 120 , and the overflow groove  5 - 115  is exposed. Since the overflow groove  5 - 115  is exposed, the redundant glue can be exhausted and will not remain in the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 . 
     Moreover, in order to ensure that the user assembles the base  5 - 110  and the housing  5 - 120  correctly, the base  5 - 110  has a positioning member  5 - 116  that protrudes from the lateral wall  5 - 112 , and the housing  5 - 120  has a positioning slot  5 - 122  that corresponds to the positioning member  5 - 116 . When the base  5 - 110  is joined to the housing  5 - 120 , the positioning member  5 - 116  enters the positioning slot  5 - 122 . 
     As shown in  FIGS.  48  and  49   , in this embodiment, the base  5 - 110  has a plurality of abutting members  5 - 117  protruding from the lateral wall  5 - 112  and facing the optical system  5 - 40 . The surfaces of these abutting members  5 - 117  facing the optical system  5 - 40  are coplanar, so that the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  can horizontally attach the optical system  5 - 40 . 
     As shown in  FIGS.  51  and  53   , the movable portion  5 - 200  is an optical member holder, and the optical member  5 - 30  is disposed on a surface  5 - 210  of the movable portion  5 - 200 . Since at least one supporting portion  5 - 211  protruding from the surface  5 - 210  is formed on the peripheral area of the surface  5 - 210  in this embodiment, a gap  5 -G can be formed between the optical member  5 - 30  and the surface  5 - 210  when the optical member  5 - 30  is disposed on the movable portion  5 - 200  (as shown in  FIG.  48   ). Therefore, the efficiency of reflecting can be enhanced, and the disposing angle of the optical member  5 - 30  can be adjusted. 
     The optical member  5 - 30  can be affixed to the movable portion  5 - 200  by using an adhesive member. For example, a plurality of grooves  5 - 221  are formed on the inner surface of the lateral wall  5 - 220  of the movable portion  5 - 200 . When the optical member  5 - 30  is disposed on the supporting portion  5 - 211 , the user can infuse glue into the grooves  5 - 221 , so that the optical member  5 - 30  can be affixed to the movable portion  5 - 200  from its lateral surfaces. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  51  and  54   , the elastic member  5 - 300  has at least one first engaged section  5 - 310 , at least one second engaged section  5 - 320 , at least one first curved section  5 - 330 , at least one second curved section  5 - 340 , and at least one axis section  5 - 350 . The first engaged section  5 - 310  is affixed to the fixed portion  5 - 100 , and the second engaged section  5 - 320  is affixed to the movable portion  5 - 200 . The first curved section  5 - 330 , the second curved section  5 - 340 , and the axis section  5 - 350  are disposed between the first engaged section  5 - 310  and the second engaged section  5 - 320 . The first curved section  5 - 330  connects the first engaged section  5 - 310  to the axis section  5 - 350 , and the second curved section  5 - 340  connects the second engaged section  5 - 320  to the axis section  5 - 350 . The movable portion  5 - 200  can be suspended on the fixed portion  5 - 100  by the elastic member  5 - 300 . 
     It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  has a first side  5 - 11  and a second side  5 - 12 , and the movable portion  5 - 200  is disposed between the first side  5 - 11  and the second side  5 - 12 . The elastic member  5 - 300  has a plate structure and extends from the first side  5 - 11  to the second side  5 - 12 . The extending direction of the elastic member  5 - 300  is perpendicular to the incident direction  5 -D 1  of the light  5 -L. At least a portion of the first curved section  5 - 330  and the second curved section  5 - 340  overlap as seen from the outgoing direction  5 -D 2 , so as to effectively distribute the stress during the rotation of the movable portion  5 - 200 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  48 ,  51  and  54   , the driving assembly  5 - 400  includes at least one first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 , at least one second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 , a position sensor  5 - 430 , and a plurality of wires  5 - 440 . The first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410  and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420  are respectively affixed to the fixed portion  5 - 100  and the movable portion  5 - 200 , and the position of the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410  corresponds to the position of the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 . In this embodiment, the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410  is a coil, and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420  is a magnet. When current flows through the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 , an electromagnetic effect is generated between the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410  and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 , and the movable portion  5 - 200  and the optical member  5 - 30  disposed on the movable portion  5 - 200  are driven to rotate around a rotation axis  5 -R relative to the fixed portion  5 - 100 . 
     According to the structure of the elastic member  5 - 300 , the rotation axis  5 -R will pass through the axis section  5 - 350  of the elastic member  5 - 300 . It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the rotation axis  5 -R does not pass through the turning point of the light  5 -L. 
     Due to the rotation of the optical member  5 - 30 , the position of the light  5 -L reaching the image sensor module  5 -S can be slightly adjusted, and the purpose of focus adjustment can be achieved. 
     In some embodiments, the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410  is a magnet, and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420  is a coil. 
     The position sensor  5 - 430  is disposed on the fixed portion  5 - 100  and corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 . The position sensor  5 - 430  is configured to detect the position of the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 , so as to obtain the rotation angle of the movable portion  5 - 200  relative to the fixed portion  5 - 100 . For example, the position sensor  5 - 430  can be a Hall sensor, a magnetoresistance effect sensor (MR sensor), a giant magnetoresistance effect sensor (GMR sensor), a tunneling magnetoresistance effect sensor (TMR sensor), or a fluxgate sensor. 
     The wires  5 - 440  can be embedded in the base  5 - 110  of the fixed portion  5 - 100 , and can be connected to the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410  and the position sensor  5 - 430 . As shown in  FIG.  55   , specifically, a plurality of through holes  5 - 118  are formed on the bottom  5 - 111 , at least a portion of wires  5 - 440  is exposed from the through holes  5 - 118 , and the interrupt region  5 - 441  of the wires  5 - 440  is also exposed from the through hole  5 - 118 . The interrupt region  5 - 441  can be formed by drilling, therefore, the interrupt region  5 - 441  can include an arc profile. 
     The connecting portions  5 - 442  between the wires  5 - 440  and the position sensor  5 - 430  is symmetrical relative to the position sensor  5 - 430 . Thus, the movement of the position sensor  5 - 430  due to the attachment of the solder in welding can be prevented. 
     As shown in  FIG.  51   , the magnetic permeability member  5 - 500  is disposed on the movable portion  5 - 200  and disposed between the movable portion  5 - 200  and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 . The magnetic permeability member  5 - 500  is configured to enhance the electromagnetic pushing force. Moreover, the magnetic permeability member  5 - 500  includes at least one extending portion  5 - 510  extending through the movable portion  5 - 200  to increase the mechanical strength of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  51  and  54   , the damping members  5 - 600  are disposed on the corners of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  having a polygonal structure (a rectangular in this embodiment). For example, the damping members  5 - 600  can be connected to the fixed portion  5 - 100  and the movable portion  5 - 200 , or disposed on the elastic member  5 - 300 , so as to suppress the vibration during the rotation of the movable portion  5 - 200 . The damping members  5 - 600  can be disposed on a virtual plane  5 -P to increase the stability of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 , wherein the virtual plane  5 -P is perpendicular to the incident direction  5 -D 1  of the light  5 -L. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  56 - 58   , in another embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 ′ includes a fixed portion  5 - 100 ′, a movable portion  5 - 200 ′, a plurality of elastic members  5 - 300 ′, a driving assembly  5 - 400 ′, at least one magnetic permeability member  5 - 500 ′, and a plurality of damping members  5 - 600 ′. 
     The fixed portion  5 - 100 ′ includes a base  5 - 110 ′ and a housing  5 - 120 ′. The base  5 - 110 ′ and the housing  5 - 120 ′ can be assembled using snap-fit joints or adhesive member. Moreover, in order to ensure that the user assembles the base  5 - 110 ′ and the housing  5 - 120 ′ correctly, the base  5 - 110 ′ has a positioning member  5 - 116 ′ that protrudes from the lateral wall  5 - 112 ′, and the housing  5 - 120 ′ has a positioning slot  5 - 122 ′ that corresponds to the positioning member  5 - 116 ′. When the base  5 - 110 ′ is joined to the housing  5 - 120 ′, the positioning member  5 - 116 ′ enters the positioning slot  5 - 122 ′. 
     In this embodiment, the base  5 - 110 ′ has a plurality of abutting members  5 - 117 ′ protruding from the lateral wall  5 - 112 ′ and facing the optical system  5 - 40 . The surfaces of these abutting members  5 - 117 ′ facing the optical system  5 - 40  are coplanar, so that the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10  can horizontally attach the optical system  5 - 40 . 
     The movable portion  5 - 200 ′ is an optical member holder, and the optical member  5 - 30  is disposed on the movable portion  5 - 200 ′. As shown in  FIG.  59   , each of the elastic member  5 - 300 ′ has at least one first engaged section  5 - 310 ′, at least one second engaged section  5 - 320 ′, at least one first curved section  5 - 330 ′, at least one second curved section  5 - 340 ′, and at least one axis section  5 - 350 ′. The first engaged section  5 - 310 ′ is affixed to the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′, and the second engaged section  5 - 320 ′ is affixed to the movable portion  5 - 200 ′. The first curved section  5 - 330 ′, the second curved section  5 - 340 ′, and the axis section  5 - 350 ′ are disposed between the first engaged section  5 - 310 ′ and the second engaged section  5 - 320 ′. The first curved section  5 - 330 ′ connects the first engaged section  5 - 310 ′ to the axis section  5 - 350 ′, and the second curved section  5 - 340 ′ connects the second engaged section  5 - 320 ′ to the axis section  5 - 350 ′. The movable portion  5 - 200 ′ can be suspended on the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′ by the elastic member  5 - 300 ′. 
     Specifically, at least a portion of the first curved section  5 - 330 ′ and the second curved section  5 - 340 ′ overlap as seen from the outgoing direction  5 -D 2 , so as to effectively distribute the stress during the rotation of the movable portion  5 - 200 ′. 
     As shown in  FIG.  58   , the driving assembly  5 - 400 ′ includes at least one first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′, at least one electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′, a position sensor  5 - 430 ′, and a plurality of wires  5 - 440 ′. The first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′ and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′ are respectively affixed to the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′ and the movable portion  5 - 200 ′, and the position of the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′ corresponds to the position of the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′. In this embodiment, the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′ is a coil, and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′ is a magnet. When current flows through the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′, an electromagnetic effect is generated between the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′ and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′, and the movable portion  5 - 200 ′ and the optical member  5 - 30  disposed on the movable portion  5 - 200 ′ are driven to rotate around a rotation axis  5 -R′ relative to the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′. 
     According to the structure of the elastic member  5 - 300 ′, the rotation axis  5 -R′ will pass through the axis section  5 - 350 ′ of the elastic member  5 - 300 ′. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the rotation axis  5 -R′ does not pass through the turning point of the light  5 -L. 
     Due to the rotation of the optical member  5 - 30 , the position of the light  5 -L reaching the image sensor module  5 -S can be slightly adjusted, and the purpose of focus adjustment can be achieved. 
     In some embodiments, the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′ is a magnet, and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′ is a coil. 
     The position sensor  5 - 430 ′ is disposed on the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′ and corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′. The position sensor  5 - 430 ′ is configured to detect the position of the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′, so as to obtain the rotation angle of the movable portion  5 - 200 ′ relative to the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′. For example, the position sensor  5 - 430 ′ can be a Hall sensor, a magnetoresistance effect sensor (MR sensor), a giant magnetoresistance effect sensor (GMR sensor), a tunneling magnetoresistance effect sensor (TMR sensor), or a fluxgate sensor. 
     The wires  5 - 440 ′ can be embedded in the base  5 - 110 ′ of the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′, and can be connected to the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′ and the position sensor  5 - 430 ′. As shown in  FIG.  61   , specifically, a plurality of through holes  5 - 118 ′ are formed on the bottom  5 - 111 ′, and the user can weld the wires  5 - 440 ′ to the first electromagnetic driving member  5 - 410 ′ through the through hole  5 - 118 ′. In some embodiments, the wires  5 - 440 ′ can be mounted by using surface-mount technology (SMT), and there is no need to form the through hole on the bottom  5 - 111 ′. The base  5 - 110 ′ can achieve an integrated appearance. 
     Furthermore, the connecting portions  5 - 442 ′ between the wires  5 - 440 ′ and the position sensor  5 - 430 ′ is symmetrical relative to the position sensor  5 - 430 ′. Thus, the movement of the position sensor  5 - 430 ′ due to the attachment of the solder in welding can be prevented. 
     As shown in  FIGS.  58  and  60   , the magnetic permeability member  5 - 500 ′ is disposed on the movable portion  5 - 200 ′ and disposed between the movable portion  5 - 200 ′ and the second electromagnetic driving member  5 - 420 ′. The magnetic permeability member  5 - 500 ′ is configured to enhance the electromagnetic pushing force. Moreover, the magnetic permeability member  5 - 500 ′ includes at least one extending portion  5 - 510 ′ extending through the movable portion  5 - 200 ′ to increase the mechanical strength of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 ′. In this embodiment, the extending portion  5 - 510 ′ extends to the back side of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 ′. 
     As shown in  FIG.  59   , the damping members  5 - 600 ′ are disposed on the corners of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 ′ having a polygonal structure (a rectangular in this embodiment). For example, the damping members  5 - 600 ′ can be connected to the fixed portion  5 - 100 ′ and the movable portion  5 - 200 ′, or disposed on the elastic member  5 - 300 ′, so as to suppress the vibration during the rotation of the movable portion  5 - 200 ′. The damping members  5 - 600 ′ can be disposed on the a virtual plane  5 -P′ to increase the stability of the optical member driving mechanism  5 - 10 ′, wherein the virtual plane  5 -P′ is perpendicular to the incident direction  5 -D 1  of the light  5 -L. 
     In summary, an optical member driving mechanism is provided, including a movable portion, a fixed portion, and a driving assembly. The movable portion is connected to an optical member. The movable portion is movable relative to the fixed portion. The driving assembly is configured to drive the movable portion to move relative to the fixed portion. 
     Sixth Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIG.  62   , in an embodiment of the invention, an optical member driving mechanism  6 - 10  can be disposed in an electronic device  6 - 20 . The optical member driving mechanism  6 - 10  is configured to hold an optical member  6 - 30  and drive the optical member  6 - 30  to move relative to an image sensor module (not shown) in the electronic device  6 - 20 , so as to achieve the purpose of focus adjustment. For example, the electronic device  6 - 20  can be a digital camera or a smart phone having the function of capturing photographs or making video recordings, and the optical member  6 - 30  can be a prism or a mirror. When capturing photographs or making video recordings, light enters the optical member driving mechanism  6 - 10  along an incident direction (−Z-axis), and after being reflected by the optical member  6 - 30 , the light moves in the outgoing direction (−Y-axis) through an optical system  6 - 40  in the electronic device  6 - 20  until it reaches the image sensor module. The optical system  6 - 40  is configured to focus or adjust the light path, and can be adjusted or omitted as required. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  63  and  64   , the optical member driving mechanism  6 - 10  primarily includes a fixed portion  6 - 100 , a movable portion  6 - 200 , a supporting member  6 - 300 , a driving assembly  6 - 400 , an elastic member  6 - 500 , and a magnetic permeability member  9 - 600 . 
     The fixed portion  6 - 100  includes a base  6 - 110  and a housing  6 - 120 . The base  6 - 110  and the housing  6 - 120  can be assembled using snap-fit joints or an adhesive member, and an accommodating space  6 - 130  can be formed after assembly (as shown in  FIGS.  67    and  68 ). The movable portion  6 - 200  can be an optical member holder, and the optical member  6 - 30  is disposed on the movable portion  6 - 200 . When the movable portion  6 - 200  is movably connected to the fixed portion  6 - 100 , the movable portion  6 - 200  and the optical member  6 - 30  are accommodated in the accommodating space  6 - 130  of the fixed portion  6 - 100 . 
     As shown in  FIGS.  65  and  66   , the movable portion  6 - 200  includes a main body  6 - 210  and two lateral walls  6 - 220  respectively connected to the opposite side of the main body  6 - 210 . A plurality of grooves  6 - 221  are formed on the inner surface of each of the lateral walls  6 - 220 , wherein the inner surface faces the main body  6 - 210 . The user can dispose the optical member  6 - 30  on the inner surface  6 - 211  of the main body  6 - 210 , and then infuse adhesive glue into the grooves  6 - 221 . Therefore, the optical member  6 - 30  can be affixed to the movable portion  6 - 200 . 
     A depression  6 - 212  is formed on the outer surface of the main body  6 - 210 , and an annular structure  6 - 230  is formed on the bottom surface  6 - 213  of the main body  6 - 210 . The annular structure  6 - 230  protrudes from the bottom surface  6 - 213 . Each of the lateral walls  6 - 200  has a depression  6 - 222  and a restricting structure  6 - 240 . The depression  6 - 222  is formed on the outer surface of each of the lateral walls  6 - 220 , and the restricting structure  6 - 240  is positioned on the top side of each of the lateral walls  6 - 220 . Each of the restricting structures  6 - 240  has an inclined surface  6 - 241  facing the optical member  6 - 30 . 
     As shown in  FIGS.  64 ,  67  and  68   , the supporting member  6 - 300  can be a ball. After the optical member driving mechanism  6 - 10  is assembled, the supporting member  6 - 300  is disposed between the base  6 - 110  and the movable portion  6 - 200 , and contacts the base  6 - 110  and the bottom surface  6 - 213  of the movable portion  6 - 200 . Moreover, the supporting member  6 - 300  is surrounded by the annular structure  6 - 230 . 
     Since the thickness of the supporting member  6 - 300  is greater than the thickness of the annular structure  6 - 230  in the Z-axis, the movable portion  6 - 200  is supported by the supporting member  6 - 300  and does not contact the base  6 - 110 . A gap  6 -G can be formed between the movable portion  6 - 200  and the base  6 - 110 . 
     In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the annular structure  6 - 230  is substantially the same as the diameter of the supporting member  6 - 300 , so that the supporting member  6 - 300  can be positioned. Furthermore, as seen from the Z-axis, the annular structure  6 - 230  and the supporting member  6 - 300  overlap the center of the optical member  6 - 30 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  64 ,  67  and  68   , the driving assembly  6 - 400  includes first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 A and  6 - 410 B, second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B, a circuit board  6 - 430 , and position sensors  6 - 440 . 
     The circuit board  6 - 430  is affixed to the housing  6 - 120  and has a U-shaped structure. In other words, the circuit board  6 - 430  can be divided into a left segment  6 - 431 , a right segment  6 - 432 , and a middle segment  6 - 433 . The middle segment  6 - 433  connects the left segment  6 - 431  to the right segment  6 - 432 , and the normal direction of the middle segment  6 - 433  is different from the normal direction of the left segment  6 - 431  and the normal direction of the right segment  6 - 432 . 
     The first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 A and  6 - 410 B are disposed on the circuit board  6 - 430 . In this embodiment, the driving assembly  6 - 400  includes one first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 A and two first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 B. The first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 A is disposed on the middle segment  6 - 433  of the circuit board  6 - 430 , and two first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 B are respectively disposed on the left segment  6 - 431  and the right segment  6 - 432  of the circuit board  6 - 430 . 
     The second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B are disposed on the movable portion  6 - 200 , and the positions of the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B respectively corresponds to the positions of the first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 A and  6 - 410 B. Therefore, the second electromagnetic driving member  6 - 420 A can be disposed on the main body  6 - 210  of the movable portion  6 - 200 , and the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 B can be disposed on the lateral walls  6 - 220 . In this embodiment, the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B can be respectively accommodated in the depressions  6 - 212  and  6 - 222 , so as to miniaturize the optical member driving mechanism  6 - 10 . 
     For example, the first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 A and  6 - 410 B can be coils, and the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B can be magnets. Since the first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 A corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving member  6 - 420 A, when a current flows through the first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 A, an electromagnetic effect is generated between the first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 A and the second electromagnetic driving member  6 - 420 A, and the movable portion  6 - 200  is driven to rotate around a first rotation axis  6 -AX 1  relative to the fixed portion  6 - 100 . In this embodiment, the first rotation axis  6 -AX 1  passes through the supporting member  6 - 300 . 
     Similarly, since the first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 B corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving member  6 - 420 B, when a current flows through the first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 B, an electromagnetic effect is generated between the first electromagnetic driving member  6 - 410 B and the second electromagnetic driving member  6 - 420 B, and the movable portion  6 - 200  is driven to rotate around a second rotation axis  6 -AX 2  relative to the fixed portion  6 - 100 . In this embodiment, the second rotation axis  6 -AX 2  is perpendicular to the first rotation axis  6 -AX 1 , and the second rotation axis  6 -AX 2  also passes through the supporting member  6 - 300 . 
     Due to the rotation of the movable portion  6 - 200  relative to the fixed portion  6 - 100 , the optical member  6 - 30  on the movable portion  6 - 200  can also rotate relative to the fixed portion  6 - 100 . Thus, the moving direction of the reflected light can be lightly adjusted. In some embodiments, the first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 A and  6 - 410 B can be magnets, and the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B can be coils. 
     Since a part of the movable portion  6 - 200 , a part of the base  6 - 110 , and the supporting member  6 - 300  are made of metal, and the supporting member  6 - 300  is a ball, the debris caused by the friction during the rotation of the movable portion  6 - 200  relative to the fixed portion  6 - 100  can be reduced. 
     The position sensors  6 - 440  are disposed on the circuit board  6 - 430 , and the positions of the position sensors  6 - 440  correspond to that of the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B. The position sensors  6 - 440  are configured to detect the position of the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B, so as to obtain the rotation angle of the movable portion  6 - 200  relative to the fixed portion  6 - 100 . 
     For example, the position sensors  6 - 440  can be a Hall sensor, a magnetoresistance effect sensor (MR sensor), a giant magnetoresistance effect sensor (GMR sensor), a tunneling magnetoresistance effect sensor (TMR sensor), or a fluxgate sensor. 
     Referring to  FIG.  69   , the elastic member  6 - 500  includes at least one first engaged section  6 - 510 , at least one second engaged section  6 - 520 , at least one first axis section  6 - 530 , at least one second axis section  6 - 540 , and a plurality of string sections  6 - 550 . 
     The first engaged section  6 - 510  and the second engaged section  6 - 520  are respectively affixed to the fixed portion  6 - 100  and the movable portion  6 - 200 . The first axis section  6 - 530  is connected to the first engaged section  6 - 510 , the second axis section  6 - 540  is connected to the second engaged section  6 - 520 , and the string sections  6 - 550  connect the first axis section  6 - 530  to the second axis section  6 - 540 . 
     Before the current flows through the first electromagnetic driving members  6 - 410 A and  410 B, the elastic member  6 - 500  provides an elastic force to the movable portion  6 - 200  to push the movable portion  6 - 200  close to the base  6 - 110  of the fixed portion  6 - 100 . Therefore, the movable portion  6 - 200  can tightly abut the supporting member  6 - 300 , the supporting member  6 - 300  can be tightly clamped between the movable portion  6 - 200  and the base  6 - 110 , and the separation of the supporting member  6 - 300  can be avoided. 
     In this embodiment, the elastic member  6 - 500  includes two first engaged sections  6 - 510  and two second engaged sections  6 - 520 . Two first engaged sections  6 - 510  are arranged along the first rotation axis  6 -AX 1 , and the second engaged sections  6 - 520  are arranged along another direction  6 -AX 3 . The direction  6 -AX 3  is perpendicular to the first rotation axis  6 -AX 1  and the second rotation axis  6 -AX 2 . 
     In direction  6 -AX 3 , the string sections  6 - 550  can be divided into a first length  6 -D 1  and a second length  6 -D 2  by the first axis section  6 - 530 . In this embodiment, the first length  6 -D 1  is substantially the same as the second length  6 -D 2 , so that the elastic force applied to the movable portion  6 - 200  is uniform. Furthermore, as shown in  FIG.  69   , in this embodiment, the supporting member  6 - 300  is disposed on the intersection of the first rotation axis  6 -AX 1  and the second rotation axis  6 -AX 2 . 
     The string sections  6 - 550  can be adjusted as required. For example, referring to  FIG.  70   , in another embodiment, the string sections  6 - 550  are divided into a first length  6 -D 1  and a second length  6 -D 2  by the first axis section  6 - 530 , and the first length  6 -D 1  is less than the second length  6 -D 2 . Moreover, in this embodiment, the first axis section  6 - 530  and the first rotation axis  6 -AX 1  are parallel, but they are not overlap each other. 
     Referring to  FIG.  64   , the magnetic permeability member  9 - 600  is embedded in the movable portion  6 - 200  and adjacent to the second electromagnetic driving members  6 - 420 A and  6 - 420 B, so as to enhance the magnetic pushing force of the driving assembly  6 - 400 . 
     In summary, an optical member driving mechanism is provided, including a movable portion, a fixed portion, and a driving assembly. The movable portion is connected to an optical member. The fixed portion has an accommodating space, and the optical member is received in the accommodating space. The movable portion is movable relative to the fixed portion. The driving assembly is configured to drive the movable portion to move relative to the fixed portion. 
     Seventh Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIG.  71   , in an embodiment of the invention, an optical member driving mechanism  7 - 10  can be disposed in an electronic device  7 - 20 . The optical member driving mechanism  7 - 10  is configured to hold an optical member  7 - 30  and drive the optical member  7 - 30  to move relative to an image sensor module (not shown) in the electronic device  7 - 20 , so as to achieve the purpose of focus adjustment. For example, the electronic device  7 - 20  can be a digital camera or a smart phone having the function of capturing photographs or making video recordings, and the optical member  7 - 30  can be a prism or a mirror. When capturing photographs or making video recordings, a light enters the optical member driving mechanism  7 - 10  along an incident direction (−Z-axis), and after reflected by the optical member  7 - 30 , the light moves along an outgoing direction (−Y-axis) through an optical system  7 - 40  in the electronic device  7 - 20  and reach the image sensor module. The optical system  7 - 40  is configured to focus or adjust the light path, and can be adjusted or omitted as required. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  72  and  73   , the optical member driving mechanism  7 - 10  primarily includes a fixed portion  7 - 100 , a movable portion  7 - 200 , a supporting member  7 - 300 , a driving assembly  7 - 400 , an elastic member  7 - 500 , a magnetic permeability member  7 - 600 , and a plurality of damping members  7 - 700 . 
     The fixed portion  7 - 100  includes a base  7 - 110  and a housing  7 - 120 . The base  7 - 110  and the housing  7 - 120  can be assembled using snap-fit joints or adhesive member, and an accommodating space  7 - 130  can be formed after assembled (as shown in  FIG.  76   ). The movable portion  7 - 200  can be an optical member holder, and the optical member  7 - 30  is disposed on the movable portion  7 - 200 . When the movable portion  7 - 200  is movably connected to the fixed portion  7 - 100 , the movable portion  7 - 200  and the optical member  7 - 30  are accommodated in the accommodating space  7 - 130  of the fixed portion  7 - 100 . 
     As shown in  FIGS.  74  and  75   , the movable portion  7 - 200  includes a main body  7 - 210  and two lateral walls  7 - 220  respectively connected to opposite sides of the main body  7 - 210 . A plurality of grooves  7 - 221  are formed on the inner surface of each of the lateral walls  7 - 220 . The user can dispose the optical member  7 - 30  on the inner surface  7 - 211  of the main body  7 - 210 , and then infuse adhesive glue into the grooves  7 - 221 . Thereby, the optical member  7 - 30  can be affixed to the movable portion  7 - 200 . 
     The longitudinal direction of the grooves  7 - 221  can be different to ensure that the optical member  7 - 30  will not separate from the movable portion  7 - 200  when external forces in various directions applied thereon. For example, in this embodiment, the movable portion has a plurality of grooves  7 - 221  having longitudinal direction along the Z-axis and a plurality of grooves  7 - 221  having longitudinal direction along the Y-axis. When the user infuses adhesive glue into the grooves  7 - 221  having longitudinal direction along the Z-axis, adhesive glue can provide a sufficient adhesive force to the optical member  7 - 30  to ensure that an external force in Y-axis cannot separate the optical member  7 - 30  from the movable portion  7 - 200 . When the user infuses adhesive glue into the grooves  7 - 221  having longitudinal direction along the Y-axis, adhesive glue can provide a sufficient adhesive force to the optical member  7 - 30  to ensure that an external force in Z-axis cannot separate the optical member  7 - 30  from the movable portion  7 - 200 . 
     A depression  7 - 222 A is formed on the outer surface of each of the lateral walls  7 - 200 , and a depression  7 - 212  is formed on the outer surface of the main body  7 - 210 . Moreover, the main body  7 - 210  further includes an annular structure  7 - 230 , disposed on the bottom surface  7 - 213  of the main body and protruding from the bottom surface  7 - 213 . 
     As shown in  FIGS.  73  and  76   , the supporting member  7 - 300  can be a ball. After the optical member driving mechanism  7 - 10  is assembled, the supporting member  7 - 300  is disposed between the base  7 - 110  and the movable portion  7 - 200 , and contacts the base  7 - 110  and the bottom surface  7 - 213  of the movable portion  7 - 200 . Moreover, the supporting member  7 - 300  is surrounded by the annular structure  7 - 230 . 
     Since the thickness of the supporting member  7 - 300  is greater than the thickness of the annular structure  7 - 230  in the Z-axis, the movable portion  7 - 200  is supported by the supporting member  7 - 300  and does not contact the base  7 - 110 . A gap  7 -G can be formed between the movable portion  7 - 200  and the base  7 - 110 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  73  and  76 - 78   , the driving assembly  7 - 400  includes first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B, second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B, a circuit board  7 - 430 , and position sensors  7 - 440 . 
     The circuit board  7 - 430  is affixed to the housing  7 - 120 . As shown in  FIG.  76   , the housing  7 - 120  of the fixed portion  7 - 100  has a C-shaped structure  7 - 121 . And upper side of the circuit board  7 - 430  enters the notch of the C-shaped structure  7 - 121  to position the circuit board  7 - 430 . Similarly, as shown in  FIG.  77   , the base  7 - 110  of the fixed portion  7 - 100  has a first restricting portion  7 - 111  and a second restricting portion  7 - 112 . The first restricting portion  7 - 111  and the second restricting portion  7 - 112  are extended toward the housing  7 - 120 , and the distance between the first restricting portion  7 - 111  and the movable portion  7 - 200  is greater than the distance between the second restricting portion  7 - 112 . When the circuit board  7 - 430  is disposed on the circuit board  7 - 110 , the other side of the circuit board  7 - 430  is clamped between the first restricting portion  7 - 111  and the second restricting portion  7 - 112 . Thereby, the circuit board  7 - 430  can be affixed and positioned by the C-shaped structure  7 - 121 , the first restricting portion  7 - 111 , and the second restricting portion  7 - 112 . 
     Specifically, the second restricting portion  7 - 112  has a chamfer or a fillet facing the circuit board  7 - 430 , so as to increase the area where can arrange the circuit and to prevent the circuit board  7 - 430  from scratching during assembly. 
     The circuit board  7 - 430  has a U-shaped structure. In other words, the circuit board  7 - 430  can be divided into a left segment  7 - 431 , a right segment  7 - 432 , and a middle segment  7 - 433 . The middle segment  7 - 433  connects the left segment  7 - 431  to the right segment  7 - 432 , and the normal direction of the middle segment  7 - 433  is different from the normal direction of the left segment  7 - 431  and the normal direction of the right segment  7 - 432 . Furthermore, the circuit board  7 - 430  has a plurality of through holes  7 - 434 , and at least a portion of the circuit  7 - 435  of the circuit board  7 - 430  is exposed from the through holes  7 - 434 . 
     In this embodiment, the driving assembly  7 - 400  includes one first electromagnetic driving member  7 - 410 A and two first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 B. The first electromagnetic driving member  7 - 410 A is disposed on the middle segment  7 - 433  of the circuit board  7 - 430 , and two first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 B are respectively disposed on the left segment  7 - 431  and the right segment  7 - 432  of the circuit board  7 - 430 . The first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B can be coils, and can be connected to the circuit  7 - 435  at the through holes  7 - 434  by welding. 
     As shown in  FIG.  79   , when the base  7 - 110  and the housing  7 - 120  of the fixed portion  7 - 100  are joined together, one or more openings  7 - 140  is formed between the base  7 - 110  and the housing  7 - 120 , and the positions of the openings  7 - 140  correspond to the positions of the through holes  7 - 434 . The user can fill the adhesive member (such as a glue, not shown) into the opening  7 - 140 , so that the base  7 - 110 , the housing  7 - 120 , the circuit board  7 - 430 , and the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B can be affixed more securely. 
     In some embodiments, the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B can be mounted on the circuit board  7 - 430  by using surface-mount technology (SMT), and the through holes  7 - 434  can be omitted. 
     As shown in  FIGS.  80  and  81   , the inside tracks of the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B have asymmetric patterns, so as to ensure that the user mounts the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B in the correct orientation. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  73  and  76 - 78   , the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B are disposed on the movable portion  7 - 200 , and the positions of the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B respectively correspond to the positions of the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B. The second electromagnetic driving member  7 - 420 A can be disposed on the main body  7 - 210  of the movable portion  7 - 200 , and the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 B can be disposed on the lateral walls  7 - 220  of the movable portion  7 - 200 . In this embodiment, the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B can be respectively accommodated in the depressions  7 - 212  and  7 - 222  of the movable portion  7 - 200 , so as to miniaturize the optical member driving mechanism  7 - 10 . 
     The second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B can be magnets. Since the first electromagnetic driving member  7 - 410 A corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving member  7 - 420 A, when a current flows through the first electromagnetic driving member  7 - 410 A, an electromagnetic effect is generated between the first electromagnetic driving member  7 - 410 A and the second electromagnetic driving member  7 - 420 A, and the movable portion  7 - 200  is driven to rotate around a first rotation axis  7 -AX 1  relative to the fixed portion  7 - 100 . 
     Similarly, since the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 B corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 B, when current flow through the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 B, an electromagnetic effect is generated between the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 B and the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 B, and the movable portion  7 - 200  is driven to rotate around a second rotation axis  7 -AX 2  relative to the fixed portion  7 - 100 . In this embodiment, the second rotation axis  7 -AX 2  is perpendicular to the first rotation axis  7 -AX 1 . 
     Due to the rotation of the movable portion  7 - 200  relative to the fixed portion  7 - 100 , the optical member  7 - 30  on the movable portion  7 - 200  can also rotate relative to the fixed portion  7 - 100 . Thus, the emission direction of the reflected light can be lightly adjusted. In some embodiments, the first electromagnetic driving members  7 - 410 A and  7 - 410 B can be magnets, and the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B can be coils. 
     The position sensors  7 - 440  are disposed on the circuit board  7 - 430 , and the positions of the position sensors  7 - 440  correspond to that of the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B. The position sensors  7 - 440  are configured to detect the position of the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B, so as to obtain the rotation angle of the movable portion  7 - 200  relative to the fixed portion  7 - 100 . 
     For example, the position sensors  7 - 440  can be a Hall sensor, a magnetoresistance effect sensor (MR sensor), a giant magnetoresistance effect sensor (GMR sensor), a tunneling magnetoresistance effect sensor (TMR sensor), or a fluxgate sensor. 
     The position sensors  7 - 440  are connected to the circuit board  7 - 430  through its pins. The user can fill insulation glue between the position sensors  7 - 440  and the circuit board  7 - 430  at the position without pins, so as to securely affix the position sensors  7 - 440 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  82   , the elastic member  7 - 500  is connected to the fixed portion  7 - 100  and the movable portion  7 - 200  to suspend the movable portion  7 - 200  in the accommodating space  7 - 130 . The damping members  7 - 700  are disposed on the side of the movable portion  7 - 200  adjacent to the base  7 - 110 , and situated at the corners of the movable portion  7 - 200 . The damping members  7 - 700  can be connected to the fixed portion  7 - 100  and the movable portion  7 - 200 , or disposed on the elastic member  7 - 500 , so as to suppress the vibration during the rotation of the movable portion  7 - 200 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  72  and  83   , the magnetic permeability member  7 - 600  is embedded in the movable portion  7 - 200 , and has at least one connecting portion  7 - 610  and at least one curved portion  7 - 620 . The connecting portion  7 - 610  is adjacent to the second electromagnetic driving member  7 - 420 B, and the curved portion  7 - 620  is adjacent to the inner surface of the lateral wall  7 - 220  of the movable portion  7 - 200 . In other words, the distance between the curved portion  7 - 620  and the inner surface of the lateral wall  7 - 220  of the movable portion  7 - 200  is less than the distance between the connecting portion  7 - 610  and the inner surface of the lateral wall  7 - 220  of the movable portion  7 - 200 . 
     The portion of the magnetic permeability member  7 - 600  adjacent to the second electromagnetic driving members  7 - 420 A and  7 - 420 B (such as the connecting portion  7 - 610 ) can enhance the magnetic pushing force of the driving assembly  7 - 400 . The curved portion  7 - 620  is exposed from the grooves  7 - 221  of the movable portion  7 - 200 . Therefore, when the user infuse adhesive glue into the grooves  7 - 221  to attach the optical member  7 - 30 , the adhesive force of adhesive glue is increased, and the optical member  7 - 30  can be affixed more securely. 
     Furthermore, a dark member  7 - 800  is disposed on the base  7 - 110  of the fixed portion  7 - 100 . The dark member  7 - 800  is extended along the outgoing direction of the light, so as to reduce the stray light. In this embodiment, the dark member  7 - 800  extends to the position between the optical member  7 - 30  and the base  7 - 100 . 
     In summary, an optical member driving mechanism is provided, including a movable portion, a fixed portion, and a driving assembly. The movable portion is connected to an optical member. The fixed portion has an accommodating space, and the optical member is received in the accommodating space. The movable portion is movable relative to the fixed portion. The driving assembly is configured to drive the movable portion to move relative to the fixed portion. 
     Eighth Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIGS.  84  and  85   , in an embodiment of the invention, an optical member driving mechanism  8 - 10  can be disposed in an electronic device  8 - 20 . The optical member driving mechanism  8 - 10  is configured to hold an optical member  8 - 30  and drive the optical member  8 - 30  to move relative to an image sensor module  8 -S in the electronic device  8 - 20 , so as to achieve the purpose of focus adjustment. For example, the electronic device  8 - 20  can be a digital camera or a smart phone having the function of capturing photographs or making video recordings, and the optical member  8 - 30  can be a prism or a mirror. When capturing photographs or making video recordings, light  8 -L enters the optical member driving mechanism  8 - 10  along an incident direction  8 -D 1 , and moves along an outgoing direction  8 -D 2  to reach the image sensor module  8 -S after reflected by the optical member  8 - 30 . 
     It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the light  8 -L enters the optical member  8 - 30  from a first surface  8 - 31  of the optical member  8 - 30 , and leaves the optical member  8 - 30  from a second surface  8 - 32 . In some embodiments, the disposing orientation of the optical member driving mechanism  8 - 10  can be adjusted, the light  8 -L can enter the optical member  8 - 30  from the second surface  8 - 32  of the optical member  8 - 30  and leave the optical member  8 - 30  from the first surface  8 - 31 . In other words, in some embodiments, the incident direction  8 -D 1  and the outgoing direction  8 -D 2  can be exchanged. 
       FIG.  86    is a schematic diagram of the optical member driving mechanism  8 - 10 , and  FIG.  87    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism  8 - 10 . As shown in  FIGS.  86  and  87   , the optical member driving mechanism  8 - 10  primarily includes a fixed portion  8 - 100 , a first movable portion  8 - 200 , a second movable portion  8 - 300 , and a driving assembly  8 - 400 . 
     The fixed portion  8 - 100  includes a base  8 - 110 , a frame  8 - 120 , and a case  8 - 130 . The base  8 - 110  and the frame  8 - 120  are fixedly assembled to each other, and the case  8 - 130  covers the base  8 - 110 , the frame  8 - 120 , the first movable portion  8 - 200 , the second movable portion  8 - 300 , and the driving assembly  8 - 400 , so as to protect the aforementioned members from an impact with the external components. 
     As shown in  FIGS.  87 - 89   , the frame  8 - 120  includes a main body  8 - 121  and two first engaged portions  8 - 122 . The main body  8 - 121  has a C-shaped structure, including a first section  8 - 121 A, a second section  8 - 121 B, and a third section  8 - 121 C. The second section  8 - 121 B connects the first section  8 - 121 A to the third section  8 - 121 C. The longitudinal axis of the second section  8 - 121 B is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the first section  8 - 121 A and the longitudinal axis of the third section  8 - 121 C. 
     Two first engaged portions  8 - 122  are disposed on the surface of the main body  8 - 121  facing the base  8 - 110 , and arranged along a first axis  8 -AX 1 . Since the first axis  8 -AX 1  is inclined relative to the longitudinal axis of the first section  8 - 121 A and the longitudinal axis of the second section  8 - 121 B, one of the first engaged portions  8 - 122  is adjacent to the connecting portion between the second section  8 - 121 B and the third section  8 - 121 C, and the other one of the first engaged portions  8 - 122  is adjacent to an end of the first section  8 - 121 A which is not connected to the second section  8 - 121 B. 
     Furthermore, the frame  8 - 120  has at least one contacting portion  8 - 123  extending toward the base  8 - 110 . In the outgoing direction  8 -D 2 , the thickness of the contacting portion  8 - 123  is greater than the thickness of the first engaged portion  8 - 122 . Therefore, when the base  8 - 110  is joined to the frame  8 - 120 , the contacting portion  8 - 123  contacts the base  8 - 110 , and a gap is formed between the first engaged portion  8 - 122  and the base  8 - 110 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  90   , in this embodiment, the first movable portion  8 - 200  also has a C-shaped structure, and includes two first supporting portions  8 - 210 , two second supporting portions  8 - 220 , and a plurality of connecting portions  8 - 230 . Two first supporting portions  8 - 210  are arranged along the first axis  8 -AX 1 , two second supporting portions  8 - 220  are arranged along a second axis  8 -AX 2 , and the connecting portions  8 - 230  are connected to the first supporting portions  8 - 210  and the second supporting portions  8 - 220 . An acute angle  8 -α can be formed between the first axis  8 -AX 1  and the second axis  8 -AX 2  (for example, the acute angle  8 -α can be 45-90 degrees (such as 60 degrees)). Therefore, one of the first supporting portions  8 - 210  and one of the second supporting portions  8 - 220  are respectively disposed on the two ends of the C-shaped structure. In this embodiment, the intersection point of the first axis  8 -AX 1  and the second axis  8 -AX 2  is adjacent to the center  8 - 33  of the optical member  8 - 30  as seen from the incident direction  8 -D 1 . 
     As shown in  FIGS.  89  and  91   , the first supporting portion  8 - 210  has a ball structure. Each of the first engaging portions  8 - 122  has two plates  8 - 124 , and each of the plates  8 - 124  has a through hole  8 - 125 . The distance between two plates  8 - 124  is less than the diameter of the first supporting portion  8 - 210 , and the diameter of the through hole  8 - 125  is less than the diameter of the first supporting portion  8 - 210 . When the first movable portion  8 - 200  is connected to the fixed portion  8 - 100 , the first supporting portion  8 - 210  is disposed in the first engaging portion  8 - 122 , and the first supporting portion  8 - 210  is clamped by two plates  8 - 124  and enters the through holes  8 - 125 . Therefore, the first movable portion  8 - 200  can be pivotally connected to the fixed portion  8 - 100  through the first supporting portion  8 - 210  and the first engaging portion  8 - 122 . The first movable portion  8 - 200  can rotate around the first axis  8 -AX 1  relative to the fixed portion  8 - 100 . 
     In this embodiment, the first movable portion  8 - 200  is made of metal, and the portion of the through hole  8 - 125  contacting the first supporting portion  8 - 210  has a chamfer or a fillet, so as to reduce the debris caused by the friction between the first supporting portion  8 - 210  and the first engaging portion  8 - 122  during the rotation of the first supporting portion  8 - 210 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  92  and  93   , the second movable portion  8 - 300  can be an optical member holder, and the optical member  8 - 30  can be disposed on the second movable portion  8 - 300 . The second movable portion  8 - 300  has two second engaging portions  8 - 310  arranged along the second axis  8 -AX 2 . Each of the second engaging portions  8 - 310  has two plates  8 - 311 , and each of the plates  8 - 311  has a through hole  8 - 312 . The distance between two plates  8 - 311  is less than the diameter of the second supporting portion  8 - 220 , and the diameter of the through hole  8 - 312  is less than the diameter of the second supporting portion  8 - 220 . When the second movable portion  8 - 300  is connected to the first movable portion  8 - 200 , the second supporting portion  8 - 220  is disposed in the second engaging portion  8 - 310 , and the second supporting portion  8 - 220  is clamped by two plates  8 - 311  and enters the through holes  8 - 312 . Therefore, the second movable portion  8 - 300  can be pivotally connected to the first movable portion  8 - 200  through the second supporting portion  8 - 220  and the second engaging portion  8 - 310 . The second movable portion  8 - 300  can rotate around the second axis  8 -AX 2  relative to the first movable portion  8 - 200 . 
     In this embodiment, the first movable portion  8 - 200  is made of metal, and the portion of the through hole  8 - 312  contacting the second supporting portion  8 - 220  has a chamfer or a fillet, so as to reduce the debris caused by the friction between the second supporting portion  8 - 220  and the second engaging portion  8 - 310  during the rotation of the second supporting portion  8 - 220 . 
     It should be noted that, since the first movable portion  8 - 200  can rotate around the first axis  8 -AX 1  relative to the fixed portion  8 - 100 , when the first movable portion  8 - 200  rotates, the second axis  8 -AX 2  rotates around the first axis  8 -AX 1  simultaneously. Thus, the second axis  8 -AX 2  can rotate to the position where is not perpendicular or parallel to the outgoing direction  8 -D 2 . 
     Furthermore, the outer surface and the bottom surface of the second movable portion  8 - 300  respectively include a plurality of depressions  8 - 330  and a recess  8 - 340 . When the first movable portion  8 - 200  is joined to the second movable portion  8 - 300 , at least a portion of the first movable portion  8 - 200  (such as one of the connecting portion s  8 - 230 ) is accommodated in the recess  8 - 340 . 
     Referring to  FIG.  87   , the driving assembly  8 - 400  includes at least one first electromagnetic driving member  8 - 410 , at least one second electromagnetic driving member  8 - 420 , a circuit board  8 - 430 , and at least one position sensor  8 - 440 . 
     The circuit board  8 - 430  is affixed to the fixed portion  8 - 100  and clamped between the base  8 - 110  and the case  8 - 130 . The first electromagnetic driving member  8 - 410  is disposed on the circuit board  8 - 430  and passes through the openings  8 - 111  of the base  8 - 110 . The second electromagnetic driving member  8 - 420  is dispose on the second movable portion and accommodated in the depressions  8 - 330 . The first electromagnetic driving member  8 - 410  corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving member  8 - 420 . 
     In this embodiment, the first electromagnetic driving member  8 - 410  is a coil, and the second electromagnetic driving member  8 - 420  is a magnet. When a current flows through the first electromagnetic driving member  8 - 410 , an electromagnetic effect is generated between the first electromagnetic driving member  8 - 410  and the second electromagnetic driving member  8 - 420 , and a driving force can be applied on the second movable portion  8 - 300 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  87   , since the driving mechanism  8 - 400  includes a plurality of first electromagnetic driving members  8 - 410  and a plurality of second electromagnetic driving members  8 - 420 , and the first electromagnetic driving members  8 - 410  and the second electromagnetic driving members  8 - 420  are disposed at the left side, the right side, and the back side of the second movable portion  8 - 300 , the driving forces in different direction can be applied on the second movable portion  8 - 300 . Moreover, since the first movable portion  8 - 200  can rotate around the first axis  8 -AX 1  relative to the fixed portion  8 - 100 , and the second movable portion  8 - 300  can around the second axis  8 -AX 2  relative to the first movable portion  8 - 200 , the driving assembly  8 - 400  can drive the second movable portion  8 - 300  and the optical member  8 - 30  disposed thereon to rotate around a rotation axis  8 -R 1  and/or a rotation axis  8 -R 2  by providing suitable driving forces. The rotation axes  8 -R 1  and  8 -R 2  are parallel or perpendicular to the outgoing direction  8 -D 2  of the light  8 -L, so as that the light emitting to the object can horizontally shift. 
     The position sensor  8 - 440  is disposed on the circuit board  8 - 430  and corresponds to the second electromagnetic driving member  8 - 420 . The position sensor  8 - 440  is configured to detect the position of the second electromagnetic driving member  8 - 420 , so as to obtain the rotation angle of the second movable portion  8 - 300  relative to the fixed portion  8 - 100 . 
     For example, the position sensors  8 - 440  can be a Hall sensor, a magnetoresistance effect sensor (MR sensor), a giant magnetoresistance effect sensor (GMR sensor), a tunneling magnetoresistance effect sensor (TMR sensor), or a fluxgate sensor. 
     In summary, an optical member driving mechanism is provided. The optical member driving mechanism is configured to hold an optical member and drive the optical member to move. The optical member driving mechanism includes a first movable portion, a fixed portion, and a driving assembly. The first movable portion is movable relative to the fixed portion. The driving assembly is configured to drive the first movable portion to move relative to the fixed portion. 
     Ninth Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIGS.  94  and  95   , in an embodiment of the invention, an optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10  can be disposed in an electronic device  9 - 20 . The optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10  is configured to hold an optical member  9 - 30  and drive the optical member  9 - 30  to move relative to an image sensor module  9 -S in the electronic device  9 - 20 , so as to achieve the purpose of focus adjustment. For example, the electronic device  9 - 20  can be a digital camera or a smart phone having the function of capturing photographs or making video recordings, and the optical member  9 - 30  can be a prism or a mirror. When capturing photographs or making video recordings, a light  9 -L enters the optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10  along an incident direction  9 -D 1 , and moves along an outgoing direction  9 -D 2  to reach the image sensor module  9 -S after reflected by the optical member  9 - 30 . 
       FIG.  96    is a schematic diagram of the optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10 ,  FIG.  97    is an exploded-view diagram of the optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10 , and  FIG.  98    is a cross-sectional view along the line  9 -A- 9 -A. As shown in  FIGS.  96 - 98   , the optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10  primarily includes a fixed portion  9 - 100 , a first movable portion  9 - 200 , a first driving assembly  9 - 300 , at least one elastic member  9 - 400 , a second movable portion  9 - 500 , a second driving assembly  9 - 600 , and at least one magnetic permeability member  9 - 700 . 
     The fixed portion  9 - 100  includes a base  9 - 110 , a housing  9 - 120 , and a circuit board  9 - 130 , wherein the base  9 - 110  and the housing  9 - 120  can be assembled using snap-fit joints or adhesive member. The base  9 - 110  has a bottom  9 - 111  and a back  9 - 112 , and the back  9 - 112  is substantially perpendicular to the bottom  9 - 111 . The circuit board  9 - 130  is disposed on the bottom  9 - 111 , and the housing  9 - 120  and the circuit board  9 - 130  are disposed on the opposite sides of the bottom  9 - 111 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  99   , in this embodiment, at least one through hole  9 - 113  and at least one first guiding member  9 - 114  are formed on the bottom  9 - 111  of the base  9 - 110 . The circuit board - 130  is exposed from the through hole. The first guiding member  9 - 114  protrudes from a surface  9 - 111   a  of the bottom  9 - 111  facing the first movable portion  9 - 200 . For example, the first guiding member  9 - 114  is a pillar, and the portion of the pillar protruding from the bottom  9 - 111  has a ball structure. 
     Furthermore, in this embodiment, at least one receiving recess  9 - 115  surrounding the pillar is formed on the surface  9 - 111   a , and a plurality of wires  9 - 800  are embedded in the back  9 - 112  of the base  9 - 110 . These wires  9 - 800  can be extended to electrically connect to the circuit board  9 - 130 . 
     The first movable portion  9 - 200  is a metal frame, and can be divided into a bottom  9 - 210  and a back  9 - 220 . As shown in  FIGS.  98  and  100   , a second guiding member  9 - 211  and at least one accommodating recess  9 - 212  can be formed on a surface of the bottom  9 - 210  facing the base  9 - 110 . In this embodiment, the second guiding member  9 - 211  is a guiding slot having an arc structure. When the first movable portion  9 - 200  is joined to the base  9 - 110 , the first guiding member  9 - 114  (the pillar) is movably accommodated in the second guiding member  9 - 211  (the guiding slot), so as to restrict the direction and range of motion of the first movable portion  9 - 200 . The position of the accommodating recess  9 - 212  corresponds to the position of the through hole  9 - 113  of the base  9 - 110 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  96 - 98   , the first driving assembly  9 - 300  includes at least one magnet  9 - 310 , at least one coil  9 - 320 , a position sensor  9 - 330 , and a controller  9 - 340 . The magnet  9 - 310  is affixed to the first movable portion  9 - 200  and accommodated in the accommodating recess  9 - 212 . The coil  9 - 320 , the position sensor  9 - 330  and the controller  9 - 340  are disposed on the circuit board  9 - 130  and accommodated in the through hole  9 - 113 . Since the position of the accommodating recess  9 - 212  corresponds to the position of the through hole  9 - 113  of the base  9 - 110 , the position of the magnet  9 - 310  corresponds to the position of the coil  9 - 320 . When a current flows through the coil  9 - 320 , an electromagnetic effect is generated between the magnet  9 - 310  and the coil  9 - 320 , and the first movable portion  9 - 200  is driven to move relative to the fixed portion  9 - 100 . 
     Since the pillar of the fixed portion  9 - 100  is movably disposed in the guiding slot of the first movable portion  9 - 200 , when the first driving assembly  9 - 300  drives the first movable portion  9 - 200  to move relative to the fixed portion  9 - 100 , the pillar slides along the guiding slot, and the first movable portion  9 - 200  rotates around a first rotation axis  9 -AX 1  (the Z-axis) relative to the fixed portion  9 - 100 . In this embodiment, the first rotation axis  9 -AX 1  passes through the center of the guiding slot. 
     Since the first movable portion  9 - 200  and the base  9 - 110  are made of metal, and the first guiding member  9 - 114  has a ball structure, the debris caused by the friction between the first guiding member  9 - 114  and the second guiding member  9 - 211  can be reduced. In this embodiment, a lubricant can be coated on the first guiding member  9 - 114 , so that the first movable portion can move more smoothly. Since the receiving recess  9 - 115  is formed around the first guiding member  9 - 114 , the redundant lubricant can flow into the receiving recess  9 - 115  and will not cause a short circuit. 
     Furthermore, the magnetic permeability member  9 - 700  is disposed on the circuit board  9 - 130  and corresponded to the magnet  9 - 310  of the fixed portion  9 - 100 . Therefore, the first movable portion  9 - 200  can tightly abut against the base  9 - 110  according to the magnetic attraction force between the magnetic permeability member  9 - 700  and the magnet  9 - 310 . The separation between the first movable portion  9 - 200  and the base  9 - 110  can be avoided. 
     The position sensor  9 - 330  is electrically connected to the controller  9 - 340 , and the controller  9 - 340  is electrically connected to the coil  9 - 320 . The position sensor  9 - 330  is configured to detect the position of the magnet  9 - 310 , so as to obtain the rotation angle of the first movable portion  9 - 200  relative to the base  9 - 110 . The controller  9 - 340  can determine the strength of the current providing to the coil  9 - 320  according to the detection result of the position sensor  9 - 330 . 
     For example, the position sensor  9 - 330  can be a Hall sensor, a magnetoresistance effect sensor (MR sensor), a giant magnetoresistance effect sensor (GMR sensor), a tunneling magnetoresistance effect sensor (TMR sensor), or a fluxgate sensor, and the controller  9 - 340  can be a driver IC. 
     The second movable portion  9 - 500  can be an optical member holder, and it can be suspended on the first movable portion  9 - 200  via the elastic member  9 - 400 . As shown in  FIG.  101   , the first movable portion  9 - 200  has an upper surface  9 - 230 , and the second movable portion  9 - 500  has a lower surface  9 - 510 . The upper surface  9 - 230  faces the top wall  9 - 121  of the housing  9 - 120 , and the lower surface  9 - 510  faces the base  9 - 110 . The elastic member  9 - 400  connects the upper surface  9 - 230  to the lower surface  9 - 510 . Thus, the reverse of the second movable portion  9 - 500  caused by an external force impacting the optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10  can be avoided. 
     As shown in  FIG.  98   , in this embodiment, the distance between the first movable portion  9 - 200  and the top wall  9 - 121  of the housing  9 - 120  is less than the second movable portion  9 - 500  and the top wall  9 - 121  of the housing  9 - 120 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  95 - 99   , the second driving assembly  9 - 600  includes at least one magnet  9 - 610 , at least one coil  9 - 620 , a position sensor  9 - 630 , and a controller  9 - 640 . The magnet  9 - 610  is affixed to the second movable portion  9 - 500 . The coil  9 - 620 , the position sensor  9 - 630  and the controller  9 - 640  are affixed to the back  9 - 112  of the base  9 - 110 . The coil  9 - 620 , the position sensor  9 - 630  and the controller  9 - 640  are electrically connected to each other, and correspond to the magnet  9 - 640  through an opening  9 - 220  of the first movable portion  9 - 200 . 
     When a current flows through the coil  9 - 620 , an electromagnetic effect is generated between the magnet  9 - 610  and the coil  9 - 620 , and the second movable portion  9 - 500  is driven to rotate around a second rotation axis  9 -AX 2  (the Y-axis) relative to the fixed movable portion  9 - 200 . 
     The optical member  9 - 30  is disposed on the second movable portion  9 - 500 . For example, a plurality of slots  9 - 520  are formed on the inner surface of the second movable portion  9 - 500 , when the optical member  9 - 30  is disposed on the second movable portion  9 - 500 , the user can pour an adhesive glue into the slots  9 - 520 , so as to affix the optical member  9 - 30  to the second movable portion  9 - 500  at its lateral surfaces. Furthermore, a shield member  9 -P (such as a tape or an ink) is disposed on the edge of the optical member  9 - 30 , so as to reduce the stray light. 
     Since the optical member  9 - 30  is disposed on the second movable portion  9 - 500 , when the second driving assembly  9 - 600  drives the second movable portion  9 - 500  to rotate, the optical member  9 - 30  is driven simultaneously and rotates around the second rotation axis  9 -AX 2  relative to the first movable portion  9 - 200 . Moreover, since the second movable portion  9 - 500  is connected to the first movable portion  9 - 200  via the elastic member  9 - 400 , when the first driving assembly  9 - 300  drives the first movable portion  9 - 200  to rotate, the second movable portion  9 - 500  and the optical member  9 - 30  is driven to rotate around the first rotation axis  9 -AX 1  relative to the fixed portion  9 - 100  simultaneously. 
     In this embodiment, the center of the arc structure of the second guiding member  9 - 211  is aligned with the center  9 - 31  of the optical member  9 - 30  as seen from the incident direction  9 -D 1 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  102 - 105   , in another embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10 ′ includes a fixed portion  9 - 100 ′, a first fixed portion  9 - 200 ′, a first driving assembly  9 - 300 , at least one elastic member  9 - 400 , a second movable portion  9 - 500 , and a second driving assembly  9 - 600 . The structures and the connecting relationships of the first driving assembly  9 - 300 , the elastic member  9 - 400 , the second movable portion  9 - 500 , and the second driving assembly  9 - 600  in this embodiment are the same as that in the aforementioned embodiment, so that the features thereof are not repeated in the interest of brevity. 
     The fixed portion  9 - 100 ′ includes a base  9 - 110 ′ and a housing  9 - 120 ′. The base  9 - 110 ′ has a bottom  9 - 111 ′ and a back  9 - 112 ′, and the back  9 - 112 ′ is substantially perpendicular to the bottom  9 - 111 ′. The difference between this embodiment and the aforementioned embodiment is in that the wires  9 - 800 ′ are not only embedded in the back  9 - 112 ′, but also embedded in the bottom  9 - 111 ′. The first guiding member  9 - 114 ′ on the bottom  9 - 111 ′ is a guiding slot having an arc structure. The center of the arc structure is aligned with the center  9 - 31  of the optical member  9 - 30  as seen from the incident direction  9 -D 1 . 
     The wires  9 - 800 ′ are magnetic, and at least a portion of the wires  9 - 800 ′ embedded in the base  9 - 111 ′ corresponds to the magnet  9 - 310  of the first driving assembly  9 - 300 . Therefore, the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ can tightly abut against the base  9 - 110 ′ according to the magnetic attraction force between the wires  9 - 800 ′ and the magnet  9 - 310 . The separation between the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ and the base  9 - 110 ′ can be avoided. 
     The first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ is a metal frame, and can be divided into a bottom  9 - 210 ′ and a back  9 - 220 ′. The second guiding member  9 - 211 ′ disposed on the bottom  9 - 210 ′ is a ball, and at least one depression  9 - 240 ′ can be formed on the bottom  9 - 210 ′ to accommodate the ball. When the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ and the base  9 - 110 ′ are joined, the ball is movably accommodated in the guiding slot. Therefore, when the first driving assembly  9 - 300  drives the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ to move relative to the fixed portion  9 - 100 ′ the ball rolls along the guiding slot, and the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ rotates around the first rotation axis  9 -AX 1  (the Z-axis) relative to the fixed portion  9 - 100 ′. 
     It should be noted that, as shown in  FIG.  104   , in this embodiment, in the incident direction  9 -D 1 , the shortest distance between the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ and the top wall  9 - 121 ′ of the housing  9 - 120 ′ is a first distance  9 -T 1 , the shortest distance between the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ and the base  9 - 110 ′ is a second distance  9 -T 2 , and the second guiding member  9 - 211 ′ has a thickness  9 -K. The thickness  9 -K is greater than the sum of the first distance  9 -T 1  and the second distance  9 -T 2 , so as to prevent the ball (the second guiding member  9 - 211 ′) separating from the guiding slot (the first guiding member  9 - 114 ′), which may be happened when an external force impacts the optical member driving mechanism  9 - 10 ′ and a greater gap is formed between the first movable portion  9 - 200 ′ and the base  9 - 110 ′. Furthermore, in the incident direction  9 -D 1 , the shortest distance between the second movable portion  9 - 200 ′ and the top wall  9 - 121 ′ is a third distance  9 -T 3 , and the first distance  9 -T 1  is less than the third distance  9 -T 3 . 
     In summary, an optical member driving mechanism is provided, including a first movable portion, a fixed portion, and a first driving assembly. The first movable portion is connected to an optical member. The first movable portion is movable relative to the fixed portion. The first driving assembly is configured to drive the first movable portion to move relative to the fixed portion. 
     Tenth Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  106    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  may be, for example, disposed in the electronic devices with camera function for driving an optical member  10 - 1690 , and can perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     As shown in  FIG.  106   , the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  has a central axis  10 -C that is substantially parallel to the Z axis. The optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  has an incident optical axis  10 -O 1  and an output optical axis  10 -O 2 . After the light enters the optical member  10 - 1690  along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , the direction of the light may be changed and the light may travel in the output optical axis  10 -O 2 . In the present embodiment, the incident optical axis  10 -O 1  is substantially parallel to the central axis  10 -C (the Z axis), and the output optical axis  10 -O 2  is substantially parallel to the X axis. The optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  includes a housing  10 - 1610  which has a top surface  10 - 1611  and a first side surface  10 - 1612 . The top surface  10 - 1611  extends in a direction that is parallel to the output optical axis  10 -O 2  (i.e. the X-Y plane). The first side surface  10 - 1612  extends from an edge of the top surface  10 - 1611  along a direction (the Z axis) that is parallel to the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 . In some embodiments, the first side surface  10 - 1612  extends from the edge of the top surface  10 - 1611  along a direction that is not parallel to the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 . 
     The optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  further includes a lens driving assembly  10 - 1700  that is disposed in the housing  10 - 1610  of the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601 . The lens driving assembly  10 - 1700  may carry a lens  10 - 1710  that corresponds to the optical member  10 - 1690 . The lens  10 - 1710  may perform an optical treatment to the light entering the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601 , wherein the light passes through the lens  10 - 1710  of the lens driving assembly  10 - 1700  in the output optical axis  10 -O 2  that is substantially parallel to the X axis. In some embodiments, the light passing the optical member  10 - 1690  may passes through the lens  10 - 1710  in the output optical axis  10 -O 2 . 
     In the present embodiment, the output optical axis  10 -O 2  is substantially perpendicular to the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , but it is not limited thereto. In some embodiments, the output optical axis  10 -O 2  is not parallel to the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 . In conclusion, the optical member  10 - 1690  may change the direction of the light, such that after the light enters the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , it may exit the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  along the output optical axis  10 -O 2 . After the light exits the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601 , it may travel to an image sensor (not shown) that is disposed out of the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601 , and thereby an image may be generated on the electronic device. 
       FIG.  107    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  shown in  FIG.  106   . In the present embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  has a substantial rectangular structure. As shown in  FIG.  107   , the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  mainly includes a fixed portion  10 -F, a movable portion  10 -M, an electromagnetic driving assembly  10 - 1640 , a plurality of elastic members  10 - 1660 , and a lens driving assembly  10 - 1700 . The fixed portion  10 -F includes a housing  10 - 1610 , a base  10 - 1620 , a frame  10 - 1650 , a circuit component  10 - 1670  and a bottom plate  10 - 1671 . 
     The housing  10 - 1610  is disposed on the base  10 - 1620 , and protect the elements (such as the movable portion  10 -M and the lens driving assembly  10 - 1700 ) disposed inside the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  (i.e. disposed in the housing  10 - 1610 ). In some embodiments, the housing  10 - 1610  is made of metal or another material with sufficient hardness to provide good protection. The frame  10 - 1650  is disposed on the base  10 - 1620  and affixed to the housing  10 - 1610 . The circuit component  10 - 1670  is disposed below the base  10 - 1620  for transmitting electric signals, performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. For example, the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  may control the position of the optical member  10 - 1690  based on the aforementioned electric signals so as to form an image. In the present embodiment, the bottom plate  10 - 1671  is disposed below the circuit component  10 - 1670 , protecting the circuit component  10 - 1670  and enhancing the structural strength of the circuit component  10 - 1670 . In other words, the base  10 - 1620  is disposed between the frame  10 - 1650  and the circuit component  10 - 1670 , and the circuit component  10 - 1670  is disposed between the base  10 - 1620  and the bottom plate  10 - 1671 . 
     The movable portion  10 -M is movable relative to the fixed portion  10 -F. The movable portion  10 -M mainly includes a carrier  10 - 1630  which carries the optical member  10 - 1690 . As shown in  FIG.  107   , the carrier  10 - 1630  is movably connected to the frame  10 - 1650  and the base  10 - 1620 . The elastic members  10 - 1660  are disposed on the carrier  10 - 1630 , and are connected to the base  1020  and the carrier  10 - 1630 . For example, the elastic members  10 - 1660  are made of metal or another suitable elastic material. 
     The electromagnetic driving assembly  10 - 1640  includes a magnetic member  10 - 1641  and a driving coil  10 - 1642 . The magnetic member  10 - 1641  is disposed below the carrier  10 - 1630 , and the corresponding driving coil  10 - 1642  is disposed on the circuit component  10 - 1670 . When current is applied to the driving coil  10 - 1642 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the driving coil  10 - 1642  and the magnetic member  10 - 1641  (i.e. the electromagnetic driving assembly  10 - 1640 ) to drive the carrier  10 - 1630  and the optical member  10 - 1690  to move along a horizontal direction (the X-Y plane) relative to the base  10 - 1620 , performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. In the present embodiment, when viewed along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , the carrier  10 - 1630  overlaps with the magnetic member  10 - 1641  and the driving coil  10 - 1642 . 
     In addition, the carrier  10 - 1630  may be movably suspended between the frame  10 - 1650  and the base  10 - 1620  by the electromagnetic driving force of the electromagnetic driving assembly  10 - 1640 , and the force exerted by the elastic members  10 - 1660 . Furthermore, a magnetic permeable plate  10 -P is disposed on the magnetic member  10 - 1641  for concentrating the magnetic field of the magnetic member  10 - 1641  so that the efficiency of the electromagnetic driving assembly  10 - 1640  may be improved. In some embodiments, the magnetic permeable plate  10 -P may be made of metal or another material with sufficient magnetic permeability. 
     In the present embodiment, a sensor  10 - 1680  is disposed on the circuit component  10 - 1670 , and may detect the change of the magnetic field of the magnetic member  10 - 1641 , and the position of the carrier  10 - 1630  (and the optical member  10 - 1690 ) may be determined. For example, when viewed along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1  (the Z axis), the sensor  10 - 1680  and the carrier  10 - 1630  overlap. In some embodiments, the sensor  10 - 1680  or the magnetic member  10 - 1641  is disposed on the fixed portion  10 -F, and the other of the sensor  10 - 1680  or the magnetic member  10 - 1641  is disposed on the movable portion  10 -M. 
       FIG.  108    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  10 -C- 10 -C′ shown in  FIG.  106   . As shown in  FIG.  108   , the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  has a second side surface  10 - 1613  that is opposite to the first side surface  10 - 1612 . Since the lens driving assembly  10 - 1700  is also disposed in the housing  10 - 1610 , the optical member  10 - 1690  is not located at the center of the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  (that is, the central axis  10 -C does not pass through the optical member  10 - 1690 ). In the present embodiment, the shortest distance between the optical member  10 - 1690  and the second side surface  10 - 1613  is shorter than the shortest distance between the optical member  10 - 1690  and the first side surface  10 - 1612 . That is, the optical member  10 - 1690  is closer to the second side surface  10 - 1613 . In contrary, the lens driving assembly  10 - 1700  and the lens  10 - 1710  are closer to the first side surface  10 - 1612 . 
       FIG.  109    is a perspective view illustrating the carrier  10 - 1630  and the elastic members  10 - 1660  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  109   , the carrier  10 - 1630  includes a body  10 - 1631  and a sidewall  10 - 1633  that extends from an edge (such as an edge  10 - 1632 ) of the body  10 - 1631 . In addition, the carrier  10 - 1630  further includes a first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and a second stopping portion  10 - 1635  that protrude towards the fixed portion  10 -F. The arrangement of the first stopping portion  10 - 1634 , the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  and the fixed portion  10 -F will be further discussed in accompany with  FIG.  110    as follows. In the present embodiment, the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  laterally protrude from the sidewall  10 - 1633  to the fixed portion  10 -F (i.e. in a horizontal direction). It should be appreciated that although in the present embodiment, the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  are illustrated as rectangular structures, but the present embodiment merely serves as an example. Those skilled in the art may design the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  to be other shapes as required. 
     When viewed in a direction (the Y axis) that is perpendicular to the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , the elastic members  10 - 1660  are disposed between the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635 . In the present embodiment, the elastic members  10 - 1660  are connected to the carrier  10 - 1636  via contacts  10 - 1636 . The contacts  10 - 1636  face the base  10 - 1620 , and therefore when the optical member  10 - 1690  is viewed along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , the contacts  10 - 1636  are not exposed from the carrier  10 - 1630 . In other words, when viewed downwards from the top surface  10 - 1611  of the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601 , the contacts  10 - 1636  are not shown. As a result, when viewed along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1  (the Z axis), the sidewall  10 - 1633  may partially overlap with the elastic members  10 - 1660 . In addition, when viewed along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  also overlap the elastic members  10 - 1660 . By means of the above design, the required space for arranging the elastic members  10 - 1660  may be effectively reduced. Therefore, a larger optical member  10 - 1690  may be disposed with increasing the volume of the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601 , and the optical performance of the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  is enhanced. 
     Furthermore, the carrier  10 - 1630  includes protruding columns  10 - 1637  that protrude towards the fixed portion  10 -F. The arrangement of the protruding columns  10 - 1637  and the fixed portion  10 -F will be further discussed in accompany with  FIG.  111    as follows. In the present embodiment, the direction in which the protruding columns  10 - 1637  extend is different from the direction in which the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  extend. For example, the direction in which the protruding columns  10 - 1637  extend (i.e., the X axis) is substantially perpendicular to the direction in which the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  extend (i.e., the Y axis). By means of the arrangement of the first stopping portion  10 - 1634 , the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  and the protruding columns  10 - 1637 , the movement of the carrier  10 - 1630  in the horizontal direction (which is the X-Y plane) may be limited. As a result, the body  10 - 1631  of the carrier  10 - 1630  may remain undamaged because the body  10 - 1631  moves adequately in such a way that the optical member  10 - 1690  being carried by the carrier  10 - 1630  is protected. It should be noted that although only one side of the carrier  10 - 1630  is illustrated, the other side of the carrier may have a structure that is the same or similar to that shown in  FIG.  109   . For example, the structure of the carrier  10 - 1630  may be symmetrical on both sides. 
       FIG.  110    is a perspective view illustrating the frame  10 - 1650 , the base  10 - 1620  and the circuit component  10 - 1670  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  110   , the frame  10 - 1650  and the base  10 - 1620  may be combined as a rectangular space to contain the movable portion  10 -M (including the carrier  10 - 1630  and the optical member  10 - 1690  carried thereon). In the present embodiment, the base  10 - 1620  has a first groove  10 - 1621 , and the frame  10 - 1650  has a second groove  10 - 1651 . The first groove  10 - 1621  is disposed to contain the first stopping portion  10 - 1634 , and the second groove  10 - 1651  is disposed to contain the second stopping portion  10 - 1635 . In other words, the first groove  10 - 1621  is disposed corresponding to the shape of the first stopping portion  10 - 1634 , and the second groove  10 - 1651  is disposed corresponding to the shape of the second stopping portion  10 - 1635 . As a result, the first groove  10 - 1621  and the second groove  10 - 1651  may limit the movement of the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635 . Therefore, the carrier  10 - 1630  may remain at an adequate position, and the optical member driving mechanism  10 - 1601  may keep operating normally. In addition, since when viewed along the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 , the first stopping portion  10 - 1634  and the second stopping portion  10 - 1635  may overlap with the elastic members  10 - 1660 , when viewed in the same direction (the incident optical axis  10 -O 1 ) as above, the first groove  10 - 1621  and the second groove  10 - 1651  may overlap with the elastic members  10 - 1660  (as shown in  FIG.  109   ). 
     Moreover, the base  10 - 1620  has a base opening  10 - 1622  to expose the driving coil  10 - 1642  and the sensor  10 - 1680 . In this way, the driving coil  10 - 1642  and the magnetic member  10 - 1641  (as shown in  FIG.  107   ) may generate an electromagnetic force, and the sensor  10 - 1680  may detect the change of the magnetic field of the magnetic member  10 - 1641 . It should be noted that in the present embodiment the top surface of the driving coil  10 - 1642  is slightly higher than the top surface of the sensor  10 - 1680 . By means of the above design, the driving coil  10 - 1642  may protect the sensor  10 - 1680 , preventing the movable portion  10 -M colliding with the sensor  10 - 1680 , and thereby the sensor  10 - 1680  may remain undamaged. In addition, the base  10 - 1620  has a recess  10 - 1623  that is formed to contain the protruding columns  10 - 1637 . 
       FIG.  111    is an enlarged partial perspective view illustrating the carrier  10 - 1630  and the base  10 - 1620  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  111   , the recess  10 - 1623  may have a first surface  10 - 1624 , a second surface  10 - 1625  and a third surface  10 - 1626 . In the present embodiment, the first surface  10 - 1624  is a bottom surface of the recess  10 - 1623 , and substantially parallel to the X-Y plane. The second surface  10 - 1625  is a side surface of the recess  10 - 1623 , and substantially parallel to the Y-Z plane. The third surface  10 - 1626  is another side surface of the recess  10 - 1623 , and substantially parallel to the Z-X plane. In other words, the first surface  10 - 1624 , the second surface  10 - 1625  and the third surface  10 - 1626  of the recess  10 - 1623  are perpendicular to each other. 
     In some embodiments, a damping material (not shown) may be filled between the recess  10 - 1623  and the protruding columns  10 - 1637 , such that the damping material contacts the protruding columns  10 - 1637  and at least one surface (i.e. at least one of the first surface  10 - 1624 , the second surface  10 - 1625  and the third surface  10 - 1626 ) of the recess  10 - 1623 . In some embodiments, the damping material may contact the protruding columns  10 - 1637  and all surfaces of the recess  10 - 1623 . Thanks to the arrangement of the damping material, the resonance effect that affecting the movable portion  10 -M may be reduced. Furthermore, arranging the protruding columns  10 - 1637  and the recess  10 - 1623  may increase the surface area of the damping material that contacts the carrier  10 - 1630  and the base  10 - 1620 . As a result, the arrangement of the damping material may be more stable, and the performance of the damping material may be enhanced. 
       FIG.  112    is a perspective view illustrating the carrier  10 - 1630  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the carrier  10 - 1630  has a plurality of adhesive grooves  10 - 1638  that are disposed to face the optical member  10 - 1690  (as shown in  FIG.  109   ). An adhesive (not shown) may be filled into the adhesive grooves  10 - 1638  to bond the carrier  10 - 1630  and the optical member  10 - 1690 . As shown in  FIG.  112   , the extending direction of the adhesive grooves  10 - 1638  is not parallel to the incident optical axis  10 -O 1  (the Z axis) and the output optical axis  10 -O 2  (the X axis). That is, an acute angle is formed between the extending direction of the adhesive grooves  10 - 1638  and the incident optical axis  10 -O 1  (the Z axis), the output optical axis  10 -O 2  (the X axis). By means of the above design, the difficulty for filling the adhesive into the adhesive grooves  10 - 1638  may be reduced, and it helps to evenly distribute the filled adhesive between the carrier  10 - 1630  and the optical member  10 - 1690 . 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical member driving mechanism including an elastic member that overlaps with the sidewall of the carrier. By means of the above design, the required space for arranging the elastic members may be effectively reduced. Therefore, a larger optical member may be disposed with increasing the volume of the optical member driving mechanism, and the optical performance of the optical member driving mechanism is enhanced. In addition, forming an acute angle between the extending direction of adhesive grooves of the carrier and the incident optical axis may reduce the difficulty for filling the adhesive into the adhesive grooves, and it helps to evenly distribute the filled adhesive between the carrier and the optical member. 
     Eleventh Group of Embodiments 
     Firstly, please refer to  FIG.  113   , an optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  of an embodiment of the present disclosure may be mounted in an electrical device  11 - 1  for taking photos or videos, wherein the aforementioned electrical device  11 - 1  may, for example, be a smartphone or a digital camera, but the present disclosure is not limited to these. It should be noted that the position and the size between the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  and the electrical device  11 - 1  shown in  FIG.  113    are only an example, which is not for limiting the position and the size between the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  and the electrical device  11 - 1 . In fact, according to different needs, the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  may be mounted at different positions in the electrical device  11 - 1 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  114   , the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  carries an optical element  11 - 110  with an optical axis  11 -O. A prism module  11 - 200  may be disposed outside of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100 . The prism module  11 - 200  is located at the upstream of the light entry of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100 . A light  11 -L incident to a prism  11 - 210  of the prism module  11 - 200 , and then reflected by the prism  11 - 210  to an optical path  11 -H, and passing through the optical element  11 - 110  for imaging. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  115   , the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  includes a movable part  11 - 10 , a fixed part  11 - 20 , a driving assembly  11 - 30 , a circuit assembly  11 - 40  and an adhesive element  11 - 50  (please refer to  FIG.  116   ). The adhesive element  11 - 50  may be the material of a soldering tin or a glue for fixing and securing. 
     As shown in  FIG.  115   , the movable part  11 - 10  is in contact with the optical element  11 - 110 . The movable part includes a holder  11 - 11 . Please refer to  FIG.  116   , the holder  11 - 11  of the movable part  11 - 10  has a hollow ring structure, and has a through hole  11 - 11   a  and a threaded structure  11 - 11   b  formed on the through hole  11 - 11   a , and the optical element  11 - 110  may be locked in the through hole  11 - 11   a  via the threaded structure  11 - 11   b.    
     Please refer to  FIG.  115    again, the fixed part  11 - 20  includes an outer frame  11 - 21  and a base  11 - 22 , and the fixed part  11 - 20  has a main axis  11 -M. The main axis  11 -M is not parallel to the optical axis  11 -O. In the present embodiment, the main axis  11 -M is perpendicular to the optical axis  11 -O. The outer frame  11 - 21  has four sidewalls  11 - 21   a  and a top surface  11 - 21   b . The sidewall  11 - 21   a  extends from an edge  11 - 21   b ′ of the top surface  11 - 21   b  along the main axis  11 -M. That is, the sidewall  11 - 21   a  is significantly parallel to the main axis  11 -M. The top surface  11 - 21   b  intersects with the main axis  11 -M, more specifically, the main axis  11 -M perpendicularly penetrates the top surface  11 - 21   b . The top surface  11 - 21   b  has a long side  11 - 21   b ″ and a short side  11 - 21   b ′″. The extending direction of the short side  11 - 21   b ′″ is parallel to the optical axis  11 -O, while the extending direction of the long side  11 - 21   b ″ is not parallel to the optical axis  11 -O. Please refer to  FIGS.  115  and  116    at the time, the base  11 - 22  includes a base plate  11 - 221 , four circuit board positioning structures  11 - 222 , a first opening  11 - 223 , a second opening  11 - 224  and a plurality of recess  11 - 225 . The base plate  11 - 221  intersects the main axis  11 -M, and securely connects to the outer frame  11 - 21 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  116   , the driving assembly  11 - 30  includes two driving magnetic elements  11 - 31  and a driving coil assembly  11 - 32 . The driving assembly  11 - 30  may drive the movable part  11 - 10  to move relative to the fixed part  11 - 20 , and the driving assembly  11 - 30  is electrically connected to the circuit assembly  11 - 40 . The driving coil assembly  11 - 32  has two circuit boards  11 - 321  and four driving coils  11 - 322 . The circuit board  11 - 321  includes a first circuit board surface  11 - 321   a , a second circuit board surface  11 - 321   b , two coil positioning structures  11 - 321   c  and a connecting circuit  11 - 321   d.    
     Please refer to  FIG.  115   , the circuit assembly  11 - 40  is disposed in the base  11 - 22  of the fixed part  11 - 20 . The circuit assembly  11 - 40  includes a plurality of circuits  11 - 41 . The circuit  11 - 41  has a first circuit surface  11 - 411  and a second circuit surface  11 - 412 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  117   , the circuit board  11 - 321  is disposed on the base plate  11 - 221 , and the driving magnetic element  11 - 31  is disposed above the circuit board  11 - 321 . Four driving coils  11 - 322  are disposed in the circuit boards  11 - 321  respectively, and the driving coils  11 - 322  are corresponding to the driving magnetic elements  11 - 31 . It should be noted that the driving coils is not limited to be four. In some embodiments, there may by one, two, three or more driving coils  11 - 322 . The driving coil  11 - 322  may generate an electromagnetic driving force to drive the holder  11 - 11  of the movable part  11 - 10  to move along the optical axis  11 -O relative to the fixed part  11 - 20  when a current is applied to the driving coil  11 - 322 . The first circuit board surface  11 - 321   a  of the circuit board  11 - 321  faces the circuit  11 - 41  of the circuit assembly  11 - 40 , and the second circuit board surface  11 - 321   b  faces opposite the first circuit board surface  11 - 321   a  (please also refer to  FIG.  121   ). 
     As shown in  FIG.  117   , two coil positioning structures  11 - 321   c  of each circuit boards  11 - 321  have a recess or an opening structure, and the coil positioning structures  11 - 321   c  are located at the opposite sides of the circuit boards  11 - 321   c . The circuit board positioning structure  11 - 222  of the base  11 - 22  of the fixed part  11 - 20  corresponds to the coil positioning structure  11 - 321   c , and the circuit board positioning structure  11 - 222  is located in the recess of the coil positioning structure  11 - 321   c  to prevent the circuit board  11 - 321  and the driving coil  11 - 322  in the circuit board  11 - 321  from moving relative to the base  11 - 22  during impact. It should be noted that the circuit board  11 - 321  is not limited to be two, and the coil positioning structure  11 - 321   c  and the circuit board positioning structure  11 - 222  are not limited to be four. In some embodiments, there may be one, three, or more circuit boards  11 - 321 , and there may be one, two, three, five, or more coil positioning structures  11 - 321   c  and the circuit board positioning structures  11 - 222 . Moreover, the positions of the coil positioning structures  11 - 321   c  are not limited to the opposite sides of the circuit board  11 - 321 . In some embodiments, the coil positioning structures  11 - 321   c  may be located at any one side, any two sides, any three sides, or any four sides of the circuit board  11 - 321   c.    
     Please refer to  FIG.  118   , the driving coil  11 - 322  is arranged along the optical axis  11 -O, that is, the direction along which the driving coil  11 - 322  is arranged is parallel to the extending direction of the short side  11 - 21   b ′″ (please refer to  FIG.  115   , the sort side  11 - 21   b ′″ is parallel to the optical axis  11 -O). The circuit board  11 - 321  further includes a connecting circuit  11 - 321   d . The driving coil  11 - 322  does not overlap the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d  when observed in the direction perpendicular to the main axis  11 -M. In the present embodiment, the driving coil  11 - 322  does not overlap the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d  when observed along the optical axis  11 -O (in the present embodiment, the optical axis  11 -O is perpendicular to the main axis  11 -M). In addition, along the main axis  11 -M, a greatest size  11 -S 2  of the driving coil  11 - 322  is different from a greatest size  11 -S 1  of the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d . Specifically, along the main axis  11 -M, the greatest size  11 -S 1  of the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d  is smaller than the greatest size  11 -S 2  of the driving coil  11 - 322 , so that the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d  has a lower resistance. 
     Please refer to  FIGS.  119 A- 119 C , the first circuit surface  11 - 411  of the circuit  11 - 41  faces towards the circuit board  11 - 321 , and the second circuit surface  11 - 412  faces opposite the first circuit surface  11 - 411 . The circuit  11 - 41  may have a coil electrical connection part  11 - 413 . The circuit board  11 - 321  is electrically connected to the circuit  11 - 41  of the circuit assembly  11 - 40  via the coil electrical connection part  11 - 413 . The coil electrical connection part  11 - 413  is disposed between the first circuit board surface  11 - 321   a  of the circuit board  11 - 321  and the first circuit surface  11 - 411  of part of the circuit  11 - 41 . The coil electrical connection part  11 - 413  at least partially overlaps the first circuit board surface  11 - 321   a  and the first circuit surface  11 - 411  when observed along the main axis  11 -M. It should be noted that no coil electrical connection part  11 - 413  is provided on the second circuit board surface  11 - 321   b  of the circuit board  11 - 321  and the second circuit surface  11 - 412  of the circuit  11 - 41 . Moreover, the coil electrical connection part  11 - 413  at least partially overlaps the second circuit board surface  11 - 321   b  and the second circuit surface  11 - 412  when observed along the main axis  11 -M. 
     Please refer to  FIGS.  120 A and  120 B ,  FIG.  120 A  is a partial schematic view of the base  11 - 22 , the circuit assembly  11 - 40 , the circuit board  11 - 321  and the adhesive element  11 - 50 , and  FIG.  120 B  is a partial enlarged view of the base  11 - 22 , the circuit assembly  11 - 40  and the adhesive element  11 - 50 . As shown in  FIGS.  120 A and  120 B , the circuit  11 - 41  may further include a first embedded part  11 - 414 , a first exposed part  11 - 415 , a second embedded part  11 - 416 , and second exposed part  11 - 417  and a third exposed part  11 - 418 . The first embedded part  11 - 414  is embedded in the base  11 - 22  of the fixed part  11 - 20  and is not exposed. The first exposed part  11 - 415  is electrically connected to the first embedded part  11 - 414  and is exposed to the first opening  11 - 223  of the base  11 - 22 . The second embedded part  11 - 416  is embedded in the base  11 - 22  and is not exposed. The second exposed part  11 - 417  is electrically connected to the second embedded part  11 - 416  and is exposed to the first opening  11 - 223 . In addition, the first embedded part  11 - 414  and the first exposed part  11 - 415  are electrically independent from the second embedded part  11 - 416  and the second exposed part  11 - 417 . That is, the first opening  11 - 223  accommodates two circuits that are electrically independent from each other, rather than arranging the two circuits that are electrically independent from each other separately. In this way, processing and manufacturing of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  may be facilitated, and the effect of miniaturization may be achieved. 
     As shown in  FIG.  120 A , the third exposed part  11 - 418  is partially exposed to the second opening  11 - 224  of the base  11 - 22 , and the second opening  11 - 224  does not accommodate other circuits that are electrically independent from the third exposed part  11 - 418 . The functions of the second opening  11 - 224  are not totally the same as that of the first opening  11 - 223 . The second opening  11 - 224  may improve the heat dissipation efficiency of the third exposed part  11 - 418  to avoid the elements of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  from overheating. Moreover, the second opening  11 - 224  may facilitate the processing and manufacturing of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100 , and keep the third exposed part  11 - 418  at a desired position. 
     Please continue to refer to  FIGS.  120 A and  120 B , the first exposed part  11 - 415  and the second exposed part  11 - 417  have a surface  11 - 415   a  and a surface  11 - 417   a  respectively, and the recess  11 - 225  of the base  11 - 22  has a recess surface  11 - 225   a . The surface  11 - 415   a  of the first exposed part  11 - 415 , the surface  11 - 417   a  of the second exposed part  11 - 417  and the recess surface  11 - 225   a  are located on a same imaginary plane  11 -P. The first opening  11 - 223  further includes a first opening side  11 - 223   a , the first opening side  11 - 223   a  is in contact with the recess surface  11 - 225   a , but the first opening side  11 - 223   a  and the recess surface  11 - 225   a  are not parallel to each other. The first exposed part  11 - 415  and the second exposed part  11 - 417  are partially exposed to the first opening side  11 - 223   a.    
     As shown in  FIGS.  120 A and  120 B , the adhesive element  11 - 50  at least partially overlaps the first opening  11 - 223  when observed along the main axis  11 -M. The adhesive element  11 - 50  here may be glue instead of soldering tin. Moreover, the adhesive element  11 - 50  at least partially overlaps the first opening  11 - 223  when observed in the direction perpendicular to the main axis  11 -M. That is, the adhesive element  11 - 50  is disposed at the first opening  11 - 223  to fix and protect the first exposed part  11 - 415  and the second exposed part  11 - 417 . In addition, the circuit board  11 - 321  at least partially overlaps the first opening  11 - 223  when observed along the main axis  11 -M. In this way, the circuit board  11 - 321  may shield the first opening  11 - 223 , and further prevent foreign matters such as dust from entering the first opening  11 - 223 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  121   , the adhesive element  11 - 50  of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  is disposed between the circuit board  11 - 321  and the base  11 - 22 , and the adhesive element  11 - 50  here may be soldering tin  11 - 50 . It should be noted that, in some embodiments, the soldering tin  11 - 50  is only disposed between the circuit board  11 - 321  and the base  11 - 22 . That is, the soldering tin  11 - 50  at least partially overlaps the circuit board  11 - 321  and the base  11 - 22  when observed along the main axis  11 -M. However, the soldering tin  11 - 50  does not overlap the circuit board  11 - 321  and the base  11 - 22  when observed in the direction perpendicular to the main axis. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  122   , two sides of the first opening  11 - 223  of the base  11 - 22  may be provided with the recesses  11 - 225 . In this way, the first exposed part  11 - 415  and the second exposed part  11 - 417  in the first opening  11 - 223  may be more securely connected to (or electrically connected to) other elements of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  in the recess  11 - 225 . In addition, since the first exposed part  11 - 415  and the second exposed part  11 - 417  are partially exposed to the first opening side  11 - 223   a , the heat dissipation efficiency of the first exposed part  11 - 415  and the second exposed part  11 - 417  is increased to prevent the elements from overheating. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  123   , the circuit  11 - 41  may further include a first section  11 - 41   a  and a second section  11 - 41   b . The first section  11 - 41   a  is electrically connected to the second section  11 - 41   b  via the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d  of the circuit board  11 - 321 . More specifically, the first section  11 - 41   a  is electrically connected to the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d , and the connecting circuit  11 - 321   d  is electrically connected to the second section  11 - 41   b . In this way, the first section  11 - 41   a  and the second section  11 - 41   b  may avoid the two-dimensional restriction by means of three-dimensional electrically connection (in the direction of the main axis  11 -M), and the degrees of freedom for routing is increased. 
     In summary, the circuit assembly  11 - 40  of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  is disposed in the base  11 - 22 . That is, the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  of the present disclosure has the feature of circuit embedment. In this way, the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  may be integratedly manufactured, so that the structure of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  is strengthened and the number of elements required by the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  is reduced, thereby achieving miniaturization of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100 . The circuit embedment of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  of the present disclosure not only has the above-mentioned functions, but also enables the embedded circuit to receive current, so that the circuit may be used as an electric circuit. In this way, the routing of the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  may be facilitated, and the optical element driving mechanism  11 - 100  does not require additional circuit assemblies, thereby achieving the effect of facilitating manufacturing and miniaturization. 
     Twelfth Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  124    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  may be, for example, disposed in the electronic devices with camera function for driving an optical member (not shown), and can perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     As shown in  FIG.  124   , the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  has a central axis  12 -C that is substantially parallel to the Z axis. The optical member has an optical axis  12 -O that is substantially parallel to the X axis. In other words, in the present embodiment, the central axis  12 -C is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis  12 -O. The optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  includes a housing  12 - 110  which has a top surface  12 - 111 , a first side surface  12 - 112  and a second side surface  12 - 113  (as shown in  FIG.  126   ) that is opposite to the first side surface  1012 . The top surface  12 - 111  extends in a direction that is parallel to the optical axis  12 -O (i.e. the X-Y plane). The first side surface  12 - 112  and the second side surface  12 - 113  extend from edges of the top surface  12 - 111  in a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the optical axis  12 -O. In other words, in the present embodiment, the first side surface  12 - 112  and the second side surface  12 - 113  are substantially parallel to each other. In some embodiments, the first side surface  12 - 112  and the second side surface  12 - 113  extend from the edges of the top surface  12 - 111  in a direction that is not parallel to the optical axis  12 -O. 
     In addition, the housing  12 - 110  has a rectangular first opening  12 - 115  that is located on the first side surface  12 - 112 , and the optical axis  12 -O may pass through the first opening  12 - 115 . The light may pass through the optical member (not shown) which is disposed in the housing  12 - 110 . After the light passes through the above optical member, it will travel to an optical member  12 -S that is disposed outside of the housing  12 - 110 . That is, the optical member  12 -S corresponds to the first opening  12 - 115  of the housing  12 - 110 . For example, the optical member  12 -S is an image sensor, and thereby an image may be generated on the above electronic devices. It should be appreciated that any suitable element (not shown) may be connected between the housing  12 - 110  and the optical member  12 -S in order to maintain the stability of the optical member  12 -S for generating an image. In the present embodiment, when viewed along the optical axis  12 -O (namely, the direction in which the first optical member and the second optical member are arranged), the optical member  12 -S and the optical member which is located inside the housing  12 - 110  at least partially overlap. In addition, when viewed in a direction (e.g. the central axis  12 -C) that is perpendicular to optical axis  12 -O, the optical member  12 -S and the optical member which is located inside the housing  12 - 110  do not overlap. 
       FIG.  125    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  shown in  FIG.  124   . In the present embodiment, the housing  12 - 110  of the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  has a substantial rectangular structure. The optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  mainly includes a fixed portion  12 -F (e.g. a first portion), a movable portion  12 -M (e.g. a second portion), a plurality of first elastic members  12 - 160 , a plurality of second elastic members  12 - 161 , a first electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 140  and a second electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 145 . The fixed portion  12 -F includes a housing  12 - 110 , a base  12 - 120 , a frame  12 - 150 , and a circuit component  12 - 170 . 
     The housing  12 - 110  is disposed on the base  12 - 120 , and protect the elements disposed inside the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101 . In some embodiments, the housing  12 - 110  is made of metal or another material with sufficient hardness to provide good protection. The frame  12 - 150  is disposed in and affixed to the housing  12 - 110 . The circuit component  12 - 170  is disposed on the base  12 - 120  for transmitting electric signals, performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. For example, the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  may control the position of the optical member based on the aforementioned electric signals so as to form an image. In the present embodiment, a metallic member  12 - 121  is disposed in the base by insert molding, and thereby the structural strength of the base  12 - 120  may be enhanced. 
     The movable portion  12 -M is movable relative to the fixed portion  12 -F. The movable portion M mainly includes a carrier  12 - 130  which carries an optical member. As shown in  FIG.  125   , the carrier  12 - 130  is movably connected to the housing  12 - 110  and the base  12 - 120 . The first elastic members  12 - 160  are disposed on the carrier  12 - 130 . The second elastic members  12 - 161  extend in a vertical direction (the Z axis), and are connected to the first elastic members  12 - 160  and the base  12 - 120 . As a result, the carrier  12 - 130  may be connected to the base  12 - 120  via the first elastic members  12 - 160  and the second elastic members  12 - 161 . For example, the first elastic members  12 - 160  and the second elastic members  12 - 161  are made of metal or another suitable elastic material. 
     The first electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 140  includes first magnetic members  12 - 141  and first coils  12 - 142 . The first magnetic members  12 - 141  may be disposed on the frame  12 - 150 , and the corresponding first coils  12 - 142  are disposed on the carrier  12 - 130 . When current is applied to the first coils  12 - 142 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the first coils  12 - 142  and the first magnetic members  12 - 141  (i.e. the first electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 140 ) to drive the carrier  12 - 130  and the optical member carried therein to move along a horizontal direction (the X-Y plane) relative to the base  12 - 120 , performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     In addition, the second electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 145  includes second magnetic members  12 - 146  and second coils  12 - 147 . The second magnetic members  12 - 146  may be disposed on the carrier  12 - 130 , and the corresponding second coils  12 - 147  are disposed on the base  12 - 120 . For example, the second coils  12 - 147  may be flat-plate coils such that the difficulty and the required time for assembly may be reduced. When a current is applied to the second coils  12 - 147 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the second electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 145  to drive the carrier  12 - 130  and the optical member carried therein to move along the optical axis O (the X axis) relative to the base  12 - 120 , performing the autofocus (AF) function. The carrier  12 - 130  may be movably suspended between the frame  12 - 150  and the base  12 - 120  by the electromagnetic driving force of the first electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 140 , the second electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 145  and the force exerted by the first elastic members  12 - 160 , the second elastic members  12 - 161 . Furthermore, a magnetic permeable plate  12 -P is disposed on the second magnetic members  12 - 146  for concentrating the magnetic field of the second magnetic members  12 - 146  so that the efficiency of the second electromagnetic driving assembly  12 - 145  may be improved. In some embodiments, the magnetic permeable plate  12 -P may be made of metal or another material with sufficient magnetic permeability. 
     The sensing assembly  12 - 180  includes a sensor  12 - 181 , a reference member  12 - 182  and an integrated circuit (IC) component  12 - 183 . In the present embodiment, the sensor  12 - 181  and the integrated circuit component  12 - 183  are disposed on the base  12 - 120 , and the reference member  12 - 182  is disposed in the carrier  12 - 130 . A plurality of reference members  12 - 182  may be disposed. For example, the reference member  12 - 182  is a magnetic member, the sensor  12 - 181  may detect the change of the magnetic field of the reference member  12 - 182 , and the position of the carrier  12 - 130  (and the optical member) may be determined by the integrated circuit component  12 - 183 . In some embodiments, the sensor  12 - 181  or the reference member  12 - 182  is disposed on the fixed portion  12 -F, and the other of the sensor  12 - 181  or the reference member  12 - 182  is disposed on the movable portion  12 -M. 
       FIG.  126    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line B-B shown in  FIG.  124   . As shown in  FIG.  126   , the housing  12 - 110  has a second opening  12 - 116 , and the optical axis  12 -O may pass through the second opening  12 - 116 . In the present embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  has an incident end and an outlet end, wherein the incident end corresponds to the second opening  12 - 116 , and the outlet end corresponds to the first opening  12 - 115 . In the present embodiment, the light may enter the optical member from the incident end (i.e. the second opening  12 - 116 ) along the optical axis  12 -O, and exit the optical member from the outlet end (i.e. the first opening  12 - 115 ). In the present embodiment, the frame  12 - 150  is disposed between the carrier  12 - 130  and the housing  12 - 110 . When viewed in a direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  12 -O, the frame  12 - 150  and the carrier  12 - 130  at least partially overlap. 
     In addition, the base  12 - 120  further has a barrier  12 - 122  that is disposed to protrude towards the top surface  12 - 111 . The barrier  12 - 122  may have a fillet structure, and when viewed along the optical axis  12 -O from the first opening  12 - 115 , the fillet structure is formed on the edge of the first opening  12 - 115 . The optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  further includes a matrix structure  12 - 190  that is disposed on the barrier  12 - 122  (such as disposed on the fillet structure of the barrier  12 - 122 ). The matrix structure  12 - 190  is disposed between the optical member  12 -S and the optical member which is carried by the carrier  12 - 130 . For example, a first light  12 -L 1  (e.g. the desired light to form an image) entering the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  may travel along the optical axis  12 -O, reach the optical member  12 -S and form an image after passing through the optical member which is carried by the carrier  12 - 130 . Furthermore, a second light  12 -L 2  (such as the noise to be removed) may travel along a direction that is not parallel to the optical axis  12 -O, and be reflected by the matrix structure  12 - 190  after passing through the optical member which is carried by the carrier  12 - 130 , remaining inside the housing  12 - 110 . By means of the arrangement of the matrix structure  12 - 190 , the possibility that the second light  12 -L 2  reaches the optical member  12 -S may be effectively reduced, therefore preserving the image quality. 
     As shown in  FIG.  126   , the extending direction of the matrix structure  12 - 190  is not parallel and not perpendicular to the traveling direction (i.e. the optical axis  12 -O) of the first light  12 -L 1 . It should be appreciated that those skilled in the art may adjust the extending direction of the matrix structure  12 - 190  in response to the traveling direction of the second light  12 -L 2 , and it will not be repeated in the following paragraphs. In the present embodiment, when viewed along the optical axis  12 -O, the matrix structure  12 - 190  and the first opening  12 - 115  at least partially overlap. 
       FIG.  127    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  shown in  FIG.  124    from the outlet end. As shown in  FIG.  127   , when viewed in a direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  12 -O, the barrier  12 - 122  and a lengthwise side  12 - 117  of the first opening  12 - 115  at least partially overlap, and a gap is formed between the barrier  12 - 122  and a widthwise side  12 - 118  of the first opening  12 - 115 . In other words, when viewed in the same direction as above, the barrier  12 - 122  and the widthwise side  12 - 118  of the first opening  12 - 115  do not overlap. In addition, the frame  12 - 150  has a light-shielding structure  12 - 151  that is disposed to protrude towards the base  12 - 120 . When viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis O, the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  and the lengthwise side  12 - 117  of the first opening  12 - 115  also at least partially overlap. Similarly, a gap is formed between the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  and the widthwise side  12 - 118  of the first opening  12 - 115 . In other words, when viewed in the same direction as above, the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  and the widthwise side  12 - 118  of the first opening  12 - 115  do not overlap. 
     In some embodiments, jagged structures  12 - 123 ,  12 - 152  may be formed on the barrier  12 - 122  and/or the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  by a laser engraving process. In some other embodiments, any other regular or irregular structure may be formed on the barrier  12 - 122  and/or the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  so as to reduce the possibility that the noise reflected in the optical member driving mechanism  12 - 101  enters the image sensor, enhancing the image quality. It should be noted that although the barrier  12 - 122  and the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  are both disposed in the present embodiment, it merely serves as an example. Those skilled in the art may determine whether the barrier  12 - 122  and/or the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  are disposed, or adjust the position of the barrier  12 - 122  and/or the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  as required. 
       FIG.  128    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the jagged structure  12 - 123  includes multiple tapered structure, and has a plurality of peaks  12 - 124 . The jagged structure  12 - 152  also has a plurality of peaks  12 - 153 . As shown in  FIG.  128   , When viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  12 -O, the peaks  12 - 124 ,  12 - 153  may be exposed from the first opening  12 - 115 . In some embodiments, the distance between the lengthwise side  12 - 117  of the first opening  12 - 115  and the peaks  12 - 124 ,  12 - 153  is equal to or longer than 0.25 mm, and thereby the noise may be effectively blocked, preventing the noise from entering the image sensor. In addition, the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be disposed on the jagged structure  12 - 123  and/or the jagged structure  12 - 152 . As a result, the possibility that the noise (e.g. the second light  12 -L 2  shown in  FIG.  126   ) reaches the optical member  12 -S may be further reduced, therefore preserving the image quality. 
       FIG.  129    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  129   , when viewed in the direction (the X axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  12 -O, the peaks  12 - 124 ,  12 - 153  may not be exposed from the first opening  12 - 115 . Namely, the peaks  12 - 124 ,  12 - 153  may overlap with the housing  12 - 110 . In some embodiments, the distance between the lengthwise side  12 - 117  of the first opening  12 - 115  and the peaks  12 - 124 ,  12 - 153  is equal to or longer than 0.1 mm, and thereby the noise entering the image sensor may be effectively reduced. In addition, the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be disposed on the jagged structure  12 - 123  and/or the jagged structure  12 - 152  (as shown in  FIG.  128   ). As a result, the possibility that the noise reaches the optical member  12 -S may be further reduced, therefore preserving the image quality. 
       FIG.  130    is an enlarged perspective view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the barrier  12 - 122  has an upper surface  12 - 125  and a cutting surface  12 - 126  that intersects with the upper surface  12 - 125 . A tapered structure is formed by the upper surface  12 - 125  and the cutting surface  12 - 126 . The upper surface  12 - 125  is upwardly inclined, namely facing the carrier  12 - 130  and the top surface  12 - 111 . The cutting surface  12 - 126  is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis  12 -O, facing the first side surface  12 - 112 . In some embodiments, a fillet between the upper surface  12 - 125  and the cutting surface  12 - 126  is not greater than 0.05 mm. Similarly, the light-shielding structure  12 - 151  has a lower surface (not shown) and a cutting surface that intersects with the lower surface. In some embodiments, a fillet between the lower surface and the cutting surface is not greater than 0.05 mm. In addition, the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be disposed on the upper surface  12 - 125  of the barrier  12 - 125  and/or on the lower surface of the light-shielding structure  12 - 151 . As a result, the possibility that the noise reaches the optical member  12 -S may be further reduced, therefore preserving the image quality. 
     It should be understood that multiple embodiments for arranging the matrix structure  12 - 190  are provided as above, but these embodiments merely serve as examples without limiting the scope of the present disclosure. Those skilled in the art may arrange the matrix structure  12 - 190  on the fixed portion  12 -F (including the housing  12 - 110 , the base  12 - 120 , the frame  12 - 150  and/or the circuit component  12 - 170 ) and/or the movable portion  12 -M. In addition, although in the embodiments of the present disclosure, the matrix structure  12 - 190  is disposed as planar, however in some embodiments the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be disposed as curved (i.e. having a curvature). In some embodiments, the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be disposed on an element or portion that is made of metal. 
       FIG.  131    is a schematic view illustrating the matrix structure  12 - 190  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  131   , the matrix structure  12 - 190  is multi-layered and includes a metallic layer  12 - 191 , an insulating layer  12 - 192  and a protruding portion  12 - 193 . The metallic layer  12 - 191  is the bottommost layer of the matrix structure  12 - 190 . For example, the material of the metallic layer  12 - 191  includes gold (Au), silver (Ag), aluminum (Al), any other suitable metallic material or a combination thereof. The insulating layer  12 - 192  is formed on the metallic layer  12 - 191 . For example, the material of the insulating layer  12 - 192  includes magnesium fluoride (MgF2), silicon dioxide (SiO2), any other suitable insulating material or a combination thereof. The protruding portion  12 - 193  is formed on the insulating layer  12 - 192 , wherein the area of the protruding portion  12 - 193  on the horizontal plane (the X-Y plane) may be smaller than the area of the insulating layer  12 - 192  on the horizontal plane. That is, when viewed in a vertical direction, the insulating layer  12 - 192  may be exposed from the protruding portion  12 - 193 . For example, the material of the protruding portion  12 - 193  includes gold (Au), silver (Ag), aluminum (Al), any other suitable metallic material or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the metallic layer  12 - 191  and the protruding portion  12 - 193  may be formed of the same material. In some other embodiments, the metallic layer  12 - 191  and the protruding portion  12 - 193  may be formed of different materials. 
       FIG.  132    is a perspective view illustrating the matrix structure  12 - 190  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  132   , the matrix structure  12 - 190  has a plurality of protruding portions  12 - 193  with different sizes. The protruding portions  12 - 193  are formed on the insulating layer  12 - 192 . By means of arranging the protruding portions  12 - 193  in a particular manner, the surface plasmon resonance (SPR) generated by the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be tuned, such that the direction of the light reflected by the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be controlled. As a result, the possibility that the noise reaches the optical member  12 -S may be further reduced, therefore preserving the image quality. It should be understood that the arrangement (such as the sizes or arrangement of each of the protruding portions  12 - 193 ) of the matrix structure  12 - 190  may be adjusted in response to light (e.g. visible light, infrared light, etc.) with certain range of wavelength. Therefore, the function to avoid the noise worsening the image quality may be achieved. 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical member driving mechanism including a matrix structure that corresponds to the noise. By means of the arrangement of the matrix structure, the possibility that the noise reaches the optical member may be further reduced, therefore preserving the image quality. As a result, the optical member driving mechanism may be simplified and miniaturized. In addition, the matrix structure may be disposed with other anti-refection structures (such as barriers), further enhancing the preservation for high-quality image. 
     Thirteenth Group of Embodiments 
     Firstly, please refer to  FIG.  133   , an optical system  13 - 100  of an embodiment of the present disclosure may be mounted in an electrical device  13 - 1  for taking photos or videos, wherein the aforementioned electrical device  13 - 1  may, for example, be a smartphone or a digital camera, but the present disclosure is not limited to these. It should be noted that the position and the size between the optical system  13 - 100  and the electrical device  13 - 1  shown in  FIG.  133    are only an example, which is not for limiting the position and the size between the optical system  13 - 100  and the electrical device  13 - 1 . In fact, according to different needs, the optical system  13 - 100  can be mounted at different positions in the electrical device  13 - 1 . 
     Please refer to  FIGS.  134  and  135   , the optical system  13 - 100  includes a first optical element  13 - 110 , a second optical element  13 - 120 , a movable part  13 - 10 , a fixed part  13 - 20 , a driving assembly  13 - 30 , a circuit assembly  13 - 40 , two metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 , at least one sensing assembly  13 - 60  and a connecting element  13 - 70 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  134   , the first optical element  13 - 110  is connected to the movable part  13 - 10 , and the first optical element  13 - 110  has an optical axis  13 - 0 . The first optical element  13 - 110  has two sides that are not curved. The second optical element  13 - 120  is connected to the fixed part  13 - 20 , and the second optical element  13 - 120  may be an image sensing element. 
     As shown in  FIG.  135   , the movable part  13 - 10  includes a holder  13 - 11 . The holder  13 - 11  has a hollow ring structure, and has a through hole  13 - 11   a  to accommodate the first optical element  13 - 110 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  134   , the fixed part  13 - 20  includes a fixed part outer frame  13 - 21 . The fixed part outer frame  13 - 21  includes a fixed part outer frame body  13 - 211 , a fixed part outer frame surface  13 - 212 , and a fixed part outer frame bottom surface  13 - 213 . The fixed part outer frame body  13 - 211  includes a fixed part outer frame body top surface  13 - 211   a , a fixed part outer frame body bottom surface  13 - 211   b , two fixed part outer frame body sides  13 - 211   c , and a fixed part outer frame body opening  13 - 211   d . The fixed part outer frame body opening  13 - 211   d  accommodates the holder  13 - 11  and the first optical element  13 - 110 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  134   , the driving assembly  13 - 30  may drive the movable part  13 - 10  to move relative to the fixed parts  13 - 20 . The driving assembly  13 - 30  includes two driving magnetic elements  13 - 31  and a driving coil  13 - 32 . The driving magnetic element  13 - 31  is disposed in the fixed part outer frame body opening  13 - 211   d  and may be located between the holder  13 - 11  and the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c . The driving coil  13 - 32  is disposed on the holder  13 - 11 . Specifically, the driving coil  13 - 32  surrounds the holder  13 - 11 . When the driving coil  13 - 32  receives an external current, the driving coil  13 - 32  can interact with the driving magnetic element  13 - 31  and generate an electromagnetic driving force to drive the holder  13 - 11  to move along the optical axis  13 - 0  relative to the fixed part  13 - 20 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  134   , the circuit assembly  13 - 40  is electrically connected to the driving assembly  13 - 30 . The circuit assembly  13 - 40  includes a circuit board body  13 - 41 , a circuit board extending part  13 - 42 , and a circuit board pin part  13 - 43 . The circuit board body  13 - 41  is located between the fixed part outer frame body  13 - 211  and the fixed part outer frame surface  13 - 212 . The circuit board body  13 - 41  is connected to the circuit board extending part  13 - 42 , and the circuit board extending part  13 - 42  is connected to the circuit board pin part  13 - 43 . The circuit board pin part  13 - 43  includes a plurality of pins  13 - 431  and a circuit board pin part bottom surface  13 - 43   a . The pins  13 - 431  are arranged along the optical axis  13 - 0 . In the present embodiment, the circuit board pin part  13 - 43  includes six pins  13 - 431 , wherein two of the pins  13 - 431  are used for the driving coil  13 - 32 , and the remaining four pins  13 - 431  are used for the sensing element  13 - 60 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  135   , the metal circuit assembly  13 - 50  is provided on the circuit assembly  13 - 40 , and the metal circuit assembly  13 - 50  is electrically connected to the pin  13 - 431 . The sensing assembly  13 - 60  is provided on the circuit board body  13 - 41 , and the sensing assembly  13 - 60  may detect the change of the magnetic field generated by the driving magnetic element  13 - 31 , thereby determining the position of the movable part  13 - 10  and the first optical element  13 - 110 . Accordingly, the driving assembly  13 - 30  may drive the movable part  13 - 10  to move relative to the fixed part  13 - 20  based on the detection result of the sensing assembly  13 - 60 . 
     In some embodiments, the movable part  13 - 10  may further include a reference element (not shown), the reference element may be disposed in the movable part  13 - 10 . The sensing assembly  13 - 60  may detect the change in the magnetic field generated by the reference element, thereby determining the position of the movable part  13 - 10  and the first optical element  13 - 110 . In some embodiments, either the sensing assembly  13 - 60  or the reference element may be provided on the fixed part  13 - 20 , while the other one of the sensing assembly  13 - 60  and the reference element may be disposed in the movable part  13 - 10 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  136   , the circuit board body  13 - 41  has two first sides  13 - 411  and two second sides  13 - 412 . The boundaries between the two first sides  13 - 411  and the second sides  13 - 412  are four dashed lines  13 -W. The first side  13 - 411  has a linear structure, and the second side  13 - 412  has a curved structure. Moreover, a first width  13 - 411   a  of the first side  13 - 411  is substantially uniform, while a second width  13 - 412   a  of the second side  13 - 412  is non-uniform. Furthermore, the first width  13 - 411   a  of the first side  13 - 411  and the second width  13 - 412   a  of the second side  13 - 412  are different. More specifically, a size of the second width  13 - 412   a  is substantially greater than a size of the first width  13 - 411   a . The sensing element  13 - 60  is disposed on the second side  13 - 412 , and the sensing element  13 - 60  is electrically connected to the metal circuit assembly  13 - 50  to detect the movement of the holder  13 - 11 . The circuit board body  13 - 41  has a two-layered plate structure  13 - 413 . The metal circuit assemblies  13 - 50  are respectively located in different layers of the two-layered plate structure  13 - 413 . In this way, a short circuit between the metal circuit assemblies  13 - 50  themselves may be avoided, and it is convenient for electrically connecting the metal circuit assemblies  13 - 50  to the pins  13 - 431  of the circuit board pin part  13 - 43 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  136   , the circuit board extending part  13 - 42  is connected to the circuit board body  13 - 41 , and the circuit board extending part  13 - 42  is attached to the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c  of the fixed part outer frame body  13 - 211 . Furthermore, the connecting element  13 - 70  is provided between the circuit board extending part  13 - 42  and the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c , so that the circuit board extending part  13 - 42  may be more securely attached to the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c.    
     Please continue to refer to  FIG.  136   , the circuit board pin part bottom surface  13 - 43   a  is coplanar with and the fixed part outer frame body bottom surface  13 - 211   b . In this way, the contact area between the optical system  13 - 100  and the electrical device  13 - 1  is increased, and the optical system  13 - 100  may be mounted in the electrical device  13 - 1  more securely. 
     As shown in  FIG.  136   , the circuit board body  13 - 41  is coplanar with the fixed part outer frame surface  13 - 212 , the circuit board extending part  13 - 42  is coplanar with and the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c , and the circuit board pin part  13 - 43  is coplanar with the fixed part outer frame body bottom surface  13 - 211   b . That is, the circuit assembly  13 - 40  has a three-dimensional structure, and the circuit board body  13 - 41 , the circuit board extending part  13 - 42 , and the circuit board pin part  13 - 43  are not coplanar. In this way, the volume of the circuit assembly  13 - 40  may be effectively reduced, thereby miniaturization of the optical system  13 - 100  is achieved. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  137   , in the modified embodiment shown in  FIG.  137   , the circuit board extending part  13 - 42 - 1  is coplanar with the circuit board pin part  13 - 43 - 1 , and the circuit board extending part  13 - 42 - 1  is attached to the fixed part outer frame body bottom surface  13 - 211   b . The difference from the embodiment shown in  FIG.  136    is that the contact area between the circuit board extending part  13 - 42 - 1  and the fixed part outer frame body bottom surface  13 - 211   b  in the embodiment shown in  FIG.  137    is larger than the contact area between the circuit board extending part  13 - 42  and the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c  of the embodiment shown in  FIG.  136   . Therefore, the circuit board extending part  13 - 42 - 1  of the embodiment shown in  FIG.  137    is more securely attached to the fixed part outer frame body  13 - 211 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  138   , in the modified embodiment shown in  FIG.  138   , the circuit board extending part  13 - 42 - 2  is attached to the second optical element  13 - 120 . In this way, the separation of the second optical elements  13 - 120  from the fixed part  13 - 20  is avoided, and the internal structure of the optical system  13 - 100  is more stable. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  139   , in the modified embodiment shown in  FIG.  139   , the circuit assembly  13 - 40 - 3  includes two circuit board extending parts  13 - 42 - 3  and two circuit board pin parts  13 - 43 - 3 , and the circuit board extending parts  13 - 42 - 3  are connected to the circuit board pin parts  13 - 43 - 3 . Each circuit board extending part  13 - 42 - 3  is attached to the corresponding fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c - 3 . Since the circuit assembly  13 - 40 - 3  has two circuit board extending parts  13 - 42 - 3  and two circuit board pin parts  13 - 43 - 3 , the circuit board body  13 - 41 - 3  does not need to have a two-layered plate structure. The metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 - 3  can extend from the respective circuit board extending part  13 - 42 - 3  to the circuit board pin part  13 - 43 - 3  and is electrically connected to the pin  13 - 431 - 3  of the circuit board pin part  13 - 43 - 3 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  140   , in the modified embodiment shown in  FIG.  140   , the optical system no longer has circuit assemblies. The metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 - 4  of the optical system  13 - 100 - 4  is disposed in the fixed part outer frame  13 - 21 - 4 , and the metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 - 4  has a three-dimensional routing and is disposed at the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c - 4 . Specifically, the metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 - 4  extends from the fixed part outer frame bottom surface  13 - 213 - 4 , turning at the boundary between the fixed part outer frame bottom surface  13 - 213 - 4  and the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c - 4 , extending and turning in the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c - 4 . Thereafter, the metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 - 4  extends toward the fixed part outer frame body bottom surface  13 - 211   b - 4 , turning at the boundary between the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c - 4  and the fixed part outer frame body bottom surface  13 - 211   b - 4 , and extending out of the fixed part outer frame body  13 - 211 - 4  from the fixed part outer frame body side  13 - 211   c - 4 . Thus, the metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 - 4  may directly receive the external current, and the structure of the fixed part outer frame  13 - 21 - 4  with the three-dimensional metal circuit assembly  13 - 50 - 4  is more solid. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  141   , the optical system  13 - 100  may further include a fixed lens module  13 - 200 , a prism module  13 - 300  and a side  13 - 300   a . The fixed lens module  13 - 200  is connected to the fixed part  13 - 20 . The fixed lens module  13 - 200  includes a fixed lens assembly  13 - 210 . The fixed lens assembly  13 - 210  is fixed and non-movable. 
     Please refer to  FIGS.  142  and  143   ,  FIG.  142    is a top view of the optical system  13 - 100  of another embodiment,  FIG.  143    is a cross sectional view of the optical system  13 - 100  along a line  13 -A- 13 -A in  FIG.  142   . The prism module  13 - 300  is connected to the fixed lens module  13 - 200  via the connecting element  13 - 70 . Specifically, a gap  13 -S is provided between the fixed lens module  13 - 200  and the prism module  13 - 300 , and the connecting element  13 - 70  is disposed at the gap  13 -S. The connecting element  13 - 70  here can be glue  13 - 70 . Compared with other connecting methods (e.g. screws, etc.), the glue  13 - 70  enables to correct the error between the fixed lens module  13 - 200  and the prism module  13 - 300  when the error exists between the fixed lens module  13 - 200  and the prism module  13 - 300 . However, it should be noted that the first optical elements  13 - 110  and the glue  13 - 70  do not overlap when observed along the optical axis  13 - 0 , so as to avoid the glue  13 - 70  from affecting the imaging of the optical system  13 - 100 . The prism module  13 - 300  includes a prism  13 - 310  and a prism module pin part  13 - 320 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  143   , the prism  13 - 310  may reflect the incident light  13 -L to an optical path  13 -H, the light  13 -L images on the second optical element  13 - 120  after passing through the fixed lens assembly  13 - 210  and the first optical element  13 - 110 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  141    again, the circuit board pin part  13 - 43  and the prism module pin part  13 - 320  are located on the side  13 - 300   a  of the optical system  13 - 100 . That is, the circuit board pin part  13 - 43  and the prism module pin part  13 - 320  are located on the same side. In this way, the connection to the external circuit of the circuit board pin part  13 - 43  and the prism module pin part  13 - 320  is facilitated, and the routing of the optical system  13 - 100  is simplified. 
     As shown in  FIG.  144   , in some embodiments, the optical system  13 - 100  may have two fixed lens modules  13 - 200 , these two fixed lens modules  13 - 200  are positioned at upstream or downstream of the fixed part  13 - 20 . That is, these two fixed lens modules  13 - 200  abut the fixed part outer frame surface  13 - 212  and the fixed part outer frame bottom surface  13 - 213 , respectively. Moreover, the second optical element  13 - 120  is connected to the fixed lens module  13 - 200  which abuts the fixed part outer frame surface  13 - 212 . In this way, since there are different combinations for the fixed lens assembly  13 - 210  and the first optical element  13 - 110 , diverse zooming of the optical system  13 - 100  are provided. 
     In summary, the zooming of the optical system  13 - 100  of the present disclosure is achieved through changing the position of the movable part  13 - 10  and the first optical element  13 - 110  by the driving assembly  13 - 30 . Furthermore, the present disclosure enables periscope lens to have diverse zooming by combining the fixed lens module  13 - 200  and the prism module  13 - 300 . 
     Fourteenth Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  145    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical system  14 - 101  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical system  14 - 101  may be, for example, disposed in the electronic devices (not shown) with camera function, and a driving assembly inside the optical system may be configured to drive an optical member to move. Controlling the position of the optical member can perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     As shown in  FIG.  145   , the optical system  14 - 101  includes a first optical module  14 - 110 , a second optical module  14 - 120 , a third optical module  14 - 130  (as shown in  FIG.  146   ), a fourth optical module  14 - 140 , a fifth optical module  14 - 150  and a sixth optical module  14 - 160 , all of which correspond to each other. The optical system  14 - 101  has a first optical axis  14 -O 1 , which is substantially parallel to the Z axis. The optical system  14 - 101  further has a second optical axis  14 -O 2 , which is substantially perpendicular to the first optical axis  14 -O 1 . After light enters the optical system  14 - 101  along the first optical axis  14 -O 1 , the direction of the light is changed and the light travels along the second optical axis  14 -O 2 . In some embodiments, the first optical axis  14 -O 1  is not parallel to the second optical axis  14 -O 2 . 
     In the present embodiment, the fourth optical module  14 - 140  includes a driving assembly  14 - 142 . Light may enter the fourth optical module  14 - 140  along the first optical axis  14 -O 1 , and a fourth optical member  14 - 141  that is connected to the fourth optical module  14 - 140  may change the direction of the light which travels along the second optical axis  14 -O 2 . The driving assembly  14 - 142  may drive the fourth optical member  14 - 141  to move, and thereby the path of the light may be adjusted, performing an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     After the light turns to the second optical axis  14 -O 2 , it may pass through the first optical module  14 - 110 , the second optical module  14 - 120 , the sixth optical module  14 - 160  and the fifth optical module  14 - 150  in order. In other words, the fourth optical module  14 - 140 , the first optical module  14 - 110 , the second optical module  14 - 120 , the sixth optical module  14 - 160  and the fifth optical module  14 - 150  are sequentially arranged along the second optical axis  14 -O 2 . As a result, the shortest distance between the first optical module  14 - 110  and the fifth optical module  14 - 150  is longer than the shortest distance between the second optical module  14 - 120  and the fifth optical module  14 - 150 . The sixth optical module  14 - 160  may be located between the fifth optical module  14 - 150  and the second optical module  14 - 120 . 
     In some embodiments, the first optical module  14 - 110  includes a movable portion  14 - 111 , a fixed portion  14 - 112  and a driving assembly  14 - 113 , wherein the movable portion  14 - 111  is configured to connect the first optical member  14 - 114 . The driving assembly  14 - 113  may drive the movable portion  14 - 111  to move relative to the fixed portion  14 - 112 , and therefore performing an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. The second optical module  14 - 120  is configured to connect the second optical member  14 - 121 , wherein the second optical member  14 - 121  corresponds to the first optical member  14 - 114 . For example, the second optical axis  14 -O 2  may pass through the first optical member  14 - 114  and the second optical member  14 - 121 . The first optical member  14 - 114  is movable relative to the second optical member  14 - 121 , and may thereby provide different optical characteristics, as required. 
     Since merely some of the optical members (such as the first optical member  14 - 114 ) are movable, the design of the driving assembly  14 - 113  may be simplified or the required space of the driving assembly  14 - 113  may be reduced, achieving the miniaturization of the optical system  14 - 101 . Regarding the detailed arrangement of the first optical module  14 - 110 , the second optical module  14 - 120  and the fourth optical module  14 - 140 , it may be referred to other embodiments of the present disclosure, and it will not descripted in detail herein. 
     In some embodiments, an image sensor may be, for example, connected to the fifth optical module  14 - 150 , and therefore the light entering the optical system  14 - 101  may form an image after reaching the fifth optical module  14 - 150 . In some embodiments, a light filter may be connected to the sixth optical module  14 - 160 , and therefore the optical characteristics of the optical system  14 - 101  may be improved. In some embodiments, the sixth optical module  14 - 160  is optional. In some embodiments, the sixth optical module  14 - 160  may be substituted as a shutter, or a shutter may be disposed between the sixth optical module  14 - 160  and the fifth optical module  14 - 150 . 
       FIG.  146    is a cross-sectional view illustrating the optical system  14 - 101  shown in  FIG.  145   . As shown in  FIG.  146   , the third optical module  14 - 130  is located between the first optical module  14 - 110  and the second optical module  14 - 120 , and is configured to connect a third optical module  14 - 131 . In some embodiments, the third optical module  14 - 130  is connected to the first optical module  14 - 110  and movable relative to the second optical module  14 - 120 . In some other embodiments, the third optical module  14 - 130  is connected to the second optical module  14 - 120 , and the first optical module  14 - 110  is movable relative to the second optical module  14 - 120  and the third optical module  14 - 130 . 
     It should be noted that the term “optical area” may be used in the following paragraphs and refers to the largest region (on the Y-Z plane) that light may pass through in each element. Although the present embodiment merely shows a cross-section view of the optical system  14 - 101 , those skilled in the art should realize the proportional relationships between each “optical area” and “area” discussed in the present disclosure. 
     In the present embodiment, the fourth optical member  14 - 141  has a first area  14 -E 11  (i.e. a fourth optical area  14 -A 41 ) on a plane that is perpendicular to the second optical axis  14 -O 2  (namely, parallel to the first optical axis  14 -O 1 ). A second area  14 -E 12  is provided on a plane that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  14 -O 1  (namely, parallel to the second optical axis  14 -O 2 ). It should be noted that the first area  14 -E 11  is smaller than the second area  14 -E 12  because the fourth optical member  14 - 141  has a cutting portion below. By setting the cutting portion, the weight of the fourth optical member  14 - 141  can be reduced without affecting the optical properties, and the effect of reducing the weight of the optical system  14 - 101  can be achieved. 
     In addition, the size of the fourth optical module  14 - 140  may be greater than the sizes of the first optical module  14 - 110  and the second optical module  14 - 120 . An electrical element (not shown) may be disposed below the first optical module  14 - 110  and the second optical module  14 - 120 . That way, the space of the optical system  14 - 101  may be used more effectively. For example, the electrical element may be a battery, a capacitor, a resistor, an inductor or any other suitable electrical element. 
     The third optical module  14 - 130  is connected to the third optical member  14 - 131 . For example, the third optical member  14 - 131  is an aperture, but the disclosure is not limited thereto. The third optical member  14 - 131  has a third optical area  14 -A 3  on a plane that is perpendicular to the second optical axis  14 -O 2 . In the present embodiment, the third optical area  14 -A 3  is smaller than the fourth optical area  14 -A 4 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  146   , the first optical module  14 - 110  is connected to two first optical members  14 - 114 A and  14 - 114 B. The first optical members  14 - 114 A and  14 - 114 B have a first optical area  14 -A 1 . The fourth optical area  14 -A 41  is larger than the first optical area  14 -A 1 , and the third optical area  14 -A 3  is smaller than the first optical area  14 -A 1 . It should be understood that the first optical members  14 - 114 A and  14 - 114 B are cut in the present embodiment to remove redundant portions (such as the portion of the first optical member  14 - 114 A shown as dotted lines) of the first optical members  14 - 114 A and  14 - 114 B. That way, the size of the first optical members  14 - 114 A and  14 - 114 B may be reduced without affecting the optical properties, and the miniaturization of the optical system  14 - 101  can be achieved. 
     In the present embodiment, the first optical member  14 - 114 B is closer to the third optical module  14 - 130  than the first optical member  14 - 114 A. For example, the material of the first optical member  14 - 114 A includes glass, and the material of the first optical member  14 - 114 B includes plastic, but they are not limited thereto. In some embodiments, the refractive index of the material of the first optical member  14 - 114 B is smaller than the refractive index of the material of the first optical member  14 - 114 A. 
     The second optical module  14 - 120  is connected to the second optical members  14 - 121 A,  14 - 121 B and  14 - 121 C with different sizes. The second optical member  14 - 121 A has a second optical area  14 -A 21 , and the second optical members  14 - 121 B and  14 - 121 C have a second optical area  14 -A 22 . In this embodiment, the first optical area  14 -A 1  is substantially equal to the second optical area  14 -A 22 , and is greater than the second optical area  14 -A 21 . The second optical members  14 - 121 B and  14 - 121 C also have at least one cutting portion to reduce the size of the second optical members  14 - 121 A,  14 - 121 B, and the miniaturization of the optical system  14 - 101  can be achieved. Since the second optical member  14 - 121 A is not cut at all, the shape of the second optical member  14 - 121 A is different from the shapes of the second optical members  14 - 121 B and  14 - 121 C in the present embodiment. 
     It should be understood that although two first optical members  14 - 114 A,  14 - 114 B and three second optical members  14 - 121 A,  14 - 121 B and  14 - 121 C are shown in the present embodiment, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. Those skilled in the art may adjust positions and numbers of the first optical members and the second optical members as required, as long as the number of the first optical members is less than the number of the second optical members. 
     In addition, although in this embodiment, the light passes through the first optical module  14 - 110  and then enters the second optical module  14 - 120 , this merely serves as an example. Those skilled in the art may adjust the positions of the first optical module  14 - 110  and the second optical module  14 - 120  as required, so that light passes through the second optical member  14 - 121  before entering the first optical member  14 - 114 . 
     A sixth optical member  14 - 161  may be connected to the sixth optical module  14 - 160  (as shown in  FIG.  145   ), wherein the sixth optical member  14 - 161  has a sixth optical area  14 -A 6 . In the present embodiment, the sixth optical area  14 -A 6  is substantially equal to the second optical area  14 -A 22 . A fifth optical member  14 - 151  may be connected to the fifth optical module  14 - 150  (as shown in  FIG.  145   ), wherein the fifth optical member  14 - 151  has a fifth optical area  14 -A 5 . In this embodiment, the fifth optical area  14 -A 5  is smaller than the second optical area  14 -A 22 . In other embodiments, the fifth optical area  14 -A 5  may be substantially equal to the second optical area  14 -A 22 . 
       FIG.  147    is a cross-sectional view illustrating an optical system  14 - 102  in accordance with another embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that the optical system  14 - 102  may include the same or similar elements or portions as that of the optical system  14 - 101 . These elements or portions will be labeled as the same or similar numerals, and will not be discussed in detail below. As shown in  FIG.  147   , the optical system  14 - 102  includes a fourth optical member  14 - 143 , wherein the size of the fourth optical member  14 - 143  is larger than the size of the fourth optical member  14 - 141 . In other words, the fourth optical area  14 -A 42  (i.e. the second area  14 -E 22 ) of the fourth optical member  14 - 143  may be greater than the fourth optical area  14 -A 41  of the fourth optical member  14 - 141 . Similarly, since the fourth optical member  14 - 141  has a cutting portion below, the first area  14 -E 21  may be smaller than the second area  14 -E 22 . Because the size of the fourth optical member  14 - 143  is larger than the size of the fourth optical member  14 - 141 , the removed portion of the fourth optical member  14 - 143  also is larger than the removed portion of the fourth optical member  14 - 141 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  147   , the first optical module  14 - 110  is connected to  14 - 115 A,  14 - 115 B and  14 - 115 C with different sizes. The first optical member  14 - 121 A has a first optical area  14 -A 11 , the first optical member  14 - 121 B has a first optical area  14 -A 12 , and the first optical member  14 - 121 C has a first optical area  14 -A 13 . The first optical area  14 -A 11  is substantially equal to the first optical area  14 -A 12 , which is greater than the first optical area  14 -A 13 . The fourth optical area  14 -A 42  is larger than the first optical areas  14 -A 11 ,  14 -A 12  and  14 -A 13 , and the third optical area  14 -A 3  is smaller than the first optical area  14 -A 11 ,  14 -A 12  and  14 -A 13 . Since the first optical member  14 - 115 C is not cut at all, the shape of the first optical member  14 - 115 C that is closer to the third optical module  14 - 130  is different from the shapes of the first optical members  14 - 115 A and  14 - 115 B in the present embodiment. 
     It should be understood that the first optical members  14 - 115 A and  14 - 115 B are cut in the present embodiment to remove redundant portions (such as the portion of the first optical member  14 - 115 A shown as dotted lines) of the first optical members  14 - 114 A and  14 - 114 B. That way, the size of the first optical members  14 - 115 A and  14 - 115 B may be reduced without affecting the optical properties, and the miniaturization of the optical system  14 - 102  can be achieved. In addition, in response to the larger fourth optical member  14 - 143 , the original size (i.e. the size when the optical member is uncut) of the first optical member  14 - 115 A in the optical system  14 - 102  may be larger than the original size of the first optical member  14 - 114 A in the optical system  14 - 101 , as shown as the dotted lines. 
     In the present embodiment, the first optical members  14 - 115 B and  14 - 115 C are closer to the third optical module  14 - 130  than the first optical member  14 - 115 A. For example, the material of the first optical member  14 - 115 A includes glass, and the material of the first optical members  14 - 115 B and  14 - 115 C includes plastic, but they are not limited thereto. In some embodiments, the refractive index of the material of the first optical members  14 - 115 B and  14 - 115 C is smaller than the refractive index of the material of the first optical member  14 - 115 A. 
     The second optical module  14 - 120  is connected to the second optical members  14 - 122 A and  14 - 122 B with different sizes. The second optical member  14 - 122 A has a second optical area  14 -A 23 , and the second optical member  14 - 122 B has a second optical area  14 -A 24 . In this embodiment, the first optical areas  14 -A 11  and  14 -A 12  is substantially equal to the second optical area  14 -A 24 . The second optical members  14 - 122 B also has at least one cutting portion to reduce the size of the second optical members  14 - 122 B, and the miniaturization of the optical system  14 - 102  can be achieved. 
     It should be understood that although three first optical members  14 - 115 A,  14 - 115 B,  14 - 115 C and two second optical members  14 - 122 A and  14 - 122 B are shown in the present embodiment, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. Those skilled in the art may adjust positions and numbers of the first optical members and the second optical members as required, as long as the number of the first optical members is greater than the number of the second optical members. In addition, a plurality of third optical modules may be disposed in the optical system in some embodiments, and at least one first optical member or at least one second optical member is disposed between the third optical modules 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical system including a plurality of optical members, wherein some of the optical members are movable relative to some of the other optical members. Since some of instead all of the optical members are movable, the design of the driving assembly may be simplified or the required space of the driving assembly may be reduced, achieving the miniaturization of the optical system. 
     Fifteenth Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  148    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical system  15 - 101  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical system  15 - 101  may be, for example, disposed in the electronic devices (not shown) with camera function, and a driving assembly inside the optical system may be configured to drive an optical member to move. Controlling the position of the optical member can perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     As shown in  FIG.  148   , the optical system  15 - 101  includes a first optical module  15 - 110 , a second optical module  15 - 120 , a third optical module  15 - 130  (as shown in  FIG.  149   ), a fourth optical module  15 - 140 , a fifth optical module  15 - 150  and a sixth optical module  15 - 160 , all of which correspond to each other. The optical system  15 - 101  has a first optical axis  15 -O 1 , which is substantially parallel to the Z axis. The optical system  15 - 101  further has a second optical axis  15 -O 2 , which is substantially perpendicular to the first optical axis  15 -O 1 . After light enters the optical system  15 - 101  along the first optical axis  15 -O 1 , the direction of the light is changed and the light travels along the second optical axis  15 -O 2 . In some embodiments, the first optical axis  15 -O 1  is not parallel to the second optical axis  15 -O 2 . 
     In the present embodiment, the fourth optical module  15 - 140  includes a driving assembly  15 - 142 . Light may enter the fourth optical module  15 - 140  along the first optical axis  15 -O 1 , and a fourth optical member  15 - 141  that is connected to the fourth optical module  15 - 140  may change the direction of the light which travels along the second optical axis  15 -O 2 . The driving assembly  15 - 142  may drive the fourth optical member  15 - 141  to move, and thereby the path of the light may be adjusted, performing an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     After the light turns to the second optical axis  15 -O 2 , it may pass through the first optical module  15 - 110 , the second optical module  15 - 120 , the sixth optical module  15 - 160  and the fifth optical module  15 - 150  in order. In other words, the fourth optical module  15 - 140 , the first optical module  15 - 110 , the second optical module  15 - 120 , the sixth optical module  15 - 160  and the fifth optical module  15 - 150  are sequentially arranged along the second optical axis  15 -O 2 . As a result, the shortest distance between the first optical module  15 - 110  and the fifth optical module  15 - 150  is longer than the shortest distance between the second optical module  15 - 120  and the fifth optical module  15 - 150 . The sixth optical module  15 - 160  may be located between the fifth optical module  15 - 150  and the second optical module  15 - 120 . 
     In some embodiments, the first optical module  15 - 110  includes a movable portion  15 - 111 , a fixed portion  15 - 112  and a driving assembly  15 - 113 , wherein the movable portion  15 - 111  is configured to connect the first optical member  15 - 114 . The driving assembly  15 - 113  may drive the movable portion  15 - 111  to move relative to the fixed portion  15 - 112 , and therefore performing an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. The second optical module  15 - 120  is configured to connect the second optical member  15 - 121 , wherein the second optical member  15 - 121  corresponds to the first optical member  15 - 114 . For example, the second optical axis  15 -O 2  may pass through the first optical member  15 - 114  and the second optical member  15 - 121 . The first optical member  15 - 114  is movable relative to the second optical member  15 - 121 , and may achieve different optical characteristics, as required. 
     Since some of the optical members (such as the first optical member  15 - 114 ) are movable, the design of the driving assembly  15 - 113  may be simplified or the required space of the driving assembly  15 - 113  may be reduced, achieving the miniaturization of the optical system  15 - 101 . Regarding the detailed arrangement of the first optical module  15 - 110 , the second optical module  15 - 120  and the fourth optical module  15 - 140 , it may be referred to other embodiments of the present disclosure (such as embodiments shown in  FIGS.  133 - 144   ), and it will not described in detail herein. 
     In some embodiments, an image sensor may be, for example, connected to the fifth optical module  15 - 150 , and therefore the light entering the optical system  15 - 101  may form an image after reaching the fifth optical module  15 - 150 . In some embodiments, a light filter may be connected to the sixth optical module  15 - 160 , and therefore the optical characteristics of the optical system  15 - 101  may be improved. In some embodiments, the sixth optical module  15 - 160  may be optionally disposed. In some embodiments, the sixth optical module  15 - 160  may be substituted as a shutter, or a shutter may be disposed between the sixth optical module  15 - 160  and the fifth optical module  15 - 150 . 
       FIG.  149    is a cross-sectional view illustrating the optical system  15 - 101  shown in  FIG.  148   . As shown in  FIG.  149   , the third optical module  15 - 130  is located between the first optical module  15 - 110  and the fourth optical module  15 - 140 , and is configured to connect a third optical module  15 - 131 . As a result, the shortest distance between the first optical module  15 - 110  and the third optical module  15 - 130  is shorter than the shortest distance between the second optical module  15 - 120  and the third optical module  15 - 130 . In some embodiments, the third optical module  15 - 130  is connected to the first optical module  15 - 110  and movable relative to the second optical module  15 - 120 . In some other embodiments, the third optical module  15 - 130  is connected to second optical module  15 - 120 , and the first optical module  15 - 110  is movable relative to the second optical module  15 - 120  and the third optical module  15 - 130 . 
     It should be noted that the term “optical area” may be used in the following paragraphs and refers to the largest region that light may pass through in each element. Although the present embodiment merely shows a cross-section view of the optical system  15 - 101 , those skilled in the art should realize the proportional relationships between each “optical area” and “area” discussed in the present disclosure. 
     In the present embodiment, the fourth optical member  15 - 141  has a first area  15 -E 1  (i.e. a fourth optical area  15 -A 4 ) on a plane that is perpendicular to the second optical axis  15 -O 2  (namely, parallel to the first optical axis  15 -O 1 ). A second area  15 -E 2  is provided on a plane that is perpendicular to the first optical axis  15 -O 1  (namely, parallel to the second optical axis  15 -O 2 ). It should be noted that the first area  15 -E 1  is smaller than the second area  15 -E 2  because the fourth optical member  15 - 141  has a cutting portion  15 - 143  below. By setting the cutting portion  15 - 143 , the weight of the fourth optical member  15 - 141  can be reduced without affecting the optical properties, and the effect of reducing the weight of the optical system  15 - 101  can be achieved. 
     The third optical module  15 - 130  is connected to the third optical member  15 - 131 . For example, the third optical member  15 - 131  is an aperture, but the disclosure is not limited thereto. The third optical member  15 - 131  has a third optical area  15 -A 3  on a plane that is perpendicular to the second optical axis  15 -O 2 . In the present embodiment, the third optical area  15 -A 3  is smaller than the fourth optical area  15 -A 4 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  149   , the first optical module  15 - 110  is connected to the first optical members  15 - 114 A,  15 - 114 B and  15 - 114 C with different sizes. The first optical members  15 - 114 A,  15 - 114 B and  15 - 114 C have first optical areas  15 -A 11 ,  15 -A 12 , and  15 -A 13  of different sizes, respectively. In the present embodiment, the first optical area  15 -A 11  is smaller than the first optical area  15 -A 12 , and the first optical area  15 -A 12  is smaller than the first optical area  15 -A 13 . The fourth optical area  15 -A 4  is larger than the first optical areas  15 -A 11 ,  15 -A 12  and  15 -A 13 , and the third optical area  15 -A 3  is smaller than the first optical areas  15 -A 11 ,  15 -A 12  and  15 -A 13 . It should be understood that although the first optical members  15 - 114 A,  15 - 114 B and  15 - 114 C are shown as ovals in the present embodiment, the first optical members  15 - 114 A,  15 - 114 B and  15 - 114 C may also be disposed as other shapes. 
     In this embodiment, the first optical member  15 - 114 A is closer to the third optical module  15 - 130  than the first optical member  15 - 114 B. For example, the material of the first optical member  15 - 114 A includes plastic, and the material of the first optical member  15 - 114 B includes glass, but is not limited thereto. In some embodiments, the refractive index of the material of the first optical member  15 - 114 A is smaller than the refractive index of the material of the first optical member  15 - 114 B. 
     The second optical module  15 - 120  is connected to the second optical members  15 - 121 A and  15 - 121 B. The second optical members  15 - 121 A and  15 - 121 B have a second optical area  15 -A 2 . In this embodiment, the second optical members  15 - 121 A and  15 - 121 B have at least one cutting portion  15 - 122 , respectively, to remove redundant portions of the second optical members  15 - 121 A and  15 - 121 B. By means of the arrangement of the cutting portion  15 - 122 , the size of the second optical members  15 - 121 A,  15 - 121 B can be reduced without affecting the optical properties, and the miniaturization of the optical system  15 - 101  can be achieved. Since the first optical members  15 - 114 A,  15 - 114 B, and  15 - 114 C are not cut at all, the shapes of the first optical members  15 - 114 A,  15 - 114 B and  15 - 114 C are different from the shapes of the second optical members  15 - 121 A and  15 - 121 B in the present embodiment. 
     It should be noted that the original dimensions (that is, the dimensions when the cutting portion  15 - 122  is not formed) of the second optical members  15 - 121 A,  15 - 121 B may be different, and it may be determined based on the surface curvature of the second optical members  15 - 121 A,  15 - 121 B. As shown in  FIG.  149   , the second optical area  15 -A 2  may be larger than the fourth optical area  15 -A 4 , and further larger than the first optical areas  15 -A 11 ,  15 -A 12 ,  15 -A 13  and the third optical area  15 -A 3 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, the second optical area  15 -A 2  may be larger than the second area  15 -E 2  of the fourth optical member  15 - 141 . 
     The first optical module  15 - 110  includes a first surface  15 -S 1 , and the second optical module  15 - 120  includes a second surface  15 -S 2 . The first surface  15 -S 1  faces the second surface  15 -S 2 . In some embodiments, the first optical module  15 - 110  (such as the fixed portion  15 - 112 ) and the second optical module  15 - 120  are connected to each other via a connecting element (not shown), and the aforementioned connecting element may be disposed on the first surface  15 -S 1  and the second surface  15 -S 2 . In addition, although in this embodiment, the light passes through the first optical module  15 - 110  and then enters the second optical module  15 - 120 , it merely serves as an example. Those skilled in the art may adjust the positions of the first optical module  15 - 110  and the second optical module  15 - 120  as required, such that light passes through the second optical member  15 - 121  before entering the first optical member  15 - 114 . 
     A sixth optical member  15 - 161  may be connected to the sixth optical module  15 - 160  (as shown in  FIG.  148   ), wherein the sixth optical member  15 - 161  has a sixth optical area  15 -A 6 . In the present embodiment, the sixth optical area  15 -A 6  is substantially equal to the second optical area  15 -A 2 . A fifth optical member  15 - 151  may be connected to the fifth optical module  15 - 150  (as shown in  FIG.  148   ), wherein the fifth optical member  15 - 151  has a fifth optical area  15 -A 5 . In this embodiment, the fifth optical area  15 -A 5  is smaller than the second optical area  15 -A 2 . In other embodiments, the fifth optical area  15 -A 5  may be substantially equal to the second optical area  15 -A 2 . 
       FIG.  150    is a perspective view illustrating the second optical member  15 - 121  and the fifth optical member  15 - 151  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  150   , the second optical member  15 - 121  has two cutting portions  15 - 122  on opposite sides, and has a normal length  15 -NL between the two cutting portions  15 - 122 . The normal length  15 -NL is measured in a direction (such as the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the cutting portion  15 - 122 , and may represent the shortest distance between the two cutting portions  15 - 122 . In addition, the fifth optical member  15 - 151  has a lengthwise side  15 - 152  and a widthwise side  15 - 153 . Since the fifth optical member  15 - 151  is substantially rectangular, the lengthwise side  15 - 152  and the widthwise side  15 - 153  are substantially perpendicular to each other. In this embodiment, the length of the lengthwise side  15 - 152  in the Y axis is greater than the normal length  15 -NL. 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical system including a plurality of optical members, wherein some of the optical members are movable relative to some of the other optical members. Since some and not all of the optical members are movable, the design of the driving assembly may be simplified, and the space that is taken up in the driving assembly may be reduced, achieving the miniaturization of the optical system. 
     Sixteenth Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  151    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  may be, for example, a voice coil motor (VCM), which may be disposed in the electronic devices with camera function for driving an optical member (such as a lens), and can perform an autofocus (AF) function. In addition, the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  has a substantial rectangular structure, wherein a housing  16 - 110  of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  has includes a top surface  16 - 111  and four sidewalls  16 - 112 . An opening  16 - 113  is formed on the top surface  16 - 111  and corresponds to the optical member (not shown). That is, an optical axis  16 -O may pass through the opening  16 - 113 , such that light may enter into the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  via the optical axis  16 -O. In some embodiments, the sidewalls  16 - 112  extend from the edges of the top surface  16 - 111  along a direction that is perpendicular to the optical axis  16 -O. In some embodiments, the sidewalls  16 - 112  extend from the edges of the top surface  16 - 111  along a direction that is not parallel to the optical axis  16 -O. 
       FIG.  152    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  shown in  FIG.  151   . As shown in  FIG.  152   , the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  mainly includes a housing  16 - 110 , a base  16 - 120 , a movable portion  16 - 130 , a driving assembly  16 - 140 , a frame  16 - 150 , a first elastic member  16 - 161 , a second elastic member  16 - 162 , a circuit board  16 - 170  and a sensing assembly  16 - 180 . In addition, the housing  16 - 110 , the base  16 - 120 , the frame  16 - 150  and the circuit board  16 - 170  may constitute a fixed portion  16 -F. The housing  16 - 110  and the base  16 - 120  may be assembled as a hollow case. Therefore, the movable portion  16 - 130 , the first driving assembly  16 - 140 , the frame  16 - 150 , the first elastic member  16 - 161  and the second elastic member  16 - 162  may be surrounded by the housing  16 - 110 , and thus may be contained in the case. Accordingly, the housing  16 - 110 , the frame  16 - 150 , and the base  16 - 120  are sequentially arranged along the optical axis  16 -O. In other words, the light may sequentially pass through the housing  16 - 110 , the frame  16 - 150  and the base  16 - 120 , and reach an image sensor (as shown in  FIG.  154   ) that is disposed out of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 102  such that an image is generated. 
     The movable portion  16 - 130  has a hollow structure, and carries an optical member with an optical axis  16 -O. The frame  16 - 150  is disposed on the base  16 - 120  and affixed to the housing  16 - 110 . In addition, the movable portion  16 - 130  is movably connected to the housing  16 - 110  and the base  16 - 120 . The first elastic member  16 - 161  is disposed between the housing  16 - 210  and the movable portion  16 - 130 , and the second elastic member  16 - 162  is disposed between the movable portion and the base  16 - 120 . To be more specific, the movable portion  16 - 130  may be connected to the housing  16 - 110  and the base  16 - 120  through the first elastic member  16 - 161  and the second elastic member  16 - 162 , which are made of metallic materials. Therefore, the movable portion  16 - 130  is movably suspended between the housing  16 - 110  and the base  16 - 120 , and the movable portion  16 - 130  may move along the optical axis  16 -O between the housing  16 - 110  and the base  16 - 120 . For example, the first elastic member  16 - 161  and the second elastic member  16 - 162  are made of metal or any other suitable material with a certain flexibility. 
     The first driving assembly  16 - 140  includes two first coils  16 - 141  and two first magnetic members  16 - 142 . The first coils  16 - 141  may be disposed on the movable portion  16 - 130 , and the first magnetic members  16 - 142  may be disposed on the frame  16 - 150 . When a current is applied to the first coils  16 - 141 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the first coils  16 - 141  and the first magnetic members  16 - 142  to drive the movable portion  16 - 130  and the optical member carried therein to move along the Z-axis (i.e. the optical axis  16 -O) relative to the base  16 - 120 . Therefore, the autofocus (AF) function is performed. In other embodiment, the positions of the first coils  16 - 141  and the first magnetic members  16 - 142  are interchangeable. In other words, the first coils  16 - 141  may be disposed on the frame  16 - 150 , and the first magnetic members  16 - 142  may be disposed on the movable portion  16 - 130 . That way, the autofocus (AF) function may also be achieved. 
     In addition, the first driving assembly  16 - 140  further includes second coils  16 - 143  and second magnetic members  16 - 144 . The second coils  16 - 143  may be disposed on the movable portion  16 - 130 , and the second magnetic members  16 - 144  may be disposed on the frame  16 - 150 . When a current is applied to the second coils  16 - 143 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the second coils  16 - 143  and the second magnetic members  16 - 144  to drive the movable portion  16 - 130  and the optical member carried therein to rotate relative to the base  16 - 120 . Therefore, an optical calibration may be performed to the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 , or optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  may receive light from different positions. 
     In the present embodiment, the first coils  16 - 141  and the first magnetic members  16 - 142  are disposed on opposite sides of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 , and the second coils  16 - 143  and the second magnetic members  16 - 144  are disposed at corners of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . As a result, when viewed in a direction (the Z axis) that is parallel to the optical axis  16 -O, the first coils  16 - 141  and the second coils  16 - 143  do not overlap. In addition, when viewed in the direction that is parallel to the optical axis  16 -O, the first magnetic members  16 - 142  and the second magnetic members  16 - 144  do not overlap. 
     The circuit board  16 - 170  is disposed on one side of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and configured to transmit electric signals. For example, the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  may control the position of the optical member based on the aforementioned electric signals, and therefore the autofocus (AF) function may be achieved. In the present embodiment, a circuit component  16 - 121  is disposed in the base  16 - 120  by insert molding technique, and is electrically connected to the first driving assembly  16 - 140 . Therefore, the diversity of circuit design for the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  may be increased. In addition, an electric element  16 - 171  may be disposed on the circuit board  16 - 170 . For example, the electric element  16 - 171  may be a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor or any other suitable electric element. 
     The sensing assembly  16 - 180  includes a position sensor  16 - 181  and a reference member  16 - 182 , wherein the position sensor  16 - 181  is disposed on the circuit board  16 - 170 , and the reference member  16 - 182  is disposed in the movable portion  16 - 130 . The position sensor  16 - 181  may detect the change of the magnetic field generated by the reference member  16 - 182 , such that the position of the movable portion  16 - 130  and the optical member may be determined. Accordingly, the driving assembly  16 - 140  may drive the movable portion  16 - 130  to move relative to the fixed portion  16 -F based on the result detected by the position sensor  16 - 181 . In some embodiments, the position sensor  16 - 181  or the reference member  16 - 182  is disposed on the fixed portion  16 -F, and the other of the position sensor  16 - 181  or the reference member  16 - 182  is disposed on the movable portion  16 - 130 . 
       FIG.  153    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line  16 -B shown in  FIG.  151   . As shown in  FIG.  153   , the circuit board  16 - 170  and an exposed portion of the circuit component  16 - 121  are located on different sides of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . For example, the circuit board  16 - 170  and the exposed portion of the circuit component  16 - 121  are located on opposite sides of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . The above design may avoid any interference between the circuit board  16 - 170  and the circuit component  16 - 121 , maintaining normal operation for the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . 
       FIGS.  154 - 156    are schematic views illustrating an optical system  16 - 100  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the optical system  16 - 100  includes the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and a corresponding image sensor  16 - 102 , wherein the optical axis  16 -O may pass through the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and the image sensor  16 - 102 . As shown in  FIG.  154   , light from a target  16 -E may enter the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  along the optical axis  16 -O and reach the image sensor  16 - 102 . The image sensor  16 - 102  may receive the above light and form an image. 
     As shown in  FIGS.  155  and  156   , the movable portion  16 - 130  is rotatable relative to the image sensor  16 - 102 , making the optical axis  16 -O not parallel to an arrangement direction of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and the image sensor  16 - 102 . Since the optical axis  16 -O may offset due to the rotation of the movable portion  16 - 130 , the size of the image sensor  16 - 102  may be greater than the size of the optical member in the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . Even of the optical axis  16 -O offsets, the image sensor  16 - 102  may still receive light from different directions. As a result, the image sensor  16 - 102  may receive light in a greater range than usual, and perform a treatment to the images generated by lights from different angles. Therefore, function of taking panoramic image and wide-angle photography may be achieved. 
       FIGS.  157 - 159    are schematic views illustrating an optical system  16 - 200  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the optical system  16 - 200  includes the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and a corresponding image sensor  16 - 103 , wherein the optical axis  16 -O may pass through the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and the image sensor  16 - 103 . As shown in  FIG.  157   , light from a target  16 -E may enter the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  along the optical axis  16 -O and reach the image sensor  16 - 103 . The image sensor  16 - 103  may receive the above light and form an image. 
     As shown in  FIGS.  158  and  159   , the movable portion  16 - 130  is rotatable, making the optical axis  16 -O offset. In addition, the image sensor  16 - 103  is movable in response to the rotation of the movable portion  16 - 130 , such that the offset optical axis  16 -O passes through the image sensor  16 - 103 . As a result, the image sensor  16 - 103  may receive light in a greater range than usual, and perform a treatment to the images generated by lights from different angles so as to achieve function of taking panoramic image and wide-angle photography. Since the image sensor  16 - 103  is movable in response to the rotation of the movable portion  16 - 130 , the size of the image sensor  16 - 103  may be not greater than the size of the optical member in the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . 
     In the present embodiment, the optical system  16 - 200  further includes a second driving assembly (not shown) that is configured to drive the image sensor  16 - 103  to move relative to the movable portion  16 - 130 . For example, the second driving assembly may be disposed outside of the sidewall of the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . Accordingly, when viewed in the direction (the Z axis) in which the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and the image sensor  16 - 103  are arranged, the first driving assembly  16 - 140  (as shown in  FIG.  152   ) and the second driving assembly do not overlap. When viewed in a direction (e.g. the Y axis) that is perpendicular to the direction in which the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and the image sensor  16 - 103  are arranged, the first driving assembly  16 - 140  and the second driving assembly overlap. 
     In addition, in some embodiments, the image sensor  16 - 103  may be rectangular and have a lengthwise side (e.g. parallel to the X axis) and a widthwise side (e.g. parallel to the Y axis) that is not parallel to the lengthwise side. The image sensor  16 - 103  moves along a direction that is parallel to the widthwise side (shown as the arrows in  FIGS.  158  and  159   ). In some embodiments, the image sensor  16 - 103  may be square, circle or any other suitable shapes. 
       FIGS.  160 - 162    are schematic views illustrating an optical system  16 - 300  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. In the present embodiment, the optical system  16 - 300  includes the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  and an image sensor  16 - 103 , a photopermeable member  16 - 104  which correspond to the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . The optical axis  16 -O may pass through the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 , the image sensor  16 - 103  and the photopermeable member  16 - 104 . In some embodiments, the photopermeable member  16 - 104  is connected to the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 . For example, the photopermeable member  16 - 104  may be an aperture, a shutter or any other optical member that light may pass through. 
     As shown in  FIG.  160   , light from a target  16 -E may enter the optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101  along the optical axis  16 -O via the photopermeable member  16 - 104  and reach the image sensor  16 - 103 . The image sensor  16 - 103  may receive the above light and form an image. 
     As shown in  FIGS.  161  and  162   , the movable portion  16 - 130  is rotatable, making the optical axis  16 -O offset. In addition, the photopermeable member  16 - 104  is movable in response to the rotation of the movable portion  16 - 130 , such that the offset optical axis  16 -O passes through the photopermeable member  16 - 104 . In the present embodiment, the moving direction of the photopermeable member  16 - 104  is opposite to the moving direction of the image sensor  16 - 103  (shown as the arrows in  FIGS.  161  and  6 C ). That way, the optical axis  16 -O passes through optical member driving mechanism  16 - 101 , the image sensor  16 - 103  and the photopermeable member  16 - 104 . As a result, function of taking panoramic image and wide-angle photography may be achieved by the optical system  16 - 300 . 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical system including an image sensor that corresponds to an optical member driving mechanism. The embodiments of the present disclosure provide multiple arrangements for the image sensor to cooperate with the movement of the optical member driving mechanism, forming an image by receiving the light. In addition, the design of a larger image sensor or a movable image sensor may increase the range for receiving the light, and function of taking panoramic image and wide-angle photography may be achieved by performing a treatment to the images. 
     Seventeenth Group of Embodiments 
     Refer to  FIGS.  163 - 166   , which are a schematic view, an exploded view, a cross-sectional view of a light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  in some embodiments of the present disclosure, and an enlarged view of a module  17 -C in  FIG.  165   , respectively. The light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be disposed in an electronic device and used to take photographs or record video. The electronic device can be a smartphone or a digital camera, for example. When taking photographs or recording video, these optical modules can receive lights and form images, wherein the images can be transmitted to a processor (not shown) in the electronic device, where post-processing of the images can be performed. 
     The light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  mainly includes a case  17 - 410 , a top plate  17 - 420 , a middle plate  17 - 430 , a connecting element  17 - 440 , a first blade  17 - 450 , a second blade  17 - 460 , a drive assembly  17 - 470  (includes a driving magnetic element  17 - 472 , a driving coil  17 - 474  and a positioning magnetic element  17 - 476 ) and balls  17 - 480 . A space is formed between the case  17 - 410  and the top plate  17 - 420 , and the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  are disposed in the space to prevent the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  from colliding with other elements when operating. Furthermore, the middle plate  17 - 430  is disposed between the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  to prevent the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  from colliding with each other when operating. In some embodiments, the case  17 - 410 , the top plate  17 - 420 , and the middle plate  17 - 430  may be called as a fixed portion  17 - 405 , the connecting element  17 - 440  is movably connected to the fixed portion  17 - 405 , and the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  are movably connected to the fixed portion  17 - 405  and the connecting element  17 - 440 . The top plate  17 - 420  is disposed on a side of the first blade  17 - 450  which is far from the fixed portion  17 - 405 . 
     The case  17 - 410 , the top plate  17 - 420 , and the middle plate  17 - 430  include through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422 , and  17 - 432 , respectively. In some embodiments, the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422  and  17 - 432  forms a window, and a light having an optical axis  17 -O passes through the window formed by the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422 , and  17 - 432 . In some embodiments, the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422 , and  17 - 432  may have an identical size or shape, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. 
     The connecting element  17 - 440  may be disposed at, for example, a side of the fixed portion  17 - 405 , and the drive assembly  17 - 470  may be used for driving the connecting element  17 - 440  to move relative to the fixed portion  17 - 405  in a first moving dimension (e.g. Y direction). Furthermore, the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  may be disposed at the same side of the fixed portion  17 - 405 , which is different than the side where the connecting element  17 - 440  is located. 
     The details of the elements of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  are described later.  FIGS.  167  to  171    are schematic views of the case  17 - 410 , the middle plate  17 - 430 , the connecting element  17 - 440 , the first blade  17 - 450 , and the second blade  17 - 460 , respectively. 
     In  FIG.  167   , the case  17 - 410  has a substantially rectangular shape, and has a first column  17 - 411  (first pivot) and a second column  17 - 413  (second pivot) that are positioned at corners of the case  17 - 410  and extended in the Z direction. In other words, the first column  17 - 411  is parallel to the second column  17 - 413 . Concave portions  17 - 415  are positioned adjacent to the first column  17 - 411  and the second column  17 - 413 , which concave in a direction (i.e. −Z direction) that is opposite to the extending direction of the first column  17 - 411  and the second column  17 - 413 , and the concave portions  17 - 415  surround the first column  17 - 411  and the second column  17 - 413 . Furthermore, a recess  17 - 414  is positioned between the first column  17 - 411  and the second column  17 - 413 . As shown in  FIG.  167   , the recess  17 - 414  may extend in the Y direction, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. For example, in some embodiments, the recess  17 - 414  may extend in the X direction, depending on design requirement. Furthermore, dusts may be accommodated in the concave portions  17 - 415 , and error created during manufacturing may be compensated to improve assemble accuracy due to the design of the concave portions  17 - 415  being positioned adjacent to the first column  17 - 411  and the second column  17 - 413 . 
     A first limiting portion  17 - 416 A and a fourth limiting portion  17 - 416 B may be positioned at an edge of the case  17 - 410 , and protrude from the edge to the through hole  17 - 412 . A second limiting portion  17 - 417 B and a third limiting portion  17 - 417 A may be positioned at another edge of the case  17 - 410  and protrude into the through hole  17 - 412 . The first limiting portion  17 - 416 A is connected to the fourth limiting portion  17 - 416 B, and the second limiting portion  17 - 417 B is connected to the third limiting portion  17 - 417 A. The distance between the first limiting portion  17 - 416 A and the through hole  17 - 412  is less than the distance between the fourth limiting portion  17 - 416 B and the through hole  17 - 412  in the X direction. The distance between the third limiting portion  17 - 417 A and the through hole  17 - 412  is less than the distance between the second limiting portion  17 - 417 B and the through hole  17 - 412  in the Y direction. Furthermore, the distance between the fourth limiting portion  17 - 416 B and the first column  17 - 411  is less than the distance between the first limiting portion  17 - 416 A and the first column  17 - 411 , and the distance between the second limiting portion  17 - 417 B and the second column  17 - 413  is less than the distance between the third limiting portion  17 - 417 A and the second column  17 - 413 . As a result, the size of the window of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be adjusted. 
     Moreover, protruding portions  17 - 418  may be positioned on the case  17 - 410  and protrude in the X direction, wherein the protruding portions  17 - 418  are adjacent to the first limiting portion  17 - 416 A and the fourth limiting portion  17 - 416 B, and adjacent to the second limiting portion  17 - 417 B and the third limiting portion  17 - 417 A. The height of the protruding portion  17 - 418  may be greater than the thickness of the first blade  17 - 450  in the Z direction. As a result, the middle plate  17 - 430  may be prevented from directly contacting the first blade  17 - 450  if the middle plate  17 - 430  is disposed on the case  17 - 410 , so the durability of the first blade  17 - 450  may be enhanced. 
     In  FIG.  168   , the middle plate  17 - 430  includes holes  17 - 434  and  17 - 436 , and a recess  17 - 438  positioned between the holes  17 - 434  and  17 - 436 . The middle plate  17 - 430  may have a shape corresponding to the case  17 - 410 . For example, the positions of the holes  17 - 434  and  17 - 436  may correspond to the second column  17 - 413  and the first column  17 - 411  to allow the second column  17 - 413  and the first column  17 - 411  passing through the holes  17 - 434  and  17 - 436 , so the middle plate  17 - 430  may be affixed to the case  17 - 410 . Moreover, the recess  17 - 438  may extend in X or Y directions. The top plate  17 - 420  has a similar shape of the middle plate  17 - 430 , and is not repeated. 
     In  FIG.  169   , the connecting element  17 - 440  includes a main body  17 - 442 , a driving portion  17 - 444  extended from the main body  17 - 442 , and concaves  17 - 446  concave in a direction that is opposite to the extending direction of the driving portion  17 - 444 . The concaves  17 - 446  may be circular to allow the balls  17 - 480  ( FIG.  164   ) being accommodated in the concaves  17 - 446 , so the connecting element  17 - 440  may move smoothly relative to the fixed portion  17 - 405  via the rotation of the balls  17 - 480 . The driving portion  17 - 444  may be disposed in the recesses  17 - 414  and  17 - 438  to allow the driving portion  17 - 444  move along the extension direction of the recesses  17 - 414  and  17 - 438 . Furthermore, a concave portion  448  is positioned at a side of the main body  17 - 442 , and the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may be disposed in the concave portion  17 - 448 . A tilting portion  17 - 449  is positioned at sides of the concave portion  17 - 448 , so the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may be easily disposed in the concave portion  17 - 448 . 
     In  FIG.  170   , the first blade  17 - 450  includes a first recess  17 - 451  corresponding to the position of the driving portion  17 - 444 , and a hole  17 - 452  corresponding to the position of the first column  17 - 411 . As result, the first column  17 - 411  may be disposed in the hole  17 - 452 , and the driving portion  17 - 444  may be disposed in the first recess  17 - 451 . Moreover, in some embodiments, the first blade  17 - 450  further includes a first limiting edge  17 - 453 , a third limiting edge  17 - 454 , a first notch edge  17 - 456 , and a fourth limiting edge  17 - 455  arranged in a counterclockwise manner. The first limiting edge  17 - 453 , the third limiting edge  17 - 454  and the fourth limiting edge  17 - 455  may be straight, and the first notch edge  17 - 456  may be arc-shaped and adjacent to the window formed of the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422  and  17 - 432  (such as adjacent to the window relative to the third limiting edge  17 - 454 ). In some embodiments, the first blade  17 - 450  may include a hollow portion  17 - 457  extending in a direction that is perpendicular to the optical axis  17 -O, for reducing the weight of the first blade  17 - 450 , so the force for driving the first blade  17 - 450  may be reduced accordingly. 
     In  FIG.  171   , the second blade  17 - 460  includes a second recess  17 - 461  corresponding to the position of the driving portion  17 - 444 , and a hole  17 - 462  corresponding to the position of the second column  17 - 413 . As result, the second column  17 - 413  may be disposed in the hole  17 - 462 , and the driving portion  17 - 444  may be disposed in the second recess  17 - 461 . Moreover, in some embodiments, the second blade  17 - 460  further includes a second limiting edge  17 - 463 , a fifth limiting edge  17 - 464 , a second notch edge  17 - 466 , and a sixth limiting edge  17 - 465  arranged in a counterclockwise manner. The second limiting edge  17 - 463 , the fifth limiting edge  17 - 464  and the sixth limiting edge  17 - 465  may be straight, and the second notch edge  17 - 466  may be arc-shaped and may be adjacent to the window formed of the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422  and  17 - 432  (such as adjacent to the window relative to the fifth limiting edge  17 - 456 ). In some embodiments, the second blade  17 - 460  may include a hollow portion  17 - 467  extending in a direction that is perpendicular to the optical axis  17 -O to reduce the weight of the second blade  17 - 460 , so the force for driving the second blade  17 - 460  may be reduced accordingly. It should be noted that the first recess  17 - 451  of the first blade  17 - 450  and the second recess  17 - 461  of the second blade  17 - 460  extend in different directions. 
       FIGS.  172  to  174    are schematic views of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  viewed in different directions, wherein the top plate  17 - 420  and the middle plate  17 - 430  are omitted in  FIGS.  173  and  174    for clarity. Referring to  FIGS.  167  to  174   , the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  and the driving coil  17 - 474  of the drive assembly  17 - 470  may interact with each other to generate a magnetic force. In some embodiments, the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may be a magnet, and may be disposed on the connecting element  17 - 440 , for example. The driving coil  17 - 474  may be affixed to another element outside the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 . As a result, when the magnetic force is generated between the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  and the driving coil  17 - 474  (such as passing circuit to the driving coil  17 - 474 ), the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may bring the connecting element  17 - 440  to move together via the magnetic force. For example, it may move in the Y direction. 
     However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. For example, in some embodiments, the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may be affixed to another element outside the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 , and the driving coil  17 - 474  may be affixed to the connecting element  17 - 440 , so the connecting element  17 - 440  may be moved by the interaction between the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  and the driving coil  17 - 474 . Furthermore, the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may be moved in the Z direction (or along the optical axis  17 -O). In some embodiments, the positioning magnetic element  17 - 476  may be disposed on the fixed portion  17 - 405  and positioned between the fixed portion  17 - 405  and the driving magnetic element  17 - 472 . When the connecting element  17 - 440  is stopped, the positioning magnetic element  17 - 476  may use for attracting the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  to fix the position of the connecting element  17 - 440 . In some embodiments, a portion of the connecting element  17 - 440  contacting the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may be tilted, so the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  may be easily disposed in the connecting element  17 - 440 . 
     In some embodiments, a wiring direction of the driving coil  17 - 474  (e.g. X direction) is perpendicular to the optical axis  17 -O (e.g. Z direction). A portion of the driving coil  17 - 474  overlaps the connecting element  17 - 440 , the first blade  17 - 450 , and the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  in the X direction, which is perpendicular to the optical axis  17 -O. In some embodiments, the positioning magnetic element  17 - 476  may partially overlap the driving magnetic element  17 - 472 , and may not overlap the driving coil  17 - 474 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, the positioning magnetic element  17 - 476  may not overlap the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  and may partially overlap the driving coil  17 - 474 . As a result, the design may be more flexible, and the required space may be reduced by allowing the elements overlap with each other, so miniaturization may be achieved. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  167  to  174   , the driving portion  17 - 444  passes through the recesses  17 - 414  and  17 - 438  and is movably connected to the first recess  17 - 451  of the first blade  17 - 450  and the second recess  17 - 461  of the second blade  17 - 460  in  FIGS.  172  to  174   . The first limiting edge  17 - 453  of the first blade  17 - 450  contacts the first column  17 - 411 , and the third limiting edge  17 - 454  contacts the first limiting portion  17 - 416 A, so the first blade  17 - 450  is limited at a first limit position (i.e. a position of the first blade  17 - 450  that is farthest from the optical axis  17 -O). The size (e.g. diameter) of the window of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  is  17 -D 1  at this time. 
     Furthermore, the first blade  17 - 450  may perform rotation by using the first column  17 - 411  as its rotation pivot. In other words, the first column  17 - 411  may act as a stopper and a pivot at the same time, rather than using two separated stopper and pivot, so miniaturization may be achieved. 
     Moreover, the second limiting edge  17 - 463  of the second blade contacts the second column  17 - 413 , the fifth limiting edge  17 - 464  contacts the third limiting portion  17 - 417 A, so the second blade  17 - 460  is limited at a second limit position (i.e. a position of the second blade  17 - 460  that is farthest from the optical axis  17 -O). Furthermore, the second blade  17 - 460  may rotate by using the second column  17 - 413  as its rotation pivot. In other words, the second column  17 - 413  may act as a stopper and a pivot at the same time, rather than using two separated stopper and pivot, so miniaturization may be achieved. 
     In some embodiments, the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  may be plate-shaped and positioned on different planes. For example, the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  may be positioned on a first virtual plane and a second virtual plane (not shown), respectively. The first virtual plane and the second virtual plate may intersect rather than fully overlap with each other. As a result, the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  may move on different planes rather than collide with each other, as shown in  FIGS.  173  and  174   . 
     In some embodiments, the drive assembly  17 - 470  (which includes the driving magnetic element  17 - 472 , the driving coil  17 - 474 , and the positioning magnetic element  17 - 476 ) is disposed on a side of the case  17 - 410 . Other elements may be disposed on a side of case  17 - 410  which is opposite to the drive assembly  17 - 470  to balance the weight of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 . For example, magnetic elements or sensors may be disposed opposite to the drive assembly  17 - 470 , but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. A sensor and the driving element  17 - 470  may be disposed on an identical side for detecting the movement of the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  along the optical axis  17 -O. 
       FIGS.  175  to  177    are schematic views of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  viewed in different directions, wherein the connecting element  17 - 440  is moved by passing current to the driving coil  17 - 474 . The top plate  17 - 420  and the middle plate  17 - 430  are omitted in  FIGS.  176  and  177    for clarity. When compared with the conditions in  FIGS.  172  to  174   , the driving portion  17 - 444  of the connecting portion  17 - 440  moves to −X direction. Because the driving portion  17 - 444  is disposed in the first recess  17 - 451  of the first blade  17 - 450  and in the second recess  17 - 461  of the second blade  17 - 460  at the same time, the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  may be driven concurrently. In particular, the first blade  17 - 450  may rotate in a clockwise manner (i.e. second moving dimension) using the first column  17 - 411  as the rotation pivot, and the second blade  17 - 460  may rotate in a counterclockwise manner (i.e. third moving dimension) using the second column  17 - 413  as the rotation pivot in  FIG.  175   . In other words, the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  rotate in opposite directions, and rotate or stop concurrently. By this design, two different blades (e.g. the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460 ) may be driven by a single connecting element  17 - 440  to move in different directions, wherein the connecting element  17 - 440  only moves in a single direction. As a result, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may have fewer elements to achieve miniaturization. It should be noted that the first moving dimension (i.e. linear movement in the X direction) of the connecting element  17 - 440 , the second moving dimension (i.e. rotation) of the first blade  17 - 450 , and the third moving dimension (i.e. rotation) of the second blade  17 - 460  are different. However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto, and the result of the present disclosure may be achieved as long as the movement manners are different. At this time, the first notch edge  17 - 456  of the first blade  17 - 450  and the second notch edge  17 - 466  of the second blade  17 - 460  come closer to each other. 
       FIGS.  178  to  180    are schematic views of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  viewed in different directions when the connecting element  17 - 440  is further driven. The top plate  17 - 420  and the middle plate  17 - 430  are omitted in  FIGS.  179  and  180    for clarity. The fourth limiting edge  17 - 455  of the first blade  17 - 450  contacts the second limiting portion  17 - 417 B of the case  17 - 410 , and the sixth limiting edge  17 - 465  of the second blade  17 - 460  contacts the fourth limiting portion  17 - 416 B of the case  17 - 410  to restrict the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  at a third limit position and a fourth limit position, respectively, which are the positions of the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  that are most adjacent to the optical axis  17 -O. In some embodiments, the range between the first limit position and the third limit position may be called as a first limit movement range, and the range between the second limit position and the fourth limit position may be called as a second limit movement range. 
     The first notch edge  17 - 456  of the first blade  17 - 450  and the second notch edge  17 - 466  of the second blade  17 - 460  also forms a window having a size  17 -D 2  (e.g. diameter) less than the size  17 -D 1  of the window formed of the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422  and  17 - 432  ( FIG.  172   ). As a result, the size of the window of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be changed to adjust the light flux of the light having the optical axis  17 -O passing through the window. 
     It should be noted that the hollow portion  17 - 457  of the first blade  17 - 450  overlaps the hollow portion  17 - 467  of the second blade  17 - 460  when viewed along the optical axis  17 -O in  FIGS.  172  to  180   . Furthermore, when the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  are moving, the area of the hollow portion  17 - 457  that overlaps the hollow portion  17 - 467  and the area of the first recess  17 - 451  that overlaps the second recess  17 - 461  are changed accordingly. In other words, when the connecting element  17 - 440  moves in a movable range, the first blade  17 - 450  at least partially overlaps the second blade  17 - 460 , and the first blade  17 - 450  crosses the second blade  17 - 460  (e.g. extend in different directions) when viewed along the optical axis  17 -O. The fact that the first blade  17 - 450  partially crosses (or overlaps) the second blade  17 - 460  allows the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460  being disposed in a relative small space, so miniaturization may be achieved. 
     In some embodiments, the first blade and the second blade may have no window. In other words, the window formed of the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422 , and  17 - 432  may be totally blocked after than first blade assembling with the second blade, so the first blade and the second may act as a shutter. 
       FIG.  181    is an exploded view of an optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  in some embodiments of the present disclosure,  FIG.  182    is a schematic of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  when an outer case  17 - 510  is omitted, and  FIG.  183    is a side view of some elements of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500 . The optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  may mainly include the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 , an optical element  17 - 505 , an outer case  17 - 510 , a bottom  17 - 520 , a holder  17 - 530 , a plurality of optical element driving coils  17 - 540 , a plurality of driving magnetic elements  17 - 542 , a resilient element  17 - 550 , and a resilient element  17 - 552 . 
     The outer case  17 - 510  and the bottom  17 - 520  may be combined with each other to form a case of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500 , and may be called as a fixing portion  17 -F. It should be noted that an outer case opening  17 - 512  and a bottom opening  17 - 522  are formed on the outer case  17 - 510  and the bottom  17 - 520 , respectively. The center of the outer case opening  17 - 512  corresponds to the optical axis  17 -O, the bottom opening  17 - 522  corresponds to an image sensor (not shown) outside the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500 . As a result, the optical element  17 - 505  disposed in the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  can perform image focusing with the image sensor along the optical axis  17 -O. 
     The holder  17 - 530  has a through hole  17 - 532 , and the optical element  17 - 505  may be fixed in the through hole  17 - 532 . The optical element driving coil  17 - 540  may be disposed on the outer surface of the holder  17 - 530  and disposed in the case of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500 , which is formed of the outer case  17 - 510  and the bottom  17 - 520 , and the driving magnetic element  17 - 542  may be disposed on the outer case  17 - 510 . Specifically, a magnetic force may be created by the interaction between the driving magnetic element  17 - 542  and the optical element driving coil  17 - 540  to move the holder  17 - 530  and the optical element driving coil  17 - 540  together along the direction of the optical axis  17 -O to achieve rapid focusing. As a result, the holder  17 - 530  and the optical element driving coil  17 - 540  may be called as a movable portion  17 -M together. In some embodiments, the driving magnetic element  17 - 542  may be disposed on the outer surface of the holder  17 - 530 , and the optical element driving coil  17 - 540  may be disposed on the outer case  17 - 510  to allow the driving magnetic element  17 - 542  move with the holder  17 - 530 . 
     In this embodiment, the holder  17 - 530  and the optical element  17 - 505  disposed therein are movably disposed in the outer case  17 - 510  and the bottom  17 - 520 . More specifically, the holder  17 - 530  may be connected to and suspended in the outer case  17 - 510  and the bottom  17 - 520  by the resilient element  17 - 550  and the resilient element  17 - 552  made of a metal material, for example. When current is applied to the optical element driving coil  17 - 540 , the optical element driving coil  17 - 540  can act with the magnetic field of the driving magnetic element  17 - 542  (such as a magnet) to generate an electromagnetic force to move the holder  17 - 530  and the optical element  17 - 505  along the optical axis  17 -O direction relative to the outer case  17 - 510  and the bottom to achieve auto focusing. 
     Furthermore, the bottom  17 - 520  may be, for example, a flexible printed circuit (FPC), to be electrically connected to other electronic elements inside or outside the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  to achieve auto focus and optical image stabilization. Furthermore, electronic signal may be transfer through the resilient element  17 - 552  to the optical element driving coil  17 - 540  to control the movement of the holder  17 - 530  in X, Y, or Z directions. 
     For example, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be disposed in the case formed of the outer case  17 - 510  and the bottom  17 - 520 , and may be disposed on a light incident side of the optical element  17 - 505  (a side far from the bottom  17 - 520 ) to control the amount of the light entering the optical element  17 - 505 . In some embodiments, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be fixed to the outer case  17 - 510 , and the optical element  17 - 505  may move relative to the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 . In some embodiments, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be affixed to the optical element  17 - 505  (such as on the holder  17 - 530 ) to move with the optical element  17 - 505  relative to the case  17 - 510 . In  FIG.  183   , the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  is partially disposed adjacent to the optical element  17 - 505  (i.e. overlap with the optical element  17 - 505  in X or Y direction) to effectively utilize the space of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500 . 
       FIG.  184    is a schematic view when the elements of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  are assembled as a driving component  17 - 506 , except for light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 , the optical element  17 - 505 , and the outer case  17 - 510 . In some embodiments, the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  may be assembled in a subsequence of positioning the optical element  17 - 505  in the driving component  17 - 506 , positioning the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  on the driving component  17 - 506 , and positioning the outer case  17 - 510  on the driving component  17 - 506 . However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. For example, the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  may be assembled in a subsequence of assembling the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  with the driving component  17 - 506 , providing the optical element  17 - 505  in the driving component  17 - 506  from another side of the driving component  17 - 506  (the side without the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 ), and the providing the outer case  17 - 510  on the driving component  17 - 506 . In this way, the required number of elements during assembling may be reduced, so the height of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  may be reduced to achieve miniaturization. In some embodiments, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be disposed between the bottom  17 - 520  and the resilient element  17 - 550 . 
       FIGS.  185  and  186    are schematic views of an optical element driving mechanism  17 - 501  and an optical element driving mechanism  17 - 502  in some embodiments of the present disclosure, respectively. The optical element driving mechanisms  17 - 501  and  17 - 502  further include a sensor  17 - 560  and a circuit element  17 - 562 . In  FIG.  185   , the sensor  17 - 560  and the circuit element  17 - 562  of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 501  and the drive assembly  17 - 470  (such as the driving coil  17 - 474 ) of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be disposed on an identical side. As a result, the space at the side of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 501  may be further utilized to achieve miniaturization. In  FIG.  186   , the sensor  17 - 560  and the circuit element  17 - 562  of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 502  may be disposed on a different side to the drive assembly  17 - 470  (such as the driving coil  17 - 474 ) of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 , such as disposed on opposite sides. As a result, magnetic interference that possibly occurs may be prevented. In some embodiments, a plurality of sensors  17 - 560  may be disposed on an identical side of the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 500  to separately detect the movement between the fixing portion  17 -F and the movable portion  17 -M, and the movement between the fixed portion  17 - 405  and the connecting portion  17 - 440 . All of the plurality of the sensors  17 - 560  may be partially disposed on the circuit element  17 - 562 . 
     In some embodiments, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be operated after the adjustment of the focal length of the optical element  17 - 505  is finished, and the position of the driving magnetic element  17 - 472  is fixed. As a result, the focal length of the optical element  17 - 505  may be adjusted when the intensity of light incident to the optical element  17 - 505  is relatively high, so the accuracy of the adjustment may be enhanced. Therefore, before the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  is shut down, a signal may be sent to the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  for turning on the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  (i.e. make the window not covered by the first blade  17 - 450  and the second blade  17 - 460 ). 
     The light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  provided in the present disclosure also may be applied in an optical system having two lenses. For example, the optical system  17 - 600  in  FIG.  187    includes an optical element driving mechanism  17 - 503  and an optical element driving mechanism  17 - 504 , wherein the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  is disposed on the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 503 , and does not disposed on the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 504 . The optical element driving mechanisms  17 - 503  and  17 - 504  may be mechanisms with different functions, such as being mechanisms having a wide angle lens and a long focal length lens, respectively. In this embodiment, the drive assembly  17 - 470  of the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be disposed on a side far from the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 504  to prevent possible magnetic interference. In some embodiments, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be provided on the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 504 , and the drive assembly  17 - 470  of the optical element driving mechanism may be disposed on a side far from the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 503 , too. 
     In some embodiments, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be applied in a periscope optical system. For example, as shown in  FIG.  188   , a periscope optical system  17 - 507  may include an optical element driving module  17 - 570 , an optical path adjustment module  17 - 580 , and an optical sensor  17 - 590 . External light (such as light  17 - 508 ) which enters the optical element  17 - 507  through a light incident hole  17 - 571  may be reflected by the optical path adjustment module  17 - 580  to pass through the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 570 , and the be received by the image sensor  17 - 590 . In other words, the direction of the light  17 - 508  may be changed by the optical path adjustment module  17 - 580 . 
     The detailed structures of the optical element driving module  17 - 570  and the light path adjustment module  17 - 580  are described below. As shown in  FIG.  188   , the optical element driving module  17 - 570  mainly includes a driving mechanism  17 - 572  and a camera module  17 - 573 , wherein the driving mechanism  17 - 572  is used for moving the camera module  17 - 573  relative to the image sensor  17 - 590 . For example, the driving mechanism  17 - 572  may include a camera module holder  17 - 574 , a frame  17 - 575 , two spring sheets  17 - 576 , at least one coil  17 - 577 , and at least one magnetic element  17 - 578 . 
     The camera module  17 - 573  is affixed to the cameral module holder  17 - 574 . Two spring sheets  17 - 576  are connected to the cameral module holder  17 - 574  and the frame  17 - 575 , and respectively disposed on opposite sides of the cameral module holder  17 - 574 . Thus, the camera module holder  17 - 574  can be movably hung in the frame  17 - 575 . The coil  17 - 577  and the magnetic element  17 - 578  are respectively disposed on the cameral module holder  17 - 574  and the frame  17 - 575 , and correspond to each other. When current flows through the coil  17 - 577 , an electromagnetic effect is generated between the coil  17 - 577  and the magnetic element  17 - 578 , and the cameral module holder  17 - 574  and the camera module  17 - 573  disposed thereon can be driven to move relative to the image sensor  17 - 590 . 
     The optical path adjustment module  17 - 580  mainly includes an optical element  17 - 581 , an optical element holder  17 - 582 , a frame  17 - 583 , at least one hinge  17 - 584 , a driving module  17 - 585 , and a position sensor  17 - 586 . The driving module  17 - 585  can include a first electromagnetic drive assembly  17 - 587  and a second electromagnetic drive assembly  17 - 588 , respectively disposed on the frame  17 - 583  and the optical element holder  17 - 582  and corresponding to each other. 
     The optical element holder  17 - 582  may be affixed to the hinge  17 - 584 , and the hinge  17 - 584  is rotatable and disposed on the frame  17 - 583  (such as rotate through a bearing, not shown). Therefore, the optical element holder  17 - 582  can be pivotally connected to the frame  17 - 583  via the hinge  17 - 584 . Since the optical element  17 - 581  is disposed on the optical element holder  17 - 582 , when the optical element holder  17 - 582  rotates relative to the frame  17 - 583 , the optical element  17 - 581  disposed thereon also rotates relative to the frame  17 - 583 . The optical element  17 - 581  can be a prism or a reflecting mirror. 
     For example, the first electromagnetic drive assembly  17 - 587  may include a driving coil, and the second electromagnetic drive assembly  17 - 588  may include a magnet. When a current flows through the driving coil (the first electromagnetic drive assembly  17 - 587 ), an electromagnetic effect is generated between the driving coil and the magnet. Thus, the optical element holder  17 - 582  and the optical element  17 - 581  can be driven to rotate relative to the frame  17 - 583 , so as to adjust the position of the external light  17 - 508  on the image sensor  17 - 590 . With structured light, infrared ray or ultrasonic waves, this disclosure may achieve the effects of depth sensing, spatial scanning, etc. Additionally, this disclosure may be applied to spatial planning, compensating for the impact of the environment, improving the blurring of images or videos when the light is bad or weather is poor, and enhancing the quality of shooting or recording. 
     The position detector  17 - 586  can be disposed on the frame  17 - 583  and correspond to the second electromagnetic drive assembly  17 - 588 , so as to detect the position of the second electromagnetic drive assembly  17 - 588  to obtain the rotation angle of the optical element  17 - 581 . For example, the position detectors  17 - 586  can be Hall sensors, magnetoresistance effect sensors (MR sensor), giant magnetoresistance effect sensors (GMR sensor), tunneling magnetoresistance effect sensors (TMR sensor), or fluxgate sensors. 
     In some embodiments, the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  may be disposed between the camera module  17 - 573  and the optical element  17 - 581  and arranged with each other in the X direction for controlling the amount of light passing through the camera module  17 - 573 , as shown in  FIG.  188   . When viewed in the Y direction, the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 570  at least partially overlaps the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401 . For example, the optical element driving mechanism  17 - 570  at least partially overlaps the drive assembly  17 - 470 . Moreover, the camera module  17 - 573  at least partially overlaps the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  (such as partially overlaps the drive assembly  17 - 470 ). Moreover, the camera module  17 - 573  may be partially disposed in the light flux adjustment module  17 - 401  (such as partially disposed in the window formed of the through holes  17 - 412 ,  17 - 422  and  17 - 432 ). As a result, required space may be reduced to achieve miniaturization. 
     In summary, a light flux adjustment module is provided for adjusting light flux of light having an optical axis, including a fixed portion, a connecting element, a first blade, and a drive assembly. The fixed portion includes a window, and the light passes through the window. The connecting element is movably connected to the fixed portion. The first blade is movably connected to the connecting element and the fixed portion, and the first blade is adjacent to the window. The drive assembly is used for driving the connecting element to move relative to the fixed portion in a first moving dimension. When the connecting element is moved relative to the fixed portion in the first direction, the first blade is driven by the connecting element to move relative to the fixed portion in a second moving dimension, and the first moving dimension and the second moving dimension are different. Moreover, optical element driving mechanisms and optical systems using the light flux adjustment module are provided in the present disclosure as well. The light flux adjustment module may adjust the amount of light passed through, enhance the image quality, and achieve miniaturization. 
     Eighteenth Group of Embodiments 
     Please refer to  FIG.  189   , which shows a front view of an electronic device  18 - 10  according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The electronic device  18 - 10  can be a portable electronic device. As shown in  FIG.  189   , an optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  can be disposed on an upper side of a touch panel  18 - 12  of the electronic device  18 - 10 , and the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  can be an optical camera system and can be configured to hold and drive an optical element  18 -OE. The optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  can be installed in various electronic devices or portable electronic devices, such as a smartphone (for example, the electronic device  18 - 10 ), for allowing a user to perform the image capturing function. In this embodiment, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  can be a voice coil motor (VCM) with an auto-focusing (AF) function, but it is not limited thereto. In other embodiments, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  can also perform the functions of auto-focusing and optical image stabilization (OIS). 
     As shown in  FIG.  189   , when viewed along the optical axis  18 -O (the Z-axis direction) of the optical elements OE, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  has a rectangular structure. That is, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  has a long side  18 - 100 L and a short side  18 - 100 S which are not equal. In addition, the long side  18 - 100 L of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  and a long side  18 - 10 L of the electronic device  18 - 10  are not parallel. In addition, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  may have a photosensitive element  18 - 150 , configured to receive the light which travels through the optical element  18 -OE along the optical axis  18 -O. The photosensitive element  18 - 150  may also have a rectangular structure, and a longitudinal axis (along the X-axis) of the photosensitive element  18 - 150  is not parallel to a longitudinal axis (along the Y-axis) of the electronic device  18 - 10 . However, in other embodiments, the longitudinal axis of the photosensitive element  18 - 150  can be parallel to the longitudinal axis of the electronic device  18 - 10 . 
     Based on the above design of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100 , the performance of photographing can be improved, and both miniaturization and image quality improvement can be achieved at the same time. 
     Next, please refer to  FIG.  190    to  FIG.  192   .  FIG.  190    is an exploded diagram of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  according to an embodiment of the present disclosure,  FIG.  191    is a partial exploded diagram of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  according to an embodiment of the present disclosure, and  FIG.  192    is a cross-sectional view of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  along line  18 -A- 18 -A′ in  FIG.  191    according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  190   , in the present embodiment, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  can include a fixed assembly  18 -FA, a movable assembly  18 -MA, and a driving assembly  18 -DA. The movable assembly  18 -MA is movably connected to the fixed assembly  18 -FA, and the movable assembly  18 -MA is configured to hold the optical element  18 -OE. The driving assembly  18 -DA is configured to drive the movable assembly  18 -MA to move relative to the fixed assembly  18 -FA. 
     In this embodiment, as shown in  FIG.  190   , the fixed assembly  18 -FA includes a casing  18 - 102  and a base  18 - 112 . The movable assembly  18 -MA includes a lens holder  18 - 108  and the aforementioned optical element  18 -OE, and the lens holder  18 - 108  is used for holding the optical element  18 -OE. 
     As shown in  FIG.  190   , the casing  18 - 102  has a hollow structure, and a casing opening  18 - 1021  is formed thereon, and a base opening  18 - 1121  is formed on the base  18 - 112 . The center of the casing opening  18 - 1021  corresponds to the optical axis  18 - 0  of the optical element  18 -OE, and the base opening  18 - 1121  corresponds to a photosensitive element (such as the photosensitive element  18 - 150  in  FIG.  189   ) disposed under the base  18 - 112 . The external light can enter the casing  18 - 102  from the casing opening  18 - 1021  to be received by the photosensitive element  18 - 150  after passing through the optical element  18 -OE and the base opening  18 - 1121  so as to generate a digital image signal. 
     Furthermore, the casing  18 - 102  is disposed on the base  18 - 112  and may have an accommodating space  18 - 1023  for accommodating the movable assembly  18 -MA (including the aforementioned optical element  18 -OE and the lens holder  18 - 108 ) and the driving assembly  18 -DA. 
     The movable assembly  18 -MA may further include a first elastic member  18 - 106  and a second elastic member  18 - 110 . The outer portion (the outer ring portion) of the first elastic member  18 - 106  is fixed to the inner wall surface of the casing  18 - 102 , the outer portion (the outer ring portion) of the second elastic member  18 - 110  is fixed to the base  18 - 112 , and the inner portions (the inner ring portions) of the first elastic member  18 - 106  and the second elastic member  18 - 110  are respectively connected to the upper and lower sides of the lens holder  18 - 108 , so that the lens holder  18 - 108  can be suspended in the accommodating space  18 - 1023 . 
     In this embodiment, the driving assembly  18 -DA may include a first magnet  18 -M 11 , a second magnet  18 -M 12 , a first coil  18 -CL 11 , and a second coil  18 -CL 12 . The first coil  18 -CL 11  and the second coil  18 -CL 12  are disposed on the lens holder  18 - 108 , and the first magnet  18 -M 11  and the second magnet  18 -M 12  are disposed on the inner wall surface of the casing  18 - 102  respectively corresponding to the first coil  18 -CL 11  and the second coil  18 -CL 12 . 
     In this embodiment, the first coil  18 -CL 11  and the second coil  18 -CL 12  may be wound coils and be disposed on opposite sides of the lens holder  18 - 108 . When the first coil  18 -CL 11  and the second coil  18 -CL 12  are provided with electricity, the first coil  18 -CL 11  and the second coil  18 -CL 12  respectively act with the first magnet  18 -M 11  and the second magnet  18 -M 12  to generate an electromagnetic force, so as to drive the lens holder  18 - 108  and the held optical element  18 -OE to move relative to the base  18 - 112  along the optical axis  18 -O (the Z-axis). 
     Furthermore, please refer to  FIG.  193   , which is a cross-sectional view of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  along line B-B′ in  FIG.  191    according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. In this embodiment, the optical element  18 -OE may define a first section  18 -SG 1 , a second section  18 -SG 2 , and a central section  18 -CG disposed between the first section  18 -SG 1  and the second section  18 -SG 2 . When viewed in a direction perpendicular to the optical axis  18 -O (for example, along the X-axis), the maximum size of the first section  18 -SG 1  is different from the maximum size of the second section  18 -SG 2  (for example, along the Y-axis). 
     As shown in  FIG.  193   , the central section  18 -CG has an intermediate surface ICS that is not parallel to the optical axis  18 -O, and the lens holder  18 - 108  of the movable assembly  18 -MA has an opening  18 - 108 H (the moving assembly opening) for accommodating the optical element  18 -OE, and the opening  18 - 108 H corresponds to the optical axis  18 -O. 
     When viewed in the direction perpendicular to the optical axis  18 -O, as shown in  FIG.  193   , the maximum size of the base opening  18 - 1121  (the fixed assembly opening) is different from the maximum size of the opening  18 - 108 H, and the central section  18 -CG is located between the opening  18 - 108 H and the base opening  18 - 1121 . In this embodiment, the base opening  18 - 1121  is larger than the opening  18 - 108 H, but it is not limited thereto. In other embodiments, the opening  18 - 108 H can be larger than the base opening  18 - 1121 . 
     The first section  18 -SG 1  includes a first lens barrel  18 -OE 1  and a first lens  18 -LS 1 . The second section  18 -SG 2  includes a second lens barrel  18 -OE 2  and a second lens  18 -LS 2 , and the diameters of the first lens  18 -LS 1  and the second lens  18 -LS 2  are different. 
     In this embodiment, the lens holder  18 - 108  is fixedly connected to at least one of the first lens barrel  18 -OE 1 , the second lens barrel  18 -OE 2 , and the central section  18 -CG by an adhesive element, such as glue. 
     Specifically, please refer to  FIG.  190    and  FIG.  194   .  FIG.  194    is a perspective cross-sectional diagram of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The lens holder  18 - 108  can include a body  18 - 1081  and a contacting portion  18 - 1082 , and the contacting portion  18 - 1082  can be a platform disposed between the optical element  18 -OE and the body  18 - 1081 . Therefore, a gap is formed between the central section  18 -CG and the lens holder  18 - 108  of the movable assembly  18 -MA, and then adhesive element  18 -GU can be disposed in the gap. 
     Furthermore, as shown in  FIG.  194   , the lens holder  18 - 108  of the movable assembly  18 -MA has a first surface  18 -S 1  and a second surface  18 -S 2  which are perpendicular to each other, and a first portion  18 -GU 1  of the adhesive element  18 -GU is connected to the first surface  18 -S 1 . A second portion  18 -GU 2  of the adhesive element  18 -GU is connected to the second surface  18 -S 2 , and the size of the first portion  18 -GU 1  is larger than that of the second portion  18 -GU 2 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  191    and  FIG.  193   . The lens holder  18 - 108  of the movable assembly  18 -MA may have a polygonal structure. In this embodiment, the lens holder  18 - 108  has a rectangular structure, and the lens holder  18 - 108  has a first side  18 - 1083 , a second side  18 - 1084 , and two concave grooves  18 - 108 C. The concave groove  18 - 108 C is disposed on the first side  18 - 1083  of the lens holder  18 - 108 , and the concave groove  18 - 108 C is formed along a direction parallel to the optical axis  18 -O. When viewed along the optical axis  18 -O, the concave groove  18 - 108 C only partially overlaps the first section  18 -SG 1  or the second section  18 -SG 2 . As shown in  FIG.  193   , in this embodiment, the concave groove  18 - 108 C partially overlaps the second section  18 -SG 2 . 
     Furthermore, the optical element  18 -OE may have a first corresponding portion  18 -OEP exposed from the concave groove  18 - 108 C and directly facing a side wall  18 - 1025  of the casing  18 - 102 , and the side wall  18 - 1025  is parallel to the optical axis  18 -O. When viewed in the direction perpendicular to the optical axis  18 -O, as shown in  FIG.  193   , no part of the movable assembly  18 -MA is located between the first corresponding portion  18 -OEP and the side wall  18 - 1025 . Specifically, no element is disposed between the first corresponding portion  18 -OEP and the side wall  18 - 1025 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  191    and  FIG.  193   , the lens holder  18 - 108  further has a projecting portion  18 - 108 P. The projecting portion  18 - 108 P and the concave groove  18 - 108 C are arranged along the direction parallel to the optical axis  18 -O. The projecting portion  18 - 108 P extends along the direction parallel to the optical axis  18 -O. When viewed along the optical axis  18 -O, as shown in  FIG.  193   , the projecting portion  18 - 108 P, the concave groove  18 - 108 C, and the second section  18 -SG 2  are partially overlapped. 
     Furthermore, as shown in  FIG.  191    and  FIG.  192   , the lens holder  18 - 108  of the movable assembly  18 -MA is elastically connected to the fixed assembly  18 -FA via the first elastic member  18 - 106  and the second elastic member  18 - 110 . The inner portion (a first movable connecting portion  18 - 1061 ) of the first elastic member  18 - 106  is fixedly disposed on the projecting portion  18 - 108 P, and the inner portion (a second movable connecting portion  18 - 1101 ) of the second elastic member  18 - 110  is fixedly disposed on the bottom of the lens holder  18 - 108 . 
     In addition, please refer to  FIG.  195   , which is a bottom view of a part of the structure of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. At least a part of the first movable connecting portion  18 - 1061  does not overlap the second movable connecting portion  18 - 1101  when viewed in the direction parallel to the optical axis  18 -O. 
     Please refer to  FIG.  191    and  FIG.  196   .  FIG.  196    is a top view of a part of the structure of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. In this embodiment, the base  18 - 112  can have at least one protrusion  18 - 112 P, and the protrusion  18 - 112 P and the concave groove  18 - 108 C are located on the first side  18 - 1083  of the lens holder  18 - 108 . The protrusion  18 - 112 P partially overlaps the concave groove  18 - 108 C when viewed along the optical axis  18 -O (the Z-axis). 
     Please refer to  FIG.  197    and  FIG.  198   .  FIG.  197    is a partial structural diagram of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  according to another embodiment of the present disclosure, and  FIG.  198    is a top view of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  in  FIG.  197    according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. In this embodiment, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  can further include a position sensing assembly  18 - 160  for sensing the movement of the movable assembly  18 -MA relative to the fixed assembly  18 -FA, such as sensing the movement of the lens holder  18 - 108  relative to the base  18 - 112 . The position sensing assembly  18 - 160  can include a magnet  18 - 161 , a position sensor  18 - 163 , and a circuit board  18 - 165 . The magnet  18 - 161  is disposed on the first side  18 - 1083  of the lens holder  18 - 108 , and the position sensor  18 - 163  is disposed on the circuit board  18 - 165  and is configured to sense the change of the magnetic field of the magnet  18 - 161 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  198   , when viewed in a direction parallel to the first side  18 - 1083  (for example, viewed in the X-axis), the magnet  18 - 161  partially overlaps the concave groove  18 - 108 C. 
     Furthermore, a portion of the driving assembly  18 -DA (the second coil  18 -CL 12  and the second magnet  18 -M 12 ) is disposed on the second side  18 - 1084  of the lens holder  18 - 108 . When viewed along the X-axis, a central axis  18 -AX of the second magnet  18 -M 12  is offset from the central axis (the optical axis  18 -O) of the optical element  18 -OE. That is, a length  18 -L 12  of the second magnet  18 -M 12  is smaller than a length  18 -L 11  of the first magnet  18 -M 11 . Based on this design, it can prevent the position sensing assembly  18 - 160  from being interfered with by the magnetic field generated by the second magnet  18 -M 12 . 
     Please refer to  FIG.  199   , which is a cross-sectional view of the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  according to another embodiment of the present disclosure. In this embodiment, the casing  18 - 102  is made of a plastic material, and the position sensor  18 - 163  of the position sensing assembly  18 - 160  is disposed at the casing  18 - 102 . 
     Specifically, the casing  18 - 102  includes a side wall  18 - 1025 , and the side wall  18 - 1025  has a first side surface  18 - 1026  and a second side surface  18 - 1027  opposite to each other. The second side surface  18 - 1027  faces the optical element  18 -OE, and an accommodating groove  18 - 102 C is formed on the first side surface  18 - 1026  and is configured to accommodate the position sensor  18 - 163 . In other embodiments, the casing  18 - 102  may not have the accommodating groove  18 - 102 C, and the position sensor  18 - 163  may be disposed directly on the first side surface  18 - 1026 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  199   , the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  may further include a protective element  18 -PE disposed in the accommodating groove  18 - 102 C and covering the position sensor  18 - 163 . The protective element  18 -PE may be glue configured to fix and protect the position sensor  18 - 163 . 
     In this embodiment, as shown in  FIG.  199   , the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  may further include a circuit member  18 - 170  embedded in the casing  18 - 102  of the fixed assembly  18 -FA, and the circuit member  18 - 170  is configured to be electrically connected to the position sensor  18 - 163  and an external circuit. The circuit member  18 - 170  can be implemented by insert molding technology, but it is not limited to this embodiment. 
     The present disclosure provides an optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  disposed in a portable electronic device. Because the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  has a rectangular structure, the area of the touch panel  18 - 12  of the portable electronic device can be designed to be larger. In addition, the optical element driving mechanism  18 - 100  having the rectangular structure can improve the performance of the photographing, achieve the purpose of miniaturization, and improve image quality at the same time. 
     In addition, in some embodiments of the present disclosure, the lens holder  18 - 108  has a rectangular structure, and two concave grooves  18 - 108 C are disposed on the two first sides  18 - 1083  of the rectangular structure. The concave grooves  18 - 108 C are configured to accommodate a portion of the optical element  18 -OE, so that the lens holder  18 - 108  with a rectangular structure can accommodate a larger optical element  18 -OE, thereby improving the quality of the image. 
     Nineteenth Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  200    is a perspective view of an optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  and an optical element  19 - 2  in accordance with some embodiments of this disclosure. When an electronic device (e.g. a smart phone) is provided with the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 , the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  may be disposed in the front of the smart phone as a front lens along with the optical element  19 - 2 . The optical element  19 - 2  has an optical axis  19 -O. The optical axis  19 -O is an imaginary axis passing through the center of the optical element  19 - 2 .  FIG.  201    is an exploded view of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  in  FIG.  200   . The optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  includes a fixed part  19 -P 1 , a movable part  19 -P 2 , a driving assembly  19 - 40 , and a sensing assembly  19 - 80 . The movable part  19 -P 2  moves relative to the fixed part  19 -P 1  and may hold the optical element  19 - 2 . The driving assembly  19 - 40  drives the movable part  19 -P 2  to move relative to the fixed part  19 -P 1 . The sensing assembly  19 - 80  senses the movement of the movable part  19 -P 2  relative to the fixed part  19 -P 1 . 
     The fixed part  19 -P 1  has a main axis  19 -M. The main axis  19 -M passes through the center of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . It should be noted that when the optical element  19 - 2 , the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  and a light-detection element (not shown) (e.g. a charge-coupled detector, CCD) are aligned, the optical axis  19 -O of the optical element  19 - 2  also passes through the center of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  so that the optical axis  19 -O of the optical element  19 - 2  coincides with the main axis  19 -M of the fixed part  19 -P 1 . However, movement, vibration, or tilt of the movable part  19 -P 2  may cause the optical axis  19 -O of the optical element  19 - 2  not coincide with the main axis  19 -M of the fixed part  19 -P 1  because the optical element  19 - 2  is disposed in the movable part  19 -P 2 . 
     In this embodiment, the fixed part  19 -P 1  includes a case  19 - 10 , a circuit assembly  19 - 60 , and a bottom  19 - 70 . The movable part  19 -P 2  includes a first elastic element  19 - 20 , a holder  19 - 30 , and two second elastic elements  19 - 50 . The driving assembly  19 - 40  includes two magnetic elements  19 - 41  and two coils  19 - 42 . The sensing assembly  19 - 80  includes a sensed object  19 - 81  and a sensor  19 - 82 . It should be noted that the elements may be added or omitted according with the requirements of the users. 
     The case  19 - 10 , the circuit assembly  19 - 60 , and the bottom  19 - 70  of the fixed part  19 -P 1  are arranged sequentially along the main axis  19 -M. The case  19 - 10  is located over the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and the bottom  19 - 70 . The case  19 - 10  may be made of metal material or non-metal material such as plastics. The case  19 - 10  made of non-metal material may isolate electromagnetic wave. In this way, the electromagnetic wave interference generated by an antenna close to the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  may be reduced. 
     The case  19 - 10  includes a top surface  19 - 11  and four sidewalls  19 - 12  extending from the edge of the top surface  19 - 11  along the main axis  19 -M. The bottom  19 - 70  has an opening  19 - 71 . The sidewalls  19 - 12  of the case  19 - 10  are connected to the bottom  19 - 70  and the space formed therein may accommodate the movable part  19 -P 2 , the driving assembly  19 - 40 , and the sensing assembly  19 - 80 , and the like. 
     The circuit assembly  19 - 60  is disposed on the bottom  19 - 70 . The circuit assembly  19 - 60  may be a circuit board such as a flexible print circuit (FPC) or a flexible-hard composite board. The circuit assembly  19 - 60  is connected to an outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120 . The current may be supplied to the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  via the outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120 . How the current flows through the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  is described in detail in the following content. 
     The first elastic element  19 - 20 , the holder  19 - 30 , and the second elastic elements  19 - 50  of the movable part  19 -P 2  are arranged along the main axis  19 -M sequentially. The holder  19 - 30  has a through hole  19 - 31  for holding the optical element  19 - 2 . A screw and its corresponding threaded structure may be configured between the through hole  19 - 31  and the optical element  19 - 2 , so that the optical element  19 - 2  may be affixed in the holder  19 - 30 . 
     The first elastic element  19 - 20  and the second elastic elements  19 - 50  may be made of metal material. The holder  19 - 30  may be movably connected to the case  19 - 10  and the bottom  19 - 70  by being held elastically by the first elastic element  19 - 20  and the second elastic elements  19 - 50 . Held between the first elastic element  19 - 20  and the second elastic elements  19 - 50 , the holder  19 - 30  is not in direct contact with the case  19 - 10  and the bottom  19 - 70 . Additionally, the range of motion of the holder  19 - 30  is also restricted to avoid the holder  19 - 30  and the optical element  19 - 2  therein get damaged because of collision with the case  19 - 10  or the bottom  19 - 70  when the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  moves or is impacted. 
     The position of each of the magnetic elements  19 - 41  of the driving assembly  19 - 40  corresponds to the position of each of the coils  19 - 42  of the driving assembly  19 - 40 . The magnetic elements  19 - 41  and the coils  19 - 42  are disposed close to the holder  19 - 30 . The magnetic elements  19 - 41  may be permanent magnets. The arrangement direction of the pair of magnetic poles (N-pole and S-pole) of the magnetic elements  19 - 41  is parallel to the main axis  19 -M. The magnetic elements  19 - 41  and the coil  19 - 42  are substantially rectangular. The long side of each of the magnetic elements  19 - 41  corresponds to the long side of each of the coils  19 - 42 . When the current is supplied to the coils  19 - 42 , magnetic force may be generated between the magnetic elements  19 - 41  and the coils  19 - 42  for driving the holder  19 - 30  and the optical element  19 - 2  therein to move along the optical axis  19 -O. Each of the coils  19 - 42  has a winding axis  19 - 421  that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M and parallel to the plane on which the circuit assembly  19 - 60  is located. Compared to the configuration of the winding axis  19 - 421  that is parallel to the main axis  19 -M, the configuration of the coils  19 - 42  in this embodiment may reduce the size of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  in a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M. Furthermore, when viewed along the main axis  19 -M, the driving assembly  19 - 40  partially overlaps the circuit assembly  19 - 60 , which may also reduce the size of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  in a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M. 
     The position of the sensed object  19 - 81  of the sensing assembly  19 - 80  corresponds to the position of the sensor  19 - 82  of the sensing assembly  19 - 80 . Please refer to  FIG.  202    first.  FIG.  202    is a schematic view of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . The sensed object  19 - 81  is disposed close to the holder  19 - 30 . The holder  19 - 30  includes a receiving space  19 - 32  for receiving the sensed object  19 - 81 . The sensor  19 - 82  is disposed on the bottom  19 - 70 . Particularly, the sensor  19 - 82  is mounted to the surface of the circuit assembly  19 - 60  that faces the bottom  19 - 70  by surface mount technology (SMT) and the like. The bottom  19 - 70  includes a receiving portion  19 - 72  for receiving the sensor  19 - 82 . The receiving portion  19 - 72  may penetrate through (e.g. as a through hole) or may not penetrate through (e.g. as a recess) the bottom  19 - 70 . Therefore, the circuit assembly  19 - 60  is disposed between the holder  19 - 30  and the sensor  19 - 82 . The sensed object  19 - 81  may be a magnetic element such as a magnet. The sensor  19 - 82  may be a giant magneto resistance (GMR) sensor, a tunneling magneto resistance (TMR) sensor, and the like. When the holder  19 - 30  moves, the sensed object  19 - 81  close to the holder  19 - 30  also moves, and thus the magnetic field of the sensed object  19 - 81  changes. The sensor  19 - 82  may sense the change of the magnetic field of the sensed object  19 - 81  in order to know the position of the holder  19 - 30  and adjust the position of the holder  19 - 30 , achieving the effects of controlling the movement of the holder  19 - 30 . 
     Next, please refer to  FIG.  203    to  FIG.  206   .  FIG.  203    is a perspective view of the holder  19 - 30 .  FIG.  204    is a top view of the circuit assembly  19 - 60 .  FIG.  205    is a top view of the bottom  19 - 70 .  FIG.  206    is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  203   , the holder  19 - 30  includes three stopping portions  19 - 33 . The sensed object  19 - 81  is disposed on one of the corners of the holder  19 - 30 , and the three stopping portions  19 - 33  of the holder  19 - 30  are disposed on the other three corners of the holder  19 - 30 . As shown in  FIG.  204   , the circuit assembly  19 - 60  includes three concave portions  19 - 63 . As shown in  FIG.  205   , the bottom  19 - 70  includes three recesses  19 - 73 . When the holder  19 - 30 , the circuit assembly  19 - 60 , and the bottom  19 - 70  arranged in a stack, the sensed object  19 - 81  disposed on the holder  19 - 30  corresponds to the sensor  19 - 82  disposed on the bottom  19 - 70 . The three stopping portions  19 - 33  correspond to the three concave portions  19 - 63  of the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and the three recesses  19 - 73  of the bottom  19 - 70 . 
     The stopping portions  19 - 33  may restrict the range of motion of the holder  19 - 30  relative to the bottom  19 - 70 . As shown in  FIG.  206   , when the holder  19 - 30  moves, the stopping portions  19 - 33  pass through the concave portions  19 - 63  of the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and are not blocked by the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . Specifically, when the holder  19 - 30  moves toward the bottom  19 - 70 , a portion of the stopping portions  19 - 33  is located in the concave portions  19 - 63 . At the same time, when viewed along a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M, the stopping portions  19 - 33  partially overlap the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . 
     When the driving assembly  19 - 40  drives the holder  19 - 30  to move along the optical axis  19 -O and reach the limit, the stopping portions  19 - 33  contact the recesses  19 - 73  of the bottom  19 - 70 , and thus the rest of the portions of the holder  19 - 30  cannot contact the bottom  19 - 70  so as to prevent the rest of the portions of the holder  19 - 30  from colliding with the bottom  19 - 70 . Therefore, the holder  19 - 30  and the optical element  19 - 2  therein don&#39;t get damaged because the bottom  19 - 70  does not collide with bottom  19 - 70  thanks to the stopping portions  19 - 33 . 
     Furthermore, the number and the positions of the stopping portions  19 - 33  may be adjusted. There may be one or more stopping portions  19 - 33 . For example, in this embodiment, there are three stopping portions  19 - 33 , so there are three contact areas between the three stopping portions  19 - 33  and the bottom  19 - 70 . In such an embodiment, three contact areas may effectively attribute collision force and enhance the stability of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . Additionally, in this embodiment, the stopping portions  19 - 33  are part of the holder  19 - 30  and the recesses  19 - 73  that are in contact with the stopping portions  19 - 33  are part of the bottom  19 - 70 . However, the bottom  19 - 70  may include a stopping portion (not shown) to substitute the recesses  19 - 73 , so that the stopping portions  19 - 33  of the holder  19 - 30  correspond to the stopping portion of the bottom  19 - 70 . Alternatively, only one of the holder  19 - 30  and the bottom  19 - 70  includes one or more stopping portions. For example, the sensor  19 - 82  is disposed in one of the corners of the bottom  19 - 70  while the one or more stopping portions are disposed in the other corners of the bottom  19 - 70 . 
     Additionally, as shown in  FIG.  205   , the bottom  19 - 70  includes four supporting platforms  19 - 75 . The height of the supporting platforms  19 - 75  is higher than that of the rest of the portions of the bottom  19 - 70 . That is, the supporting platforms  19 - 75  are closer to the top surface  19 - 11  of the case  19 - 10  than the rest of the portions of the bottom  19 - 70 . When viewed along the main axis  19 -M, the supporting platforms  19 - 75  do not overlap the sensor  19 - 82 . The functions of the supporting platforms  19 - 75  will be described further in the following content. 
       FIG.  207    is a perspective view of a portion of the bottom  19 - 70 . In the following drawings, only one of the supporting platforms  19 - 75  is shown. The optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  further includes a loop member  19 - 90 . A portion of the loop member  19 - 90  is embedded in the bottom  19 - 70  by insert molding and the like. The loop member  19 - 90  including a first electrical connection portion  19 - 91  and a second electrical connection portion  19 - 92  is used as the conduction wire of the bottom  19 - 70  to be electrically connected to other elements. As shown in  FIG.  207   , the first electrical connection portion  19 - 91  is revealed from the supporting platform  19 - 75  of the bottom  19 - 70 . 
       FIG.  208    is a perspective view of a portion of one of the second elastic elements  19 - 50 , the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and the bottom  19 - 70 .  FIG.  209    is a schematic view of a portion of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 .  FIG.  208    and  FIG.  209    further illustrate the second elastic element  19 - 50  and the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . As shown in  FIG.  208   , the second elastic element  19 - 50  includes a connection portion  19 - 51  and a deformation portion  19 - 52 . The connection portion  19 - 51  is fixedly disposed on the supporting platform  19 - 75  of the bottom  19 - 70 . Therefore, the deformation of the second elastic element  19 - 50  is mainly achieved by extending or shortening the deformation portion  19 - 52 . Additionally, the deformation of the second elastic element  19 - 50  meets the target of holding the holder  19 - 30  elastically together with the first elastic element  19 - 20 . The supporting platform  19 - 75  does not overlap the circuit assembly  19 - 60  when viewed along the main axis  19 -M. Therefore, the first electrical connection portion  19 - 91  does not overlap the circuit assembly  19 - 60  when viewed along a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M, either. 
     As shown in  FIG.  208    and  FIG.  209   , the loop member  19 - 90  is electrically connected to the second elastic element  19 - 50  at the first electrical connection portion  19 - 91  and electrically connected to the circuit assembly  19 - 60  at the second electrical connection portion  19 - 92 . The distance between the first electrical connection portion  19 - 91  and the top surface  19 - 11  of the case  19 - 10  in the direction of the main axis  19 -M is different than the distance between the second electrical connection portion  19 - 92  and the top surface  19 - 11  of the case  19 - 10  in the direction of the main axis  19 -M. Furthermore, the height of the supporting platform  19 - 75  is higher than the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . That is, the supporting platform  19 - 75  is closer to the top surface  19 - 11  of the case  19 - 10  in the direction of the main axis  19 -M. 
     When the second elastic element  19 - 50  deforms, the second elastic element  19 - 50  does not contact the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . It is because the connection portion  19 - 51  is disposed on the supporting platform  19 - 75  and the deformation portion  19 - 52  is spaced apart a distance from the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . The problem of black spots on the images or video caused by the particle or debris generated by the collision of the elements is prevented by the existence of the supporting platform  19 - 75 . 
     Next, how the loop member  19 - 90  is electrically connected to the circuit assembly  19 - 60  at the second electrical connection portion  19 - 92  will be described with reference to  FIG.  210    and  FIG.  211   .  FIG.  210    and  FIG.  211    are perspective views of a portion of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  illustrated in a different perspective.  FIG.  210    and  FIG.  211    show the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  from the bottom. The optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  further includes an electrical connection piece  19 - 100 . The electrical connection piece  19 - 100  may be any material (such as Tin) that may make any elements be electrically connected to other elements. A portion of the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  is disposed on the surface of the circuit assembly  19 - 60  which faces the bottom  19 - 70 . The portion of the loop member  19 - 90  that revealed from the bottom surface of the bottom  19 - 70  is electrically connected to the circuit assembly  19 - 60  via the electrical connection piece  19 - 100 . That is, the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  is disposed between the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and the bottom  19 - 70  to ensure the current passes through normally. In some embodiments, the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  may be omitted, and the circuit assembly  19 - 60  is electrically connected to the loop member  19 - 90  by any methods for making any elements be electrically connected to other elements such as fusion, application of conductive glue, and the like. 
     The optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  may further include an adhesion element  19 - 110 . Compared to  FIG.  210   ,  FIG.  211    further illustrates one of the sidewalls  19 - 12  of the case  19 - 10  and the adhesion element  19 - 110 . When the case  19 - 10  is connected to the bottom  19 - 70 , the sidewall  19 - 12  is close to a side of the electrical connection piece  19 - 100 , so that the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  partially overlaps the sidewall  19 - 12  of the case  19 - 10  when viewed along a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M. The adhesion element  19 - 110  may be an adhesion material or an insulating material such as resin. The adhesion element  19 - 110  is disposed between the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and the bottom  19 - 70 . Additionally, the adhesion element  19 - 110  directly contacts the surface of the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and the surface of the bottom  19 - 70 . In some embodiments, the adhesion element  19 - 110  directly contacts the case  19 - 10  to strengthen the connection between the case  19 - 10  and the bottom  19 - 70 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  211   , the adhesion element  19 - 110  directly contacts the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  and covers the electrical connection piece  19 - 100 . Normally, the adhesion element  19 - 110  has good elasticity and good covering ability and thus the adhesion element  19 - 110  may protect the electrical connection piece  19 - 100 , i.e. the position where the circuit assembly  19 - 60  is electrically connected to the loop member  19 - 90 . Additionally, the adhesion element  19 - 110  may reduce the probability of particles such as dust or mist entering the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . If the adhesion element  19 - 110  is made of insulating material, insulation may be achieved. The steps for applying the adhesion element  19 - 110  is normally referred to as “glue dispensing”, which may be conducted manually or mechanically. 
       FIG.  212    is a perspective view of a portion of the bottom  19 - 70  illustrated in another different perspective to show the outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  and an electronic element  19 - 130 . The sensor  19 - 82  partially overlaps the bottom  19 - 70  when viewed along a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M. Additionally, the bottom surface of the bottom  19 - 70  is farther away from the top surface  19 - 11  of the case  19 - 10  than the bottom surface of the sensor  19 - 82  in the direction of the main axis  19 -M, so that the receiving portion  19 - 72  may protect the sensor  19 - 82 . In some embodiments, the size of the sensor  19 - 82  in the direction of the main axis  19 -M is smaller than the receiving portion  19 - 72  of the bottom  19 - 70  in the direction of the main axis  19 -M. Furthermore, the bottom surface of the bottom  19 - 70  is farther away from the top surface  19 - 11  of the case  19 - 10  than the bottom surface of the sensor  19 - 82 . Furthermore, the sensor  19 - 82  is disposed in the receiving portion  19 - 72  and thus other spaces are not occupied, which is also advantageous for miniaturization of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . Also, the adhesion element  19 - 110  may also be disposed in the receiving portion  19 - 72  to further strengthen the structure of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . Under such circumstances, the adhesion element  19 - 110  directly contacts the sensor  19 - 82 , the circuit assembly  19 - 60 , and the bottom  19 - 70 . 
     As shown in  FIG.  212   , the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  further includes the electronic element  19 - 130 . The bottom  19 - 70  includes two baffles  19 - 77 . The baffles  19 - 77  contact the outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  to increase the structural strength. The electronic element  19 - 130  may be a capacitance, an inductance, a filter, an integrated circuit, and the like. The electronic element  19 - 130  is disposed on a side of the circuit assembly  19 - 60  which is close to the outside-connection circuit member  130 . Similarly, the adhesion element  19 - 110  may also be disposed on the electronic element  19 - 130 , so that the adhesion element  19 - 110  directly contacts the circuit assembly  19 - 60  and the electronic element  19 - 130 . 
     As described above, the adhesion element  19 - 110  may adhere several elements to each other at the same time by only applying the adhesion element  19 - 110  (i.e. glue dispensing) one time. By such operation, the process is simplified, the production efficiency is enhanced, and the adhesion strength is increased. 
       FIG.  213    is a bottom view of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 , which shows the whole bottom  19 - 70  while  FIG.  210    to  FIG.  212    only illustrate a portion of the bottom  19 - 70 . As shown in  FIG.  213   , the bottom  19 - 70  is rectangular, including two opposite long sides  19 -L 1  and two opposite short sides  19 -L 2 . For example, each of the long sides  19 -L 1  may be 9.5 mm, and each of the short sides  19 -L 2  may be 8.5 mm. The loop member  19 - 90  and the outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  are respectively disposed on the two opposite short sides  19 -L 2  to avoid increasing the length of the long sides  19 -L 1  and enhance the usage of the space to achieve miniaturization. 
       FIG.  214    is a perspective view of a portion of the holder  19 - 30 . The holder  19 - 30  includes two protrusions  19 - 301  located on opposite sides of the holder  19 - 30  and extends toward the sidewall  19 - 12  of the case  19 - 10 . For simplicity, only one of the protrusions  19 - 301  and one of the coils  19 - 42  are shown here. A portion of the coil  19 - 42  surrounds the protrusion  19 - 301 . For example, the lead extending from the coil  19 - 42  winds the protrusion  19 - 301 , so that the coil  19 - 42  may be electrically connected to other elements. When viewed along the main axis  19 -M, the top surface of protrusion  19 - 301  is rectangular including two opposite long sides  19 - 3011  and two opposite short sides  19 - 3012 . Also, when viewed along a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  19 -M, the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  is also rectangular, and the ratio of the long side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  to the short side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  is between about 1.5 to about 3.0. If the ratio of the long side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  to the short side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  is less than 1.5, for example, the ratio of the long side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  to the short side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  is 1.0 and thus the cross-section of protrusion  19 - 301  is square-shaped, the lead may drop off the protrusion  19 - 301  because the lead may rotate easily. If the ratio of the long side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  to the short side of the cross-section of the protrusion  19 - 301  is greater than 3.0, then the protrusion  19 - 301  may be too big and be disadvantageous for miniaturization of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . 
     To prevent the lead from dropping off, the protrusion  19 - 301  further includes two projections  19 - 302  disposed on the edge of the protrusion  19 - 301 . Particularly, the projections  19 - 302  are disposed on the short side of the rectangular top surface of the protrusion  19 - 301 . That is, when viewed from the extending direction of the protrusion  19 - 301 , the projections  19 - 302  are disposed on the short sides  19 - 3012  of the protrusion  19 - 301 . However, there may be only one projection  19 - 302 , or, the projections  19 - 302  may be omitted. When viewed along the main axis  19 -M, the profile of the protrusion  19 - 301  and the projections  19 - 302  is substantially T-shaped. 
       FIG.  215    is a perspective view of a portion of the holder  19 - 30  and the second elastic element  19 - 50 . A portion of the second elastic element  19 - 50  is disposed on the top surface of the protrusion  19 - 301  and abuts the edge of the protrusion  19 - 301 . Particularly, the second elastic element  19 - 50  abuts the long side of the rectangular top surface of the protrusion  19 - 301 . That is, when viewed from the extending direction of the protrusion  19 - 301 , a portion of the second elastic element  19 - 50  is disposed on the long side  19 - 3011  of the protrusion  19 - 301 , so the second elastic element  19 - 50  may have greater mechanical strength. The electrical connection piece  19 - 100  may be disposed on the top surface of the protrusion  19 - 301 , so that the coil  19 - 42  is electrically connected to the second elastic element  19 - 50 . 
     How the current passes through the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  is described in detail herein. The outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  is connected to a power supply (not shown) outside the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . The outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  includes several pins for the current to flow in or flow out. The direction of the current is controlled according to the desired movement direction for correction, for example, whether the holder  19 - 30  moves toward or away from the bottom  19 - 70 . 
     The current first flows through the circuit in the circuit assembly  19 - 60  that connects to the outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  and flows through the sensor  19 - 82  disposed in the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . Next, the current flows to the loop member  19 - 90  via the second electrical connection portion  19 - 92 , and then the current flows to the second elastic element  19 - 50  via the first electrical connection portion  19 - 91 . As shown in  FIG.  215   , the second elastic element  19 - 50  is electrically connected to the coil  19 - 42  at the protrusion  19 - 301  of the holder  19 - 30 . Therefore, the current flows to the coils  19 - 42  so as to generate electromagnetic force with the magnetic elements  19 - 41 . Next, the current flows to the protrusion  19 - 301  on the opposite side, and flows through the coil  19 - 42  on the opposite side, the second elastic element  19 - 50 , the loop member  19 - 90 , the circuit assembly  19 - 60 , and the outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  consecutively. Finally, the current flows out the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . To sum up, the outside-connection circuit member  19 - 120  is electrically connected to the sensor  19 - 82  via the circuit assembly  19 - 60 . Also, the sensor  19 - 82  is electrically connected to the driving assembly  19 - 40  via the current that consecutively flows through the circuit assembly  19 - 60 , the loop member  19 - 90 , and the second elastic element  19 - 50 . 
     Next, some other different embodiments will be described. Additionally, the same elements are denoted by the same symbols, similar elements are denoted by similar symbols, and related contents are not repeated. 
       FIG.  216    is perspective view of a portion of an optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 A in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. The difference between the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 A and the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  is that the loop member  19 - 90  of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 A includes at least one projecting portion  19 - 90 A corresponding to the second elastic element  19 - 50  and the circuit assembly  19 - 60  at the same time. Under such circumstances, the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  directly contacts the second elastic element  19 - 50 , the circuit assembly  19 - 60 , and the loop member  19 - 90  to make aforementioned elements be electrically connected to each other by only applying the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  (e.g. Tin welding) one time without applying the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  more than one time at different positions respectively (such as the first electrical connection portion  19 - 91  and the second electrical connection portion  19 - 92  as shown in  FIG.  209   ). Therefore, the process is simplified and the production efficiency is enhanced. For the convenience of illustration, there are two projecting portions  19 - 90 A in  FIG.  216   , but only one electrical connection piece  19 - 100  is shown. 
       FIG.  217    is a bottom view of an optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 B in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. Please also refer to  FIG.  213    in order to understand the difference between the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 B and the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . The difference between the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 B and the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1  is that the loop member  19 - 90  is electrically connected to the circuit assembly  19 - 60  at the position that is close to the opening  19 - 71  of the bottom  19 - 70 . Therefore, the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  is disposed on the edge of the opening  19 - 71  of the bottom  19 - 70 , and a portion of the bottom  19 - 70  is located between the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  and the sidewall  19 - 12  of the case  19 - 10 . When the case  19 - 10  is made of metal, short cut caused by the contact between the electrical connection piece  19 - 100  and the sidewall  19 - 12  of the case  19 - 10  is prevented by such configuration. In other words, the position where the loop member  19 - 90  is electrically connected to the circuit assembly  19 - 60  may be configured arbitrarily with regard to the factors such as the material of the case  19 - 10 . 
       FIG.  218    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 C in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure. Please also refer to  FIG.  202    in order to understand the difference between the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 C and the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 . In this embodiment, the circuit assembly  19 - 60  of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 C is disposed under the bottom  19 - 70 . However, the sensor  19 - 82  is mounted on the surface of the circuit assembly  19 - 60  that faces the bottom  19 - 70  by SMT and the like. The sensor  19 - 82  is received in the receiving portion  19 - 72  of the bottom  19 - 70 . 
       FIG.  219    is a schematic view of an optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 D in accordance with some other embodiments of this disclosure.  FIG.  219    is a variant of  FIG.  218   . In this embodiment, the bottom  19 - 70  of the optical element driving mechanism  19 - 1 D further includes two extending portions  19 - 70 A. The circuit assembly  19 - 60  is disposed between the spaces between the extending portions  19 - 70 A to prevent the circuit assembly  19 - 60  from being damaged because the circuit assembly  19 - 60  contacts or collides with other elements. 
     As described above, an optical element driving mechanism is provided. The case may be made of metal material or non-metal material. When the case is made of metal, the electromagnetic wave interference may be isolated. The bottom is rectangular. The circuit assembly is disposed on the bottom to achieve miniaturization. The sensor is disposed on the circuit assembly to sense the sensed object and enhance the sensing accuracy. Furthermore, the bottom includes the corresponding receiving portion to protect the sensor. 
     Twentieth Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIG.  220   ,  FIG.  220    is a schematic view showing the camera module optical system  20 - 100 . The camera module optical system  20 - 100  can be used, for example, to drive and sustain an optical element  20 -LS (such as a lens assembly), and can be disposed inside an electronic device (such as a camera, a tablet or a mobile phone). When light (incident light) from the outside enters the camera module optical system  20 - 100 , the light can pass through the optical element  20 -LS to an image sensor module  20 -IM to obtain an image. The detailed structure of the camera module optical system  20 - 100  will be described below. 
     The camera module optical system  20 - 100  comprises an optical module  20 -OM, a image sensor module  20 -IM, and an adjustment assembly  20 -AS. The adjustment assembly  20 -AS is located between the optical module  20 -OM and the image sensor module  20 -IM, and disposed on a bottom surface  20 -OMB of the optical module  20 -OM. Viewing along a first direction  20 -D 1  that is perpendicular to a main axis  20 -Q of the optical system  20 - 100  (or perpendicular to an optical axis  20 -O of the optical element  20 -LS), the adjustment assembly  20 -AS does not overlap the optical module  20 -OM. 
     The aforementioned optical module  20 -OM may be a lens module including a housing  20 -H, a movable portion  20 -V and a base  20 - 10 . The housing  20 -H and the movable portion  20 -V are disposed on the base  20 - 10 , the housing  20 -H and the base  20 - 10  form an accommodating space, and the movable portion  20 -V is disposed in the accommodating space. The movable portion  20 -V includes a frame  20 , a holder  20 - 30 , a driving assembly  20 -MC, and an elastic assembly  20 -ES. The accommodating space formed by the housing  20 -H connected to and disposed on the base  20 - 10  can receive the movable portion  20 -V (including the holder  20 - 30 , the drive assembly  20 -MC and elastic assembly  20 -ES) for protection. 
     The holder  20 - 30  is used to carry the optical element  20 -LS, and is movably connected to the base  20 - 10  and the frame  20  through the elastic assembly  20 -ES. The driving assembly  20 -MC is disposed on the holder  20 - 30  and the frame  20 , and is used to drive the holder  20 - 30  and the optical element  20 -LS to move relative to the base  20 - 10  and the frame  20  to adjust the posture or position of the optical element  20 -LS, thereby achieving the purpose of optical auto-focusing (AF) or optical image stabilization (OIS). 
     In detail about the elastic assembly  20 -ES, the elastic assembly  20 -ES includes a first elastic element  20 -E 1  and a second elastic element  20 -E 2 , which are respectively disposed on the upper and lower sides of the holder  20 - 30 , and movably connected to the holder  20 - 30 , the base  20 - 10  and the frame  20 , so that the holder  20 - 30  can move relative to the base  20 - 10  and the frame  20 . 
     The aforementioned driving assembly  20 -MC may be an electromagnetic driving assembly, which includes a magnetic element  20 -M and a coil  20 -C, which are respectively disposed on the bottom surface  20 - 30 B of the movable portion  20 - 30  and base  20 - 11  and arranged along the extension direction  24 -DE. The magnetic element  20 -M and the coil  20 -C correspond to each other. When a driving signal is applied to the driving assembly  20 -MC (for example, by applying an electric current through an external power source to the coil  20 -C), a magnetic force is generated between the magnetic element  20 -M and the coil  20 -C, thereby the driving assembly  20 -MC can drive the movable portion  20 - 30  to move relative the base  20 - 10 , to achieve the effect of anti-shake or auto-focus of optical image. In this embodiment, the driving assembly  20 -MC is a moving coil type; in another embodiment, it may be a moving magnetic type. In addition, before the driving signal is applied, the aforementioned elastic assembly  20 -ES can keep the movable portion in an initial position relative to the base  20 - 10 . 
     In some embodiments, the driving mechanism  20 - 100  may include a position sensing element, which may be a position sensor, for example, a magnetoresistive sensor (MRS) or optical sensor, for sensing the relative positional relationship between the movable portion  20 -V and the base  20 - 10 , to facilitate a control unit to adjust the positions between the two via the driving assembly  20 -MC. The position sensing element can be surrounded by the coil  20 -C. This configuration can make full use of space and make the size of the entire driving mechanism small. The position sensing element may share the magnetic element  20 -M with the coil  20 -C. 
     In some embodiments, the camera module optical system  20 - 100  may further include a permeability element disposed between the frame  20  and the magnetic element  20 -M of the driving assembly  20 -MC. The magnetic force can be concentrated in a predetermined direction, so as to enhance the magnetic driving force of the driving assembly  20 -MC for driving the holder  20 - 30 , and reduce the effect of magnetic interference. In another embodiment, the frame  20  can be embedded with the aforementioned permeability element so that it has a permeability material. In addition to strengthening the magnetic force (between the magnetic element  20 -M and the coil  20 -C) in a predetermined direction, it can also enhance the overall mechanical strength of the movable portion  20 -V. 
     Referring to  FIG.  221   , the aforementioned adjustment assembly  20 -AS includes a plurality of adjustment columns  20 -A 1 , which are disposed on the bottom surface  20 -OMB of the base  20 - 10  and extend along a second direction  20 -D 2  (the second direction  20 -D 2  is not perpendicular to the optical axis  20 -O, such as parallel or approximately parallel to the Z axis), and is used to adjust the relative positions of the optical module  20 -OM and the image sensor module  20 -IM. Specifically, the adjustment assembly  20 -AS are used to adjust the optical axis  20 -O of the optical element  20 -LS set in the optical module  20 -OM and the main axis  20 -Q of the image sensor module  20 -IM so that they overlap or are parallel. In this embodiment, the adjustment assembly  20 -AS includes four adjustment columns  20 -A 1 , which are disposed at the edges of the bottom surface  20 -OMB of the optical module  20 -OM and located on different sides of the bottom surface  20 -OMB. It should be noted that, in other embodiments, the adjusting assembly  20 -AS may include three adjusting columns  20 -A 1 , which are disposed at the edges of the bottom surface  20 -OMB of the optical module  20 -OM, and all three are located on the different sides of the bottom surface  20 -OMB. 
     In detail, referring to  FIG.  222   , when the image sensor module  20 -IM and the optical module  20 -OM are assembled, the contact surface  20 - 41  of the bottom plate  20 - 40  of the image sensor module  20 -IM (can be used to carry an image sensor of the image sensor module in the  20 -IM) will be in contact with the adjustment assembly  20 -AS. At this time, a measuring device  20 - 501  (for example, an angle measuring device) of the assembly and adjustment mechanism  20 - 56  measures the angle difference between the optical axis  20 -O of the optical module  20 -OM and the main axis  20 -Q of the image sensor module  20 -IM, to provide a measurement information. Next, a positioning device  20 - 601  of the assembly and adjustment mechanism  20 - 56  adjusts the relative positions between the optical module  20 -OM and the image sensor module  20 -IM according to the aforementioned measurement information, so that the optical axis  20 -O and the main axis  20 -Q coincide or are parallel. In some embodiments, the measurement device  20 - 501  can determine an angle difference between the optical axis  20 -O in the optical module  20 -OM and the main axis  20 -Q of the image sensor module  20 -IM according to the degree of blur and focus of the image generated by the incident light passing through the optical module  20 -OM to the image sensor module  20 -IM. 
     Continuing to refer to  FIG.  222   , when the main axis  20 -Q is relatively inclined or skewed relative to the optical axis  20 -O (for example, the optical element  20 -LS placed in the holder  20 - 30  and is not fully aligned with the center of the holder  20 - 30  will make the optical axis  20 -O, the center of the holder  20 - 30  and the main axis  20 -Q not parallel or coincide), which means that the image sensor module  20 -IM is not aligned with the optical module  20 -OM. In this situation, the positioning device  20 - 601  drives the image sensor module  20 -IM to squeeze the adjustment assembly  20 -AS to deform, so that the height of at least a part of the adjustment assembly  20 -AS in the Z-axis direction is reduced, to make the image sensor module  20 -IM align the optical module  20 -OM. As shown in  FIGS.  222  to  223   , when the image sensor module  20 -IM squeezes the adjustment assembly  20 -AS, its bottom plate  20 - 40  contacts and presses against the aforementioned adjustment columns  20 -A 1 , so that the adjustment columns  20 -A 1  changes its original shape. At this time, the positioning device  20 - 601  is used to align the image sensor module  20 -IM with the optical module  20 -OM to achieve alignment between the two components. 
     The positioning device  20 - 601  includes a holding (or clamping) member  20 - 6011 , a limiting member  20 - 6012 , and a positioning member  20 - 6013 . The holding member  20 - 6011  is used to hold the optical module  20 -OM. The limiting member  20 - 6012  is used to limit the optical module  20 -OM, and the positioning member  20 - 6013  is used to carry the image sensor module  20 -IM and assemble it to the optical module  20 -OM. In this embodiment, the holding member  20 - 6011  holds the top portion of the optical module  20 -OM, and the limiting member  20 - 6012  are located on both sides of the optical module  20 -OM to limit the optical module  20 -OM. Avoid excessive shaking or movement. When the positioning member  20 - 6013  pushes the image sensor module  20 -IM toward the optical module  20 -OM, the bottom plate  20 - 40  of the image sensor module  20 -IM contacts the adjustment columns  20 -A 1 , and the measuring device  20 - 501  determines whether the optical axis  20 -O and main axis  20 -Q are parallel or coincide, to adjust the forces for the image sensor module  20 -IM pressing toward the adjustment columns  20 -A 1  at different positions, such as different forces  20 -F 1 ,  20 -F 2  and  20 -F 3 , so that the shapes of the adjustment columns  20 -A 1  are changed (or the shape of at least one column  20 -A 1  is changed due to the angle difference), to make the optical axis  20 -O and the main axis  20 -Q be parallel or coincide. 
     In some embodiments, the contact surface  20 - 41  of the bottom plate  20 - 40  includes a metal material, which can be connected to an external heating circuit to heat up, so that the adjustment column  20 -A 1  on the contact surface  20 - 41  becomes a molten state, for changing its shape. In some embodiments, the contact surface  20 - 41  is flat. 
     In this way, the camera module optical system  20 - 100  is provided with an adjustment assembly  20 -AS located between the optical module  20 -OM and the image sensor module  20 -IM, and the shape of the adjustment assembly AS can be changed. The assembly of the correction in image sensor module IM and the optical module  20 -OM can be accurately adjusted so that the main axis  20 -Q can be parallel or coincident with the optical axis  20 -O, to improve the image quality obtained by the device. 
       FIG.  224    shows a camera module optical system  200  and adjustment according to another embodiment of the present invention, which is different from the camera module optical system  20 - 100  in  FIG.  220   . The camera module optical system  200  in this embodiment has two optical modules: a first optical module  20 -OM 1  and a second optical module  20 -OM 2 , both of which may be the same or similar, or they may have a slightly different appearance and proportions. The adjustment assembly  20 -AS has a plurality of first adjustment columns  20 -A 1  (first adjustment sub-assembly) and a plurality of second adjustment columns  20 -A 2  (second adjustment sub-assembly). The first optical module  20 -OM 1 , the first adjustment columns  20 -A 1 , a second optical module  20 -OM 2 , the second adjustment columns  20 -A 2 , and the image sensor module  20 -IM are sequentially arranged along the first optical axis  20 -O 1  of the first optical element  20 -LS 1  (or the second optical axis  20 -O 2  of the second optical element LS 2 , the main axis  20 -Q). 
     When it is intended to assemble the first and second optical modules  20 -OM 1 ,  20 -OM 2 , and the image sensor module  20 -IM, the holding member  20 - 6011  of the positioning device  601  clamps and limits the first and the second optical module  20 -OM 1 ,  20 -OM 2 , and the positioning member  20 - 6012  carry the image sensor module  20 -IM. First, the first adjustment columns  20 -A 1  on the upper surface  20 -OMB 1  of the second optical module  20 -OM 2  is pressed against the bottom surface of the base  20 - 10  of the first optical module  20 -OM 1 . When  20 -OM 1  and  20 -OM 2  are relatively inclined, the shape of the first adjustment columns  20 -A 1  are configured to change via the first adjustment assembly  20 -A 1  being contact with the base  20 - 10 , so that to performance the alignment of the first and second optical modules  20 -OM 1  and  20 -OM 2 . 
     Next, the bottom plate  20 - 40  of the image sensor module  20 -IM is pressed against the second adjustment columns  20 -A 2  provided on the lower surface  20 -OMB 2 . When the image sensor module  20 -IM and the second optical module  20 -OM 2  are relatively inclined, the second adjustment columns  20 -A 2  are pressed against the bottom plate  20 - 40  to change its shape until the image sensor module  20 -IM is aligned with the second optical module  20 -OM 2 . In this way, through the above mechanism, the first and second optical modules  20 -OM 1 ,  20 -OM 2 , and the image sensor module  20 -IM can be aligned, and the first and second optical axes  20 -O 1 ,  20 -O 2  are parallel or coincident with the main axis  20 -Q. 
     In other embodiments, the first adjustment columns  20 -A 1  may be disposed on the bottom surface of the first optical module  20 -OM 1 , and the upper surface  20 -OMB 1  of the second optical module  20 -OM 2  is pressed toward the first adjustment columns  20 -A 1 . In other embodiments, the second adjustment columns  20 -A 2  may be disposed on the bottom plate  20 - 40  of the image sensor module  20 -IM, and the lower surface  20 -OMB 2  of the second optical module  20 -OM 2  is pressed toward the second adjustment columns  20 -A 2 . 
     The positions of the first and second adjustment columns  20 -A 1  and  20 -A 2  described above can be combined or mixed, and the first and second optical modules  20 -OM 1 ,  20 -OM 2 , and the image sensor module  20 -IM as active movers can also be combined or mixed. 
       FIG.  225    shows a schematic diagram of adjustment columns  20 -A 1  (or may be  20 -A 2 ) and several different opponent members  20 -BO 1 ,  20 -BO 2 , and  20 -BO 3 . The opponent members  20 -BO 1  to BO 3  can be the bottom  20 - 40  of the image sensor module  20 -IM in  FIG.  222   , or the base  20 - 10  of the first optical module  20 -OM 1 , parts of the upper and lower surfaces  20 -OMB 1 ,  20 -OMB 2  of the second optical module  20 -OM 2  or the bottom plate  20 - 40  of the image sensor module  20 -IM in  FIG.  224   . 
     In this embodiment, the adjustment column  20 -A 1  has a cylindrical structure having a maximum width of  20 -W 1 , and the contact surface of the opponent member  20 -BO 1  has a maximum width of  20 -W 2 , where the width  20 -W 1  is smaller than the width  20 -W 2 , or say the maximum width  20 -W 2  is larger than the maximum width  20 -W 1 . This can ensure that when the opponent member  20 -BO 1  is pressed against the adjustment column  20 -A 1 , it can completely cover the adjustment column  20 -A 1 , so as to change the shape of the adjustment column  20 -A 1  and improve the alignment accuracy between the modules. 
     In some embodiments, the opponent member  20 -BO 2  has protrusions  20 -BOT extending toward the adjustment column  20 -A 1  (or  20 -A 2 ). With the embodiments in  FIGS.  220  and  224   , for example, it extends toward the optical module  20 -OM,  20 -OM 1 ,  20 -OM 2 , or the image sensor module  20 -IM. The plurality of adjusting columns  20 -A 1  correspond to and contact the plurality of protrusions  20 -BOT, and the maximum width  20 -W 3  of the protrusion  20 -BOT is larger than the maximum width  20 -W 1  of the adjustment column  20 -A 1 . For clarity and simplicity, only one adjustment column  20 -A 1  and one protrusion  20 -BOT are shown in  FIG.  225   . 
     In some embodiments, the opponent member  20 -BO 3  has a plurality of recesses  20 -BOR, the openings of which are directed toward the optical module  20 -OM (or  20 -OM 1 ,  20 -OM 2 , or the image sensor module  20 -IM), the plurality of adjustment columns  20 -A 1  correspond to and contact the recesses  20 -BOR, and the maximum width  20 -W 4  of the recess  20 -BOR is larger than the maximum width  20 -W 1  of the adjustment column  20 -A 1 . 
       FIG.  226    shows a schematic diagram of plurality of adjustment columns having different shapes, including:  20 -A 1   a ,  20 -A 1   b ,  20 -A 1   c . The adjustment column  20 -A 1   a  can have a cylindrical or trapezoidal structure. The trapezoidal adjustment columns have two types:  20 -A 1   b , and  20 -A 1   c . About the adjustment column  20 -Alb, its maximum width of the side adjacent to the opponent member  20 -BO is smaller than the maximum width of another side away from the opponent member  20 -BO. About the adjustment column  20 -A 1   c , its maximum width of the side adjacent to the opponent member  20 -BO It is greater than the maximum width of the side far from the opponent member  20 -BO. 
       FIG.  227    shows a schematic view of the ends of a plurality of different adjusting columns  20 -A 1  (or  20 -A 2 ) having different shapes, such as adjusting columns  20 -A 1   a ′,  20 -A 1   b ′,  20 -A 1   c ′ and  20 -A 1   d ′. The end of the adjustment column  20 -A 1   a ′ has a stepped structure to form an extension  20 -A 1   a ′ 1  and a limiting surface  20 -A 1   a ′ 2 . When the opponent member  20 -BO is pressed against the extension  20 -A 1   a ′  1  to change the shape of the column  20 -A 1   a ′, the limiting surface  20 -A 1   a ′ 2  can be used as a surface that limits the opponent member  20 -BO doing excessive movement, which can prevent the opponent member  20 -BO from overly pressing the adjustment column  20 -A 1   a ′. The extension portion  20 -A 1   b ′  1  of the adjustment column  20 -A 1   b ′ has a tapered structure. 
     The adjustment column  20 -A 1   c ′ has an extension portion  20 -A 1   c ′  1  and a depression portion  20 -A 1   c ′ 2 , and the depression portion  20 -A 1   c ′ 2  is located on both sides of the extension portion  20 -A 1   c ′  1 . When the opponent member  20 -BO is pressed against the extension portion  20 -A 1   c ′ 1  to change the shape of the column  20 -A 1   c ′, the deformed extension portion  20 -A 1   c ′  1  can move toward the depression portion  20 -A 1   c ′ 2 , wherein the depression portion  20 -A 1   c ′ 2  has a space to accommodate deformation of the extension  20 -A 1   c ′ 1 . The extension portion  20 -A 1   d ′ 1  of the adjustment column  20 -A 1   d ′ 1  has a tapered structure. 
     In summary, an embodiment of the present invention provides a camera module optical system, having a main axis, including an optical module and an adjustment assembly. The optical module is configured to hold an optical element having an optical axis. The adjustment assembly is configured to adjust the optical axis of the optical module parallel to the main axis. The optical module and the adjustment assembly are arranged along the main axis, wherein the adjustment assembly does not overlap the optical module when viewed in a first direction that is perpendicular to the main axis. 
     The embodiment of the present invention has at least one of the following advantages or effects. Through the adjustment assembly, a plurality of optical modules can be aligned with each other, and one or more optical modules and an image sensor module can be aligned with each other, so as to improve the quality of the device. In addition, since the adjustment assembly can change its shape during adjustment process (usually being squeezed and reduced in height in the vertical direction), the adjustment between the optical module and the image sensor module can be more accurate and greatly improved product quality. 
     Twenty-First Group Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIG.  228   ,  FIG.  228    is a schematic view showing the optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100 . The optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100  can be used, for example, to drive and sustain an optical element  21 -LM (such as a reflector lens or mirror), and can be disposed inside a camera module of an electronic device (such as a camera, a tablet or a mobile phone), as shown in  FIG.  228   . When light (incident light) from the outside enters the camera module, by the optical element  21 -LM driven via the optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100 , the light can be changed from the original incident direction, and the angle direction thereof can be adjusted to enter the optical lens in the camera module, and the light can pass through the optical lens to an photosensitive element (such as image sensor) to obtain an image. With the above configuration, the thickness of the camera module of the electronic device in the Z-axis direction can be greatly saved, so as to achieve miniaturization. The detailed structure of the optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100  will be described below. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  228  and  229   , wherein  FIG.  228    is an exploded view of the optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100 , which includes a fixed portion  21 -F, a movable portion  21 - 30 , a driving assembly  21 -MC and a connecting assembly  21 -CO. The fixed portion  21 -F includes a base  21 - 11  and a case  21 - 12 . The case  21 - 12  is connected to and disposed on the base  21 - 11  to form a receiving space  21 -SP which is configured to accommodate receive the movable portion  21 - 30  and the driving assembly  21 -MC for protection. A connecting rod  21 -RD of the movable part  21 - 30  can be connected to an optical element  21 -LM, and the movable portion  21 - 30  is located over the base  21 - 11  and is movably connected to the case  21 - 12  through the connecting assembly  21 -CO. The driving assembly  21 -MC is disposed between the base  21 - 11  and the movable portion  21 - 30 , and is configured to drive the movable portion  21 - 30  relative to the base  21 - 11  and the case  21 - 12  to move, to adjust the position of the optical element, thereby achieving the purpose of optical auto-focusing (AF) or optical image stabilization (OIS). 
     Referring to  FIGS.  230 ,  231  and  232   , The movable portion  21 - 30  has an extended connection portion  21 - 302  which is adjacent to the base  21 - 11  and away from the upper shell  21 - 12 T of the case  21 - 12  ( FIG.  233   ). In addition, the base  21 - 11  has a recessed portion  21 -R. Seen from the extension direction  21 -DE, the movable portion  21 - 30  is located above the recessed portion  21 -R. Seen from the first or second direction  21 -D 1 ,  21 -D 2 , the sidewall of the recessed portion  21 -R overlaps the movable portion  21 - 30 , which helps to limit the movement of the movable portion  21 - 30 . 
     The connecting assembly  21 -CO may be disposed between the base  21 - 11  and the movable portion  21 - 30 . As shown in  FIG.  231   , a first recess  21 - 303  and two second recesses  21 - 304  may be positioned at the bottom of the movable portion  21 - 30 , and the first recess  21 - 303  and the third recesses  21 - 304  may extend along a first direction  21 -D 1  (X axis) for accommodating the connecting assembly  21 -CO. The connecting assembly  21 -CO may reduce the friction between the base  21 - 11  and the movable portion  21 - 30 . Furthermore, because the first recess  21 - 303  and the third recesses  21 - 304  extend along the first direction  21 -D 1  (X axis), the connecting assembly  21 -CO may roll in the first recess  21 - 303  and the third recesses  21 - 304 , to allow the movable portion  21 - 30  to move relative to the base  21 - 11  (a portion of the fixed portion  21 -F) in the first direction  21 -D 1 , and the optical element  21 -LM connected to the movable portion  21 - 30  may be driven. In other words, the connecting assembly directly connects the base  21 - 11  and the movable portion  21 - 30 . 
     In some embodiments, the length  21 -L 1  of the first recess  21 - 303  is greater than the length  21 -L 2  of any of the third recesses  21 - 304 , to allow more connecting elements (such as two first connecting elements  21 -CO 1  and one second connecting element  21 -CO 2  in  FIG.  232   ) may be disposed in the first recess  21 - 303 . As a result, the friction between the movable portion  21 - 30  and the base  21 - 11  may be further decreased. 
     In some embodiments, the first recess  21 - 303  extends along a extending line  21 -E 1 , and the two third recesses  21 - 304  are symmetrical to the extending line  21 -E 1  for balancing the center of gravity of the movable portion  21 - 30  when the movable portion  21 - 30  is disposed on the base  21 - 11 , and the optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100  may be further stabilized during operation. 
     The connecting rod  21 - 301  of the movable portion  21 - 30  extends along the first direction  21 -D 1  (X-axis) to connect the optical element  21 -LM. The connecting rod  21 -RD is connected to the optical element  21 -LM through an opening  21 -OP of the case  21 - 12 . The opening  21 -OP has a greater diameter than the diameter of connecting rod  21 -RD. 
     Referring to  FIG.  232   , a second recess  21 - 111  and two fourth recesses  21 - 112  may be positioned on the base  21 - 11 , and the second recess  21 - 111  and the fourth recesses  21 - 112  may extend along the first direction  21 -D 1  (X axis) for accommodating the connecting assembly  21 -CO. Because the second recess  21 - 111  and the fourth recesses  21 - 112  extend along the first direction  21 -D 1  (X axis), the connecting assembly  21 -CO may roll in the second recess  21 - 111  and the fourth recesses  21 - 112 , to allow the movable portion  21 - 30  to move relative to the base  21 - 11  (a portion of the fixed portion  21 -F) in the first direction  21 -D 1 , and the optical element  21 -LM connected to the movable portion  21 - 30  may be driven. 
     In some embodiments, the length  21 -L 3  of the second recess  21 - 111  is greater than the length  21 -L 4  of any of the fourth recesses  21 - 112 , to allow more connecting elements (such as two first connecting elements  21 -CO 1  and one second connecting element  21 -CO 2  in  FIG.  232   ) may be disposed in the second recess  21 - 111 . As a result, the friction between the movable portion  21 - 30  and the base  21 - 11  may be further decreased. In some embodiments, the length  21 -L 3  of the second recess  21 - 111  may be substantially identical to the length  21 -L 1  of the first recess  21 - 303 , and the length  21 -L 4  of the fourth recess  21 - 112  may be substantially identical to the length  21 -L 2  of the third recess  21 - 304 . 
     In some embodiments, the second recess  21 - 111  extends along a extending line  21 -E 2 , and the two fourth recesses  21 - 112  are symmetrical to the extending line  21 -E 2  to balance the center of gravity of the movable portion  21 - 30  when the movable portion  21 - 30  is disposed on the base  21 - 11 , and the optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100  may be further stabilized when operating. 
     Moreover, in some embodiments, as shown in  FIGS.  232  and  233   , the second connecting element  21 -CO 2  may be disposed between two first connecting elements  21 -CO 1 , and the first connecting element  21 -CO 1  and the second connecting element  21 -CO 2  have different diameters. For example, the diameter of the first connecting element  21 -CO 1  may be greater than the diameter of the second connecting element  21 -CO 2 . As a result, the contact area between the connecting elements may be reduced to decrease the friction when the connecting assembly  21 -CO is rolling. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  231 ,  233  and  235   , the bottom of the movable portion  21 - 30  further includes a recess (or groove)  21 - 301 , and the opening of the recess  21 - 301  faces the base  21 - 11 . The aforementioned driving assembly  21 -MC is disposed in the recess  21 - 301 . In detail, the driving assembly  21 -MC may be an electromagnetic driving assembly, which includes a magnetic element  21 -M and a coil  21 -C, which are respectively disposed on the bottom surface  21 - 30 B of the movable portion  21 - 30  and base  21 - 11 . The magnetic element  21 -M and the coil  21 -C correspond to each other. When a driving signal is applied to the driving component  21 -MC (for example, by applying an electric current through an external power source), a magnetic force is generated between the magnetic element  21 -M and the coil  21 -C, thereby driving the movable portion  21 - 30  to move relative the fixed portion  21 -F (including base  21 - 11  and case  21 - 12 ), to achieve the effect of anti-shake or auto-focus of optical image. In this embodiment, the driving assembly  21 -MC is a moving magnetic type; in another embodiment, it may be a moving coil type. 
     In this embodiment, the optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100  includes a permeability element  21 -MG disposed between the movable portion  21 - 30  and the driving assembly  21 -MC. In detail, it is located between the bottom surface  21 - 30 B and the magnetic element  21 -M, so that the magnetic force of the magnetic element  21 -M can be concentrated in a predetermined direction to enhance the magnetic force of the driving assembly  21 -MC to drive the movable portion  21 - 30 , and the magnetic interference can be decreased. In another embodiment, the permeability element  21 -MG can be embedded in a part of the bottom surface  21 - 30 B of the movable portion  21 - 30  which is corresponding to the magnetic element  21 -M, so that the movable portion  21 - 30  includes permeability conductive material, and the magnetic element  21 -M can be directly contacted and fixed on the bottom surface  21 - 30 B. In addition to strengthening the magnetic force (between the magnetic element  21 -M and the coil  21 -C) in a predetermined direction, it can also strengthen the overall mechanical strength of the movable portion  21 - 30 . 
     The optical element driving mechanism  21 - 100  includes a position-sensing element  21 -SN, which may be a position sensor, for example, a magnetoresistive sensor (MRS) or an optical sensor, which is used to sense the relative positional relationship between the movable portion  21 - 30  and the base  21 - 11 , which facilitates a control unit (not shown) to adjust the positions between the two by the driving assembly  21 -MC. It is worth noting that the position-sensing element  21 -SN is provided in the hollow portion of the coil  21 -C, or that the position-sensing element  21 -SN is surrounded by the coil  21 -C. This configuration can make full use of space and is good for miniaturization. In this embodiment, the position-sensing element  21 -SN can share the magnetic element  21 -M with the coil  21 -C. In other words, the position-sensing element  21 -SN is disposed between the movable portion  21 - 30  and the base  21 - 11 , and the driving assembly  21 -MC surrounds the position-sensing element  21 -SN. 
     A circuit component  21 -CA is disposed on the base  21 - 11 , and is used to electrically connect the driving assembly  21 -MC and the position-sensing element  21 -SN. In this embodiment, the circuit assembly  21 -CA is formed by insert molding on the body of the base  21 - 11 . In another embodiment, the base  21 - 11  may include a circuit board component, such as a printed circuit board (PCB), which is disposed on the body of the base  21 - 11  and is electrically connected to the driving assembly  21 -MC and position-sensing element  21 -SN. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  233 ,  234 ,  235  and  236   , wherein  FIGS.  5 A and  6 A  are cross-sectional views when the movable portion  21 - 30  moves relative to the fixed portion  21 -F, and  FIGS.  234  and  236    are top views of the movable portion  21 - 30  and the fixed portion  21 -F in  FIGS.  233  and  235   . When the driving assembly  21 -MC drives the movable portion  21 - 30  to move relative to the fixed portion  21 -F, the connecting rod  21 -RD of the movable portion  21 - 30  also drives the optical element  21 -LM to move relative to the fixed portion  21 -F.  FIGS.  235  and  236    show that the movable portion  21 - 30  moves relative to the fixed portion  21 -F in the first direction  21 -D 1  (X-axis), and drives the optical element  21 -LM to move in the first direction  21 -D 1 . 
     It should be noted that as shown in  FIG.  234   , when the movable portion  21 - 30  has not moved relative to the base  21 - 11 , the first recess  21 - 303  overlaps the second recess  21 - 111 , the third recess  21 - 304  overlaps the fourth recess  21 - 112 , and the connecting assembly  21 -CO is disposed at the positions where the recesses overlap each other. In other words, the connecting assembly  21 -CO is disposed in the first recess  21 - 303  and the second recess  21 - 111  concurrently, and/or disposed in the third recess  21 - 304  and the fourth recess  21 - 112  concurrently. As shown in  FIG.  236   , when the movable portion  21 - 30  moves relative to the base  21 - 11 , the first recess  21 - 303  at least partially overlaps the second recess  21 - 111 , the third recess  21 - 304  at least partially overlaps the fourth recess  21 - 112 , and the connecting assembly  21 -CO is still disposed at the positions where the recesses overlap each other. In other words, even if the movable portion  21 - 30  moves relative to the base  21 - 11 , the connecting assembly  21 -CO still positions in the recesses to limit the range of moving of the connecting assembly  21 -CO. 
     In this way, the movable portion  21 - 30  can be movably set over the base  21 - 11  through the connecting assembly  21 -CO, and the movable portion  21 - 30  is driven by the drive assembly  21 -MC to move relative to the base  21 - 11 , so that the optical element  21 -LM moves together. By adjusting the incident angle of the reflected light from the optical element  21 -LM into the optical lens, it can achieve the effects of optical focusing or optical image stabilization. 
     It should be noted that the connecting assembly  21 -CO may be disposed not only on the bottom of the movable portion  21 - 30 , but also on the sides of the movable portion. For example,  FIG.  237    is a schematic view of a base  21 - 13 , a movable portion  21 - 31 , and the connecting assembly  21 -CO in other embodiments of the present disclosure, and  FIG.  238    is a cross-sectional view illustrated along the line  21 -A- 21 -A in  FIG.  237   . Recesses  21 - 311  may be positioned at the sides of the movable portion  21 - 30 , the base  21 - 13  has recesses  21 - 131  that are positioned corresponding to the recesses  21 - 311 , and the connecting assembly  21 -CO may be disposed in the recesses  21 - 311  and the recesses  21 - 131 . As a result, the friction between the movable portion  21 - 31  and the base  21 - 13  may also be reduced. It should be noted that the opening directions of the two recesses  21 - 311  on the movable portion  21 - 30  are opposite, and the opening directions of the two recesses  21 - 131  on the base  21 - 13  are also opposite. 
     In summary, an optical element driving mechanism is provided, including a fixed portion, a movable portion, a driving assembly, and a connecting assembly. The fixed portion includes a base and a case. The movable portion is movable relative to the fixed portion and is used for connecting an optical element. The driving assembly is disposed between the fixed portion and the movable portion for moving the movable portion relative to the fixed portion. The connecting assembly is disposed between the fixed portion and the movable portion. 
     The embodiment of the present invention has at least one of the following advantages or effects, in that the movable portion is disposed on the base in a movable manner through the connecting assembly, and the movable portion is driven to move with the optical element together relative to the base by the driving assembly, to adjust the incident angle of the light reflected by the optical element into the optical lens, the effects of optical focusing and optical image stabilization can be achieved. By connecting the movable portion and the base through the connecting assembly, as compared with setting a suspension movable frame, the embodiment of the present invention can greatly reduce the space occupied by the suspension component inside the driving mechanism, and is conducive to miniaturization. Furthermore, due to the lightness and flexibility of the connecting assembly, the sensitivity and accuracy of the movable portion can be improved when it is moving, thereby increasing the accuracy of moving the optical element. 
     Twenty-Second Group of Embodiments 
       FIG.  239    is a schematic perspective view illustrating an optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  may be, for example, disposed in the electronic devices with camera function for driving an optical member (not shown), and can perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. 
     As shown in  FIG.  239   , the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  has a main axis  22 -C that is substantially parallel to the Z axis. The optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  includes a housing  22 - 110  which has a top surface  22 - 111 . The top surface  22 - 111  extends in a direction (i.e. the X-Y plane) that is parallel to the main axis  22 -C. In addition, the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  includes a movable portion  22 - 130  that is movable relative to the housing  22 - 110 . The movable portion  22 - 130  has a top surface  22 - 131 , wherein the top surface  22 - 131  extends in a direction (i.e. the X-Y plane) that is parallel to the main axis  22 -C. For example, the top surfaces  22 - 111  and  22 - 131  are located on the same horizontal plane, but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. 
     The movable portion  22 - 130  further has a reflection surface  22 - 132 , wherein the reflection surface  22 - 132  is not parallel to the direction of motion of the movable portion  22 - 130 . In the present embodiment, the reflection surface  22 - 132  is substantially perpendicular to the top surface  22 - 131 , but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. In some other embodiments, the reflection surface  22 - 132  is not parallel to the top surface  22 - 131 . In some embodiments, an optical element (not shown) may be disposed on the reflection surface  22 - 132 , such that the light may be reflected after illuminating the above optical member. In other words, the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  may be configured to change the traveling direction of the light, and therefore perform an autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. In the present embodiment, when viewed in a direction (the Y axis) that is perpendicular to the reflection surface  22 - 132 , the optical member may at least partially overlap the housing  22 - 110  or the movable portion  22 - 130 . In addition, when viewed in a direction (e.g. the X axis, the Z axis) that is parallel to the reflection surface  22 - 132 , the optical member does not overlap the housing  22 - 110  or the movable portion  22 - 130 . 
       FIG.  240    is an exploded view illustrating the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  shown in  FIG.  239   . In the present embodiment, the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  has a substantial rectangular structure. The optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  mainly includes a fixed portion  22 -F, a movable portion  22 - 130 , a driving assembly  22 - 140  and a guiding assembly  22 - 150 . In the present embodiment, the fixed portion  22 -F includes a housing  22 - 110  and a base  22 - 120 . 
     The housing  22 - 110  is disposed on the base  22 - 120 , and protect the elements disposed inside the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101 . In some embodiments, the housing  22 - 110  is made of metal or another material with sufficient hardness to provide good protection. The circuit component  22 - 170  is embedded in the base  22 - 120  for transmitting electric signals, such that the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  may control the position of the optical member disposed on the movable portion  22 - 130  according to the aforementioned electric signals. In the present embodiment, the circuit component  22 - 170  is disposed in the base  22 - 120  by insert molding, and thereby the required space for the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  may be reduced. 
     The movable portion  22 - 130  is movable relative to the fixed portion  22 -F and is configured to carry an optical member. As shown in  FIG.  240   , the movable portion  22 - 130  is movably connected to the housing  22 - 110  and the base  22 - 120 . The driving assembly  22 - 140  includes a magnetic member  22 - 141  and a coil  22 - 142 . The magnetic member  22 - 141  is disposed on the movable portion  22 - 130 , and the corresponding coil  22 - 142  is disposed on the base  22 - 120 . When current is applied to the coil  22 - 142 , an electromagnetic driving force may be generated by the coil  22 - 142  and the magnetic member  22 - 141  (i.e. the driving assembly  22 - 140 ) to drive the movable portion  22 - 130  and the optical member carried thereon to move along a horizontal direction (the Y axis) relative to the base  22 - 120 , and therefore performing the autofocus (AF) and/or optical image stabilization (OIS) function. Furthermore, a magnetic permeable plate  22 -P is disposed on the magnetic member  22 - 141  for concentrating the magnetic field of the magnetic member  22 - 141  so that the efficiency of the driving assembly  22 - 140  may be improved. For example, the magnetic permeable plate  22 -P may be made of metal or another material with sufficient magnetic permeability. 
     In the present embodiment, an integrated circuit component  22 - 180  is disposed on the base  22 - 120 . For example, the integrated circuit component  22 - 180  may detect the change of the magnetic field of the magnetic member  22 - 141 , and the position of the movable portion  22 - 130  (and the optical member carried thereon) may be determined by the integrated circuit component  22 - 180 . In some embodiments, the integrated circuit component  22 - 180  or the magnetic member  22 - 141  is disposed on the fixed portion  22 -F, and the other of the integrated circuit component  22 - 180  or the magnetic member  22 - 141  is disposed on the movable portion  22 - 130 . 
     In the present embodiment, the guiding assembly  22 - 150  includes a first track  22 - 151 , a first rolling member  22 - 161  and a second rolling member  22 - 162 . The first track  22 - 151  is disposed on and exposed from the base  22 - 120 . In some embodiments, the first track  22 - 151  is disposed in the base  22 - 120  by insert molding. The first track  22 - 151  may include metallic material, and thereby the durability of the first track  22 - 151  may be enhanced. The size of the first rolling member  22 - 161  is different from the size of the second rolling member  22 - 162 , and the first rolling member  22 - 161  and the second rolling member  22 - 162  are disposed on the first track  22 - 151  correspondingly. By means of the arrangement of the guiding assembly  22 - 150 , the movable portion  22 - 130  is supported on the base  22 - 120 , and the mode of movement for the movable portion  22 - 130  relative to the fixed portion  22 -F may be limited. In the present embodiment, the movable portion  22 - 130  moves along the first track  22 - 151  in a horizontal direction (the Y axis). 
       FIG.  241    is a cross-sectional view illustrating along line B-B shown in  FIG.  239   . As shown in  FIG.  241   , the guiding assembly  22 - 150  further includes a second track  22 - 152  that is disposed on the movable portion  22 - 130  and corresponds to the first track  22 - 151 . In other words, when viewed in a direction that is parallel to the main axis  22 -C, the first track  22 - 151  and the second track  22 - 152  at least partially overlap. Similarly, the second track  22 - 152  may include metallic material, and thereby the durability of the second track  22 - 152  may be enhanced. In some embodiments, the first track  22 - 151  and the second track  22 - 152  completely overlap. The first rolling member  22 - 161  is disposed between the first track  22 - 151  and the second track  22 - 152 , and abuts the first track  22 - 151  and the second track  22 - 152  at the same time. In some embodiments, a lubricant (not shown) is disposed on the first track  22 - 151  and/or the second track  22 - 152 . As a result, the lubricant may be located between the first rolling member  22 - 161  and the first track  22 - 151 , the second track  22 - 152 , making the movement of the first rolling member  22 - 161  smoother. In some embodiments, the first track  22 - 151  may be parallel to the second track  22 - 152 . 
       FIG.  242    is a perspective view illustrating the base  22 - 120  and the guiding assembly  22 - 150  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  242   , the base  22 - 120  further includes a magnetic permeable structure  22 - 123  that is embedded in the base  22 - 120 . A magnetic attraction force may be generated by the magnetic permeable structure  22 - 123  and the magnetic member  22 - 141 , and therefore helping to arrange the movable portion  22 - 130  on the base  22 - 120 . In addition, the magnetic permeable structure  22 - 123 , the circuit component  22 - 170  and the first track  22 - 151  are located at different heights in the base  22 - 120 , respectively. It should be appreciated that the “height” discussed in the present disclosure means different positions in the Z axis. In the present embodiment, the circuit component  22 - 170  is located between the magnetic permeable structure  22 - 123  and the first track  22 - 151 , but the present disclosure is not limited thereto. 
     The first track  22 - 151  has at least one bending portion  22 - 153  that extends in a direction that is not parallel to the extending direction (the Y axis) of the first track  22 - 151 . The bending portion  22 - 153  may extend towards the interior of the base  22 - 120 , and therefore helping to stably arrange the first track  22 - 151  on the base  22 - 120 . The first track  22 - 151  further includes a first recess  22 - 156  and second recesses  22 - 157 , wherein either the first recess  22 - 156  or the second recesses  22 - 157  are disposed on three sides of the base  22 - 120 . In the present embodiment, the first recess  22 - 156  and the second recesses  22 - 157  are disposed on different sides of the base  22 - 120 , and the first recess  22 - 156  is located between two second recesses  22 - 157 . The length of the first recess  22 - 156  in the Y axis is longer than the length of the second recesses  22 - 157  in the Y axis. In some embodiments, the cross-section of the first recess  22 - 156  is V-shaped, and the cross-section of the second recesses  22 - 157  is U-shaped. By means of the above design, the difficult for arranging the first rolling member  22 - 161  and/or the second rolling member  22 - 162  may be reduced, and the tolerance may be dealt with in time. 
     In the present embodiment, the first rolling members  22 - 161  and the second rolling member  22 - 162  are disposed in the first recess  22 - 156 . The second rolling member  22 - 162  is adjacent to the first rolling members  22 - 161  (such as located between two first rolling members  22 - 161 ). The arrangement of the first rolling members  22 - 161  and the second rolling member  22 - 162  may have a positive effect to the rolling of the first rolling members  22 - 161  and the second rolling member  22 - 162 . In addition, single first rolling member  22 - 161  is disposed in the second recess  22 - 157 . 
       FIG.  243    is a perspective view illustrating the base  22 - 120  and the circuit component  22 - 171  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  243   , the circuit component  22 - 171  is disposed on the base  22 - 120 . For example, circuit component  22 - 171  may be a printed circuit board (PCB), a flexible printed circuit board (FPC) or any other suitable circuit component. The circuit component  22 - 171  may be electrically connected to the integrated circuit component  22 - 180 , and therefore transmitting electric signals. In addition, an electric component  22 - 181  is disposed on the circuit component  22 - 171 . For example, the electric component  22 - 181  may be a capacitor, a resistor, an inductor or any other suitable electric component. In the present embodiment, when viewed in a direction (the Z axis) that is perpendicular to the direction of motion of the movable portion  22 - 130 , the circuit component  22 - 171  and the first track  22 - 151  do not overlap. 
       FIG.  244    is a perspective view illustrating the movable portion  22 - 130  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  244   , a metallic member  22 - 133  is embedded in the movable portion  22 - 130 , wherein the metallic member  22 - 133  and the second track  22 - 152  are disposed at different heights. In some embodiments, the metallic member  22 - 133  has a material with a certain magnetic permeability, such that a magnetic attraction force may be generated by the metallic member  22 - 133  and the magnetic member  22 - 141 , and therefore helping to arrange the magnetic member  22 - 141  at a correct position. The metallic member  22 - 133  further includes an extending portion  22 - 134 , which extends along a direction (the Z axis) that is not parallel to the direction of motion of the movable portion  22 - 130 . By means of the arrangement of the extending portion  22 - 134 , the structural strength of the movable portion  22 - 130  may be enhanced. 
       FIG.  245    is a perspective view illustrating the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. It should be appreciated that in order to clearly show the interior structure of the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101 , the housing  22 - 110  is not illustrated in the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG.  245   , the movable portion  22 - 130  further includes a stopping structure  22 - 135  that extends towards the housing  22 - 110 . By means of the arrangement of the stopping structure  22 - 135 , the position of the movable portion  22 - 130  may be located. In addition, the movable portion  22 - 130  has containing spaces  22 - 136  that are adjacent to the stopping structure  22 - 135 . In the present embodiment, the stopping structure  22 - 135  is located between two containing spaces  22 - 136 . A damping material (not shown) may be disposed in the containing spaces  22 - 136 , and therefore the damping material is located between the movable portion  22 - 130  and the housing  22 - 110 . In some embodiments, the shortest distance between the damping material and the housing  22 - 110  is not longer than the shortest distance between the stopping structure  22 - 135  and the housing  22 - 110 . The arrangement of the damping material may help to reduce the impact between the movable portion  22 - 130  and the housing  22 - 110 . For example, the damping material may include gel or any other material with certain flexibility. 
       FIG.  246    is a top view illustrating the base  22 - 120  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  246   , the base  22 - 120  has a top surface  22 - 121  that faces the movable portion  22 - 130 . A plurality of holes  22 - 124 A,  22 - 124 B are formed on the top surface  22 - 121 , wherein the size of the holes  22 - 124 A is different from the size of the holes  22 - 124 B. The arrangement of the holes  22 - 124 A and  22 - 124 B may help for the thermal-dissipation of the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101 . 
       FIG.  247    is a bottom view illustrating the base  22 - 120  in accordance with an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in  FIG.  247   , the base  22 - 120  has a bottom surface  22 - 122  that is opposite to the top surface  22 - 121 . A plurality of holes  22 - 124 C,  22 - 124 D are formed on the bottom surface  22 - 122 , wherein the size of the holes  22 - 124 C is different from the size of the holes  22 - 124 D. Similarly, the arrangement of the holes  22 - 124 C and  22 - 124 D may also help for the thermal-dissipation of the optical member driving mechanism  22 - 101 . In addition, in some embodiments, the holes  22 - 124 A,  22 - 124 B located on the top surface  22 - 121  do not communicate with the holes  22 - 124 C,  22 - 124 D located on the bottom surface  22 - 122 . In some embodiments, when viewed in the extending direction (the Z axis) of the above holes, holes  22 - 124 A,  22 - 124 B do not overlap holes  22 - 124 C,  22 - 124 D. 
     As set forth above, the embodiments of the present disclosure provide an optical member driving mechanism including a guiding assembly that is configured to limit the mode of movement for the movable portion relative to the fixed portion. Since the guiding assembly includes metallic material, and therefore the structural strength and durability of the guiding assembly may be enhanced. 
     Twenty-Third Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIG.  248   ,  FIG.  248    is a schematic view showing the driving mechanism for an optical element  23 - 100 . The driving mechanism for an optical element  23 - 100  can be used, for example, to drive and sustain an optical element (such as a reflector lens or mirror), and can be disposed inside a camera module of an electronic device (such as a camera, a tablet or a mobile phone). When light (incident light) from the outside enters the camera module, by the optical lens driven via the driving mechanism for an optical element  23 - 100 , the light can be changed from the original incident direction, and the angle direction thereof can be adjusted to enter the optical lens in the camera module, and the light can pass through the optical lens to an photosensitive element (such as image sensor) to obtain an image. With the above configuration, the thickness of the camera module of the electronic device in the Z-axis direction can be greatly saved, so as to achieve miniaturization. The detailed structure of the driving mechanism for an optical element  23 - 100  will be described below. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  248  and  249   , wherein  FIG.  249    is an exploded view of the driving mechanism for an optical element  23 - 100 , which comprises a support body  23 - 10 , a movable portion  23 - 30 , a driving assembly  23 -MC and an elastic assembly  23 -ES. The support body  23 - 10  includes a base  23 - 11  and a casing  23 - 12 . The casing  23 - 11  is connected to and disposed on the base  23 - 11  to form a receiving space  23 -SP which is configured to accommodate receive the movable portion  23 - 30 , the driving assembly  23 -MC and the elastic assembly  23 -ES for protection. A connecting element  23 -RD of the movable part  23 - 30  can be connected to an optical element  23 -LM, and the movable portion  23 - 30  is located over the base  23 - 11  and is movably connected to the casing  23 - 12  through the elastic assembly  23 -ES. The driving assembly  23 -MC is disposed between the base  23 - 11  and the movable portion  23 - 30 , and is configured to drive the movable portion  23 - 30  relative to the base  23 - 11  and the casing  23 - 12  to move, to adjust the position of the optical element, thereby achieving the purpose of optical auto-focusing (AF) or optical image stabilization (OIS). In some embodiments, the connecting element  23 -RD is a connecting rod extending along a direction (X-axis) that is perpendicular to the extending direction (Z-axis) of the elastic component  23 -ES. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  250  and  251   , in this embodiment, the elastic assembly  23 -ES has four elastic elements: a first elastic element  23 -E 1 , a second elastic element  23 -E 2 , a third elastic element  23 -E 3  and a fourth elastic element  23 -E 4 . Each elastic element has a sheet structure and can be a leaf spring. The first elastic element  23 -E 1  and the second elastic element  23 -E 2  are disposed on the front side of the movable portion  23 - 30  (the first side  23 - 30 S 1 ), and the second elastic element  23 -E 3  and the fourth elastic element  23 -E 4  are disposed on the rear side of the moving part  23 - 30  (the second side  23 - 30 S 2 ). The first to fourth elastic elements  23 -E 1  to  23 -E 4  connect the upper side of the casing  23 - 12  (or its upper shell  23 - 12 T) and the movable portion  23 - 30 , so that the movable portion  23 - 30  is suspended from the casing  23 - 12  and is suspended in the receiving space  23 -SP, and there is a gap  23 -G between the movable portion  23 - 30  and the upper surface of the base  23 - 11  ( FIG.  252   ). 
     The extending direction  23 -DE (Z-axis) of the elastic elements  23 -E 1  to  23 -E 4  are toward the base  23 - 11 , the first and second elastic elements  23 -E 1 ,  23 -E 2 , and the third and fourth elastic elements  23 -E 3 ,  23 -E 4  are arranged in parallel in a first direction  23 -D 1  (X-axis), and the first and second elastic elements  23 -E 1  and  23 -E 2  are at different positions in a second direction  23 -D 2  (Y-axis) direction, and the third and fourth elastic elements  23 -E 3 ,  23 -E 4  are at different positions in the second direction  23 -D 2  (Y-axis) direction, wherein the second direction  23 -D 2  is perpendicular to the first direction  23 -D 1 . 
     The movable portion  23 - 30  has an extended connection portion  23 - 302  which is adjacent to the base  23 - 11  and away from the upper shell  23 - 12 T of the casing  23 - 12 . The first and second elastic elements  23 -E 1  and  23 -E 2  are connected to the extended connection portion  23 - 302  and the upper shell  23 - 12 T of the casing  23 - 12 . The third and fourth elastic elements  23 -E 3  and  23 -E 4  connect a connecting surface  23 - 30 C of the movable portion  23 - 30  on the second side  20 - 30 S 2  with the upper shell  23 - 12 T. Seen from the first direction  23 -D 1 , the first to fourth elastic elements  23 -E 1  to  23 -E 4  do not overlap each other. In some embodiments, in the first direction  23 -D 2 , the first and second elastic elements  23 -E 1 ,  23 -E 2  overlap each other, and the third and fourth elastic elements  23 -E 3 ,  23 -E 4  overlap each other. The above-mentioned configuration helps to stabilize the movable portion  23 - 30  to be suspended inside the casing  23 - 12 . In addition, in some embodiments, the base  23 - 11  has a recessed portion  23 -R. Seen from the extension direction  23 -DE, the movable portion  23 - 30  is located above the recessed portion  23 -R. Seen from the first or second direction  23 -D 1 ,  23 -D 2 , the sidewall of the recessed portion  23 -R overlaps the movable portion  23 - 30 , which helps to limit the movement of the movable portion  23 - 30  to avoid causing excessive shaking. 
     The connecting element  23 -RD of the aforementioned movable portions  23 - 30  extends along the first direction  23 -D 1  (X-axis) to connect the optical element  23 -LM, and the connecting element  23 -RD is perpendicular to the extending direction DE (Z-axis) of each of elastic elements  23 -E 1  to  23 -E 4 . The connecting element  23 -RD is connected to the optical element  23 -LM through an opening  23 -OP of the casing  23 - 12 . The opening  23 -OP has a larger diameter or a caliber than the connecting element  23 -RD. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  251  and  252   , the bottom of the movable portion  23 - 30  has a recess (or groove)  23 - 301 , and the opening of the recess  23 - 301  faces the base  23 - 11  and faces the recessed portion  23 -R of the base  23 - 11 . The aforementioned driving assembly  23 -MC is disposed in the recess  23 - 301 . In detail, the driving assembly  23 -MC may be an electromagnetic driving assembly, which includes a magnetic element  23 -M and a coil  23 -C, which are respectively disposed on the bottom surface  23 - 30 B of the movable portion  23 - 30  and base  23 - 11  and arranged along the extension direction  24 -DE. The magnetic element  23 -M and the coil  23 -C correspond to each other. When a driving signal is applied to the driving component  23 -MC (for example, by applying an electric current through an external power source), a magnetic force is generated between the magnetic element  23 -M and the coil  23 -C, thereby driving the movable portion  23 - 30  to move relative the support body  23 - 10  (including base  23 - 11  and casing  23 - 12 ), to achieve the effect of anti-shake or auto-focus of optical image. In this embodiment, the driving assembly  23 -MC is a moving magnetic type; in another embodiment, it may be a moving coil type. In addition, before the driving signal is applied, the aforementioned elastic component  23 -ES can keep the movable portion in an initial position relative to the support body  23 - 10 . 
     In this embodiment, the driving mechanism  23 - 100  includes a permeability element  23 -GM disposed between the movable portion  23 - 30  and the driving assembly  23 -MC. In detail, it is located between the bottom surface  23 - 30 B and the magnetic element  23 -M, so that the magnetic force of the magnetic element  23 -M can be concentrated in a predetermined direction to enhance the magnetic force of the driving assembly  23 -MC to drive the movable portion  23 - 30 , and the magnetic interference can be decreased. In another embodiment, the permeability element  23 -GM can be embedded in a part of the bottom surface  23 - 30 B of the movable portion  23 - 30  which is corresponding to the magnetic element  23 -M, so that the movable portion  23 - 30  includes permeability conductive material, and the magnetic element  23 -M can be directly contacted and fixed on the bottom surface  23 - 30 B. In addition to strengthening the magnetic force (between the magnetic element  23 -M and the coil  23 -C) in a predetermined direction, it can also strengthen the overall mechanical strength of the movable portion  23 - 30 . 
     The driving mechanism  23 - 100  includes a position sensing element  23 -EN, which may be a position sensor, for example, a magnetoresistive sensor (MRS) or optical sensor, which is used to sense the relative positional relationship between the movable portion  23 - 30  and the base  23 - 11 , which facilitates a control unit (not shown) to adjust the positions between the two by the driving assembly  23 -MC. It is worth noting that the position sensing element  23 -EN is provided in the hollow portion of the coil  23 -C, or that the position sensing element  23 -EN is surrounded by the coil  23 -C. This configuration can make full use of space and is good for miniaturization. In this embodiment, the position sensing element  23 -EN can share the magnetic element  23 -M with the coil  23 -C. 
     A circuit component  23 -CA is disposed on the base  23 - 11 , and is used to electrically connect the driving assembly  23 -MC and the position sensing element  23 -EN. In this embodiment, the circuit assembly  23 -CA is formed by insert molding on the body of the base  23 - 11 . In another embodiment, the base  23 - 11  may include a circuit board component, such as a printed circuit board (PCB), which is disposed on the body of the base  23 - 11  and is electrically connected to the driving assembly  23 -MC and position sensing element  23 -EN. 
     Referring to  FIGS.  252  and  253   , when the driving assembly  23 -MC drives the movable portion  23 - 30  to move relative to the support body  23 - 10 , the connecting element  23 -RD of the movable portion  23 - 30  also drives the optical element  23 -LM to move relative to the support body  23 - 10 .  FIG.  253    shows that the movable portion  23 - 30  moves in the first direction  23 -D 1  (X-axis) relative to the support body  10 , and drives the optical element  23 -LM to move in the first direction  23 -D 1 . Through the magnetic element  23 -M and the coil  23 -C of the driving assembly  23 -MC, the movable portion  23 - 30  (with the optical element  23 -LM together) can also be moved in the second direction  30 -D 2 . That is, the driving unit  23 -MC can move the movable portion  23 - 30  and the optical element  23 -LM relative to the support body  23 - 10  on the XY plane. 
     In this way, the movable portion  23 - 30  is suspended through the elastic assembly  23 -ES so that it can be movably set over the base  23 - 11 , and the movable portion  23 - 30  is driven by the drive assembly  23 -MC to move relative to the support body  23 - 10 , so that the optical element  23 -LM moves together. By adjusting the incident angle of the reflected light from the optical element  23 -LM into the optical lens, it can achieve the effects of optical focusing or optical image stabilization. 
     It should be noted that, with respect to the aforementioned elastic assembly  23 -ES, in some embodiments, one elastic element may be provided on each of the first side  23 - 30 S 1  and the second side  23 - 30 S 2  of the movable portion  23 - 30 . For example, providing the first elastic element  23 -E 1  and the first elastic element  23 -E 4 , can also hang the movable portion  23 - 30  on the casing  23 - 12 . In other embodiments, the elastic assembly  23 -ES may also include only one elastic element, which connects the upper shell  23 - 12 T of the casing  23 - 12  and the top surface  23 - 30 T of the movable portion  23 - 30  to suspend it in receiving space  23 -SP. 
     In summary, an embodiment of the present invention provides a driving mechanism for an optical element, including a support body, a movable portion, an elastic assembly, and a driving assembly. The movable portion is located in the support body and is movable relative to the support body, and is used to connect an optical element. The elastic assembly is movably connected to the support body and the movable portion. The driving assembly is disposed on the support body and the movable portion, and is configured to drive the movable portion to move relative to the support body. In some embodiments, the movable portion is suspended in the support body through the elastic element, and when the movable portion is driven by the driving assembly to move relative to the support body, the movable portion is configured to drive the optical element to move. The support body includes a base and a casing, the casing is connected to and disposed on the base, the elastic assembly movably connects the casing and the movable portion, and the driving assembly is disposed between the base and the movable portion, and the movable portion is suspended from the casing through the elastic element. 
     The embodiment of the present invention has at least one of the following advantages or effects, in that the movable portion is suspended from the casing by an elastic assembly so that it is disposed on the base in a movable manner, and the movable portion is driven to move with the optical element together relative to the base by the driving assembly, to adjust the incident angle of the light reflected by the optical element into the optical lens, the effects of optical focusing and optical image stabilization can be achieved. By suspending the movable portion through the elastic assembly, as compared with setting a suspension movable frame, the embodiment of the present invention can greatly reduce the space occupied by the suspension component inside the driving mechanism, and is conducive to miniaturization. Furthermore, due to the lightness and flexibility of the elastic assembly, the sensitivity and accuracy of the movable portion can be improved when it is moving, thereby increasing the accuracy of moving the optical element. 
     Twenty-Fourth Group of Embodiments 
     Referring to  FIG.  254   ,  FIG.  254    is a schematic view showing an optical system  24 - 100  according to an embodiment of the present invention. The optical system  24 - 100  can be disposed inside an electronic device (such as a camera, a tablet or a mobile phone). For example, when light (incident light) from the outside enters the optical system  24 - 100  along an incident direction, the light can pass through an optical element  24 -LS (such as a lens assembly) disposed in the optical system  24 - 100 , and then to an image sensor module  24 -IM, to obtain an image. The detailed structure the optical system  24 - 100  will be described below. 
     The optical system  24 - 100  comprises an optical module  24 -OM, an image sensor module  24 -IM, and an adjustment assembly  24 -AS. The adjustment assembly  24 -AS is located between the optical module  24 -OM and the image sensor module  24 -IM, and disposed on a bottom surface  24 -OMB of the optical module  24 -OM. Viewing along a first direction  24 -D 1  that is perpendicular to a main axis  24 -P of the optical system  24 - 100  (or perpendicular to an optical axis  24 -O of the optical element  24 -LS), the adjustment assembly  24 -AS does not overlap the optical module  24 -OM. 
     The aforementioned optical module  24 -OM may be a lens driving module including a housing  24 -H, a movable portion  24 -V and a base  24 - 10 . The housing  24 -H and the movable portion  24 -V are disposed on the base  24 - 10 , the housing  24 -H and the base  24 - 10  form an accommodating space, and the movable portion  24 -V is disposed in the accommodating space. The movable portion  24 -V includes a frame  24 - 20 , a holder  24 - 30 , a driving assembly  24 -MC, and an elastic assembly  24 -ES. The accommodating space formed by the housing  24 -H connected to and disposed on the base  24 - 10  can receive the movable portion  24 -V (including the holder  24 - 30 , the drive assembly  24 -MC and elastic assembly  24 -ES) for protection. 
     The holder  24 - 30  is used to carry the optical element  24 -LS, and is movably connected to the base  24 - 10  and the frame  24 - 20  through the elastic assembly  24 -ES. The driving assembly  24 -MC is disposed on the holder  24 - 30  and the frame  24 - 20 , and is used to drive the holder  24 - 30  and the optical element  24 -LS to move relative to the base  24 - 10  and the frame  24 - 20  to adjust the posture or position of the optical element  24 -LS, thereby achieving the purpose of optical auto-focusing (AF) or optical image stabilization (OIS). 
     In detail about the elastic assembly  24 -ES, the elastic assembly  24 -ES includes a first elastic element  24 -E 1  and a second elastic element  24 -E 2 , which are respectively disposed on the upper and lower sides of the holder  24 - 30 , and movably connected to the holder  24 - 30 , the base  24 - 10  and the frame  24 - 20 , so that the holder  24 - 30  can move relative to the base  24 - 10  and the frame  24 - 20 . 
     The aforementioned driving assembly  24 -MC may be an electromagnetic driving assembly, which includes a coil  24 -C and a magnetic element  24 -M, which are respectively disposed on movable portion  24 - 30  and the frame  20 . The magnetic element  24 -M and the coil  24 -C correspond to each other. When a driving signal is applied to the driving assembly  24 -MC (for example, by applying an electric current through an external power source to the coil  24 -C), a magnetic force is generated between the magnetic element  24 -M and the coil  24 -C, thereby the driving assembly  24 -MC can drive the movable portion  24 - 30  with the optical element  24 -LS to move relative the base  24 - 10 , to achieve the effect of anti-shake or auto-focus of optical image. In this embodiment, the driving assembly  24 -MC is a moving coil type; in another embodiment, it may be a moving magnetic type. In addition, before the driving signal is applied, the aforementioned elastic assembly  24 -ES can keep the movable portion in an initial position relative to the base  24 - 10 . 
     Referring to  FIGS.  254  and  255   , the aforementioned adjustment assembly  24 -AS includes a plurality of adjustment columns  24 -A 1 , which are disposed on the bottom surface  24 -OMB of the base  24 - 10  and extend along a second direction  24 -D 2  (the second direction  24 -D 2  is not perpendicular to the optical axis  24 -O, such as parallel or approximately parallel to the Z-axis), and is used to adjust the relative positions of the optical module  24 -OM and the image sensor module  24 -IM. Specifically, the adjustment assembly  24 -AS are used to adjust the optical axis  24 -O of the optical element  24 -LS set in the optical module  24 -OM and the central axis  24 -Q of the image sensor module  24 -IM so that they overlap or are parallel. 
     In this embodiment, the adjustment assembly  24 -AS includes four adjustment columns  24 -A 1 , which are disposed at the edges of the bottom surface  24 -OMB of the optical module  24 -OM and located on different sides of the bottom surface  24 -OMB. It should be noted that, in other embodiments, the adjusting assembly  24 -AS may include three adjusting columns  24 -A 1 , which are disposed at the edges of the bottom surface  24 -OMB of the optical module  24 -OM, and all three are located on the different sides of the bottom surface  24 -OMB. 
     Referring to  FIG.  256   , when performing the assembling process of the image sensor module  24 -IM and the optical module  24 -OM, a positioning device  24 - 601  positions the optical module  24 -OM into a first position, wherein the positioning device  24 - 601  includes a holding member  24 - 6011  and a limiting member  24 - 6012 . The holding member  24 - 6011  is used to clamp the top of the optical module  24 -OM. The limiting member  24 - 6012  is provided on two sides of the holding member  24 - 6011  or the optical module  24 -OM, and used to limit or restrict the position of the optical module  24 -OM, to avoid damage caused by excessive shaking during the assembly process. In addition, when viewed from a direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  24 -P, the adjustment assembly  24 -AS protrudes from a limiting surface  24 - 6012 F of the limiting member  24 - 6012 , and the limiting surface  24 - 6012 F is protruding from the base  24 - 10  of the optical module  24 -OM. 
     Continuing to refer to  FIG.  256   , when the optical element  24 -LS is disposed on the optical module  24 -OM and the main axis  24 -P is relatively inclined or skewed relative to the optical axis  24 -O (for example, the optical element  24 -LS placed in the holder  24 - 30  and is not fully aligned with the center of the holder  24 - 30  will make the optical axis  24 -O and the main axis  24 -P not parallel or coincide), the angle difference  24 -θ between the two is obtained by a measuring device  24 - 501  (such as an angle measuring device), to provide a measuring information  24 -S 1 . Next, the measuring device  24 - 501  transmits the measurement information  24 -S 1  to an adjusting device  24 -JA. The adjusting device  24 -JA changes the shape or appearance of the adjusting assembly  24 -AS according to the aforementioned measurement information  24 -S 1 , as shown in  FIG.  257   . The adjusting device  24 -JA can be a thermal welding member, such as a thermal welding head, and the shape of the adjusting assembly  24 -AS can be changed by hot melting. In addition, since the limiting surface  24 - 6012 F of the limiting member  24 - 6012  protrudes from the base  24 - 10  of the optical module  24 -OM, when the adjusting device  24 -JA presses the adjustment assembly  24 -AS and the optical module  24 -OM, the damage to optical module  24 -OM can be avoided to protect the optical module  24 -OM. 
     In this embodiment, due to the inclination angle of the optical axis  24 -O (relative to the main axis  24 -P) determined via the measuring device  24 - 501 , the adjusting device  24 -JA changes the adjustment columns  24 -A 1 , so that the connecting line  24 -CL of the free ends of the adjustment columns  24 -A 1  is perpendicular to the optical axis  24 -O, or say an alignment plane  24 -CP that is formed by connecting lines of at least three free ends of the adjustment columns  24 -A 1  is perpendicular to the optical axis  24 -O. 
     As shown in  FIGS.  257  to  258   , the height of the right adjustment column  24 -A 1  on the Z-axis is more reduced than that of the left adjustment column  24 -A 1  on the Z-axis, so that the alignment plane  24 -CP is perpendicular to the optical axis  24 -O. And then, the adjusting device  24 -JA is removed. In this way, the image sensor module IM is then placed on these adjusted adjustment columns  24 -A 1 . As shown in  FIG.  259   , the central axis  24 -Q of the image sensor module  24 -IM is parallel or coincides the optical axis  24 -O, to achieve good alignment between the modules. 
     In some embodiments, the measuring device  24 - 501  may determine an angular difference between the optical axis  24 -O in the  24 -OM and the central axis  24 -Q of the image sensor module  24 -IM based on the degree of blur and focus of the image obtained by light through the optical module  24 -OM to the image sensor module  24 -IM. 
     In some embodiments, the image sensor module  24 -IM includes a filter element  24 -FL, which is disposed on the image sensor element  24 -IMM, which may be an infrared filter that filters infrared light to the image sensor element  24 -IMM. In the direction that is perpendicular to the main axis  24 -P or in the main axis  24 -P direction, the filter element  24 -FL is located between the aforementioned adjustment columns  24 -A 1  and does not overlap with the adjustment columns  24 -A 1 . In some embodiments, in the main axis  24 -P direction, the filter element  24 -FL is embedded in the base  24 - 10  and overlaps at least a part of the adjustment columns  24 -A 1 . 
     According to the above embodiment, the present invention provides a method for adjusting the optical system  24 - 800 . As shown in  FIG.  260   , first, a positioning device positions the optical module (step  24 - 802 ), and then a measuring device measures an angular difference between the main axis of the first optical module and the optical axis of an optical element sustained by the first optical module to obtain measurement information (step  24 - 804 ). Then, an adjusting device changes the shape of an adjustment assembly of the first optical module according to the measurement information (step  24 - 806 ), and assembling the first optical module with an optical object (such as an image sensor module or the second optical module in  FIG.  264   ), wherein the optical axis of the optical element is parallel to the central axis of the optical object (step  24 - 808 ). 
     In this way, the method for adjusting the optical system  24 - 800  is provided with an adjustment module  24 -AS between the optical module  24 -OM and the image sensor module  24 -IM, and the appearance of the adjustment assembly  24 -AS can be changed, so that the assembly of the image sensor module  24 -IM and the optical module  24 -OM can be accurately adjusted, and the central axis  24 -Q and the optical axis  24 -O are parallel or coincide, so as to improve the image quality of the device. 
     In some embodiments, as shown in  FIG.  261   , another adjusting device  24 -JA′ may be disposed on the bottom plate  24 - 40  of the image sensor module  24 -IM, which includes a flat or planar metal plate  24 -JA′  1  facing the adjustment assembly  24 -AS, and can be connected to an external heat source through a heating circuit of the adjusting device  24 -JA′ to make it heat up. When the image sensor module  24 -IM and the optical module  24 -OM are being assembled, the shape of the adjustment columns  24 -A 1  can be changed by the heat provided via the flat metal plate  24 -JA′  1  of the adjusting device  24 -JA′. In this way, compared with an externally independent adjusting device  24 -JA in  FIG.  257   , after the steps of the adjusting device  24 -JA′ in this embodiment changing the adjustment assembly  24 -AS is complete, the adjusting device  24 -JA′ continues in contact with the adjustment assembly  24 -AS, which can save the procedure of removing the adjusting device  24 -JA′. 
     In some embodiments, after the adjusting device changed the shape of the adjustment assembly of the first optical module according to the measurement information (step  24 - 804 ), the position of the optical module  24 -OM can be adjusted through the positioning device  24 - 601 , as shown in  FIGS.  258  and  261   , which shows that the optical module  24 -OM moves from the first position ( FIG.  258   ) to the second position ( FIG.  261   ). So that the optical axis is parallel to the central axis, and then the optical module  24 -OM and the image sensor module  24 -IM are assembled, as shown in  FIG.  262   . In this embodiment, the optical module  24 -OM is placed on the image sensor module  24 -IM. 
     As shown in  FIG.  263   , in some embodiments, the measuring device  24 - 501 ′ belongs to a part of the optical module  24 -OM, and may be a position-sensing assembly disposed on the base  24 - 10  of the optical module  24 -OM. In some embodiments, it also can be the position sensor for the driving assembly  24 -MC. This can save an external measuring device. 
       FIGS.  264  to  266    show the optical system  24 - 200  of another embodiment in the present invention. Different from the optical system  24 - 100  in  FIG.  254   , the optical system  24 - 200  in this embodiment has two optical modules: a first optical module  24 -OM 1  and a second optical module  24 -OM 2 , wherein they can be the same or similar components, or with slightly different appearances and proportion scale. The adjustment assembly  24 -AS has a plurality of first adjustment columns  24 -A 1  (first adjustment sub-assembly) and a plurality of second adjustment columns  24 -A 2  (second adjustment sub-assembly). The first optical module  24 -OM 1 , the first adjustment columns  24 -A 1 , the second optical module  24 -OM 2 , the second adjustment columns  24 -A 2 , and the image sensor module  24 -IM are sequentially arranged along the first optical axis  24 -O 1  of the first optical element  24 -LS 1  (or the second optical axis  24 -O 2  of the second optical element  24 -LS 2 , the main axis  24 -P of the first optical module  24 -OM 1 , the central axis  24 -Q of the image sensor module  24 -IM). 
     When the first and second optical modules  24 -OM 1 ,  24 -OM 2 , and image sensor module  24 -IM are to be assembled, first, as shown in  FIG.  264   , the holding member  24 - 6011 A of the positioning device  24 - 601  holds the first optical module  24 -OM 1  for positioning. When the first optical element  24 -LS 1  and the first optical module  24 -OM 1  are relatively inclined, the angle difference between the main axis  24 -P and the first optical axis  24 -O 1  is obtained by the measuring device  24 - 501 , and the first measurement information  24 -S 1  is obtained. 
     Next, as shown in  FIG.  265   , the upper surface  24 -UB 1  of the second optical module  24 -OM 2  is pressed against the adjustment sub-assembly  24 -A 1  on the bottom surface  24 -OMB of the base  24 - 10  of the first optical module  24 -OM 1 , and the shape of first adjustment columns  24 -A 1  is changed according to the aforementioned first measurement information  24 - 51 , for example, through the adjusting device  24 -JA provided on the optical object in  FIG.  261    (or the external adjusting device  24 - 501  as shown in  FIG.  257   , which causes the first adjustment columns  24 -A 1  to be heated to change its shape), wherein the limiting surface  24 - 6012 F 1  of the limiting member  24 - 6012  provides a restricting function, which can avoid hurting the first optical module  24 -OM 1 , and align the first and second optical axes  24 -O 1 ,  24 -O 2  of the first and second optical modules  24 -OM 1 ,  24 -OM 2 . 
     Next, as shown in  FIG.  266   , the angle difference between the second optical axis  24 -O 2  and a central axis  24 -Q of the image sensor module  24 -IM is measured by the measuring device  24 - 501 , to obtain a second measuring information  24 -S 2 . The positioning device  24 - 601  then moves the assembled first and second optical modules  24 -OM 1 ,  24 -OM 2  into an alignment position according to the second measurement information  24 -S 2 , so that the first and second optical axes  24 -O 1 ,  24 -O 2  can be parallel or coincide with the central axis  24 -Q of the image sensor module  24 -IM, and then the first and second optical modules  24 -OM 1 ,  24 -OM 2  is assembled with the image sensor module  24 -IM. The shape of the second adjustment sub-assembly  24 -A 2  (located on the lower surface  24 -UB 2  of the second optical module  24 -OM 1 ) can be changed by the contact of the image sensor module  24 -IM (for example, using the method in  FIG.  261   ). Furthermore, the limiting surface  24 - 6012 F 2  of the limiting member  24 - 6012  can avoid damage to the second optical module  24 -OM 2 . In this way, the first and second optical axes  24 -O 1 ,  24 -O 2 , and the central axis  24 -Q can be made parallel or coincide, so that the optical system  24 - 200  has excellent alignment between modules. 
     According to the above embodiment, the present invention provides a method for adjusting an optical system  24 - 900 , as shown in  FIG.  267   . First, a positioning device positions a first optical module and a second optical module (step  24 - 902 ), and a measuring device measures the angle difference between the main axis of the first optical module and the first optical axis of the first optical element carried by the first optical module, to obtain first measurement information (step  24 - 904 ). An adjusting device changes the shape of the first adjustment sub-assembly of the adjustment assembly connected to the first optical module according to the first measurement information (step  24 - 906 ). 
     In some embodiments, the method for adjusting the optical system  24 - 900  further comprises: the measuring device measuring the angle difference between the second optical axis and the central axis of the image sensor module, to obtain second measurement information (step  24 - 908 ), and the positioning device positions the assembled first and second optical module into an alignment position according to the second measurement information, and makes the first optical axis and the second optical axis parallel to the central axis of the image sensor module (steps  24 - 910 ). The step  24 - 910  includes: adjusting the shape of a second adjustment sub-assembly of the adjustment assembly using an adjusting device, and assembling the second optical module with the image sensor module. 
     It should be noted that the features of the various embodiments can be combined and used as long as they do not violate or conflict the scope of the disclosure. In addition, as for the adjustment columns, first and second adjustment columns in  FIGS.  254  to  267   , the structure of those adjustment columns as disclosed in  FIGS.  226  and  227    can be used, and the first, second optical modules  24 -OM 1 ,  24 -OM 2 , and the image sensor module  24 -IM may have the structures of the opponent members  20 -OB 1  to  20 -OB 3  as shown in  FIG.  225   . 
     In summary, an embodiment of the present invention provides a method for adjusting the optical system, including a positioning device positioning a first optical module; a measuring device measuring an angular difference between the main axis of the first optical module and the optical axis of an optical element sustained by the first optical module to obtain measurement information; an adjusting device changing the shape of an adjustment assembly of the first optical module according to the measurement information; and assembling the first optical module with an optical object, wherein the optical axis of the optical element is parallel to the central axis of the optical object. 
     The embodiment of the present invention has at least one of the following advantages or effects. Through the adjustment assembly, a plurality of optical modules can be aligned with each other, and one or more optical modules and an image sensor module can be aligned with each other, so as to improve the quality of the device. In addition, since the adjustment assembly can change its shape during adjustment process (usually being squeezed and reduced in height in the vertical direction), the adjustment between the optical module and the image sensor module can be more accurate and greatly improved product quality. 
     While the embodiments and the advantages of the present disclosure have been described above, it should be understood that those skilled in the art may make various changes, substitutions, and alterations to the present disclosure without departing from the spirit and scope of the present disclosure. In addition, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the processes, machines, manufacture, composition, devices, methods and steps in the specific embodiments described in the specification. Those skilled in the art may understand existing or developing processes, machines, manufacture, compositions, devices, methods and steps from some embodiments of the present disclosure. As long as those may perform substantially the same function in the aforementioned embodiments and obtain substantially the same result, they may be used in accordance with some embodiments of the present disclosure. Therefore, the scope of the present disclosure includes the aforementioned processes, machines, manufacture, composition, devices, methods, and steps. Furthermore, each of the appended claims constructs an individual embodiment, and the scope of the present disclosure also includes every combination of the appended claims and embodiments.